JP7433891B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

As this type of gaming machine, one has been proposed that initializes a specific storage area when a predetermined condition is met (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-175375

There is room for improvement in the process of initializing the storage area as in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with improved processing for initializing a storage area.

The gaming machine of claim 1 includes:
In gaming machines that play games,
Equipped with a microcomputer that can execute user programs,
The instructions executable by the user program include a first transfer instruction to transfer arbitrary data to a specified storage area, and a second transfer instruction to transfer data stored in a specific register to the specified storage area. including,
The second transfer instruction has a smaller program capacity than the first transfer instruction,
In a startup operation before the microcomputer is started and the user program is started, performing pre-start initialization to store 0 in the specific register;
After the user program starts, when a specific storage area is initialized at a specific timing before the 0 stored in the specific register in the pre-start initialization is rewritten by the user program , the pre-start initialization resets the specific storage area to 0. After executing an instruction to set the data of the specific register in which is stored to 0, specifying the specific storage area and executing the second transfer instruction to set the data stored in the specific storage area to 0. It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific storage area is initialized at a specific timing associated with the start of a user program, instead of using the first transfer command to transfer arbitrary data to the specified storage area, Since the second transfer instruction for transferring data stored in the register is used, the storage capacity of the program can be reduced. In addition, since 0 is stored in a specific register before the microcomputer boots up and the user program starts, normally the instruction to set the data stored in the specific register to 0 would not be executed. By specifying the specific storage area and executing the second transfer instruction, the specific storage area should be initialized, and there is no need to execute an instruction to set the data stored in the specific register to 0. Even in such a case, by specifying a specific storage area and executing a second transfer instruction after an instruction to set the data stored in a specific register to 0, data other than 0 can be saved in a specific register due to a momentary power outage, etc. Even if the stored state is maintained, it is possible to ensure that the specific storage area is initialized with the start of the user program.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a slot machine. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of gaming states. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining lottery targets in an internal lottery. It is a diagram for explaining navigation target combinations. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an execution mode of navigation notification and navigation performance. It is a diagram for explaining the probability of winning a small winning combination in the normal gaming state and the special gaming state (RB). 3 is a flowchart showing control details of main processing performed by a main control unit. It is a diagram for explaining initialization of a game RAM area and a game RAM area. 3 is a flowchart showing control details of operation signal setting processing performed by the main control unit. 3 is a flowchart showing control details of operation signal setting processing performed by the main control unit. 3 is a flowchart showing control details of operation signal setting processing performed by the main control unit. It is a diagram for explaining a symbol stop pattern setting table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a stop order data table. It is a diagram for explaining a stop execution symbol number table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a stop execution position data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an operation signal storage area. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the transmission status of operation signals in operation signal setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel stop process performed by a main control part. It is a flowchart showing control details of gaming machine information calculation processing performed by the main control section. 3 is a flowchart showing control details of each state counting process performed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the accessory ratio update process performed by a main control part. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the update status of the cumulative total buffer, the 6000-time calculation buffer, and the total cumulative calculation buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the continuous accessory ratio update process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the instruction|indication accessory ratio update process which a main control part performs. It is a figure showing an example of a display of a gaming machine information display. It is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a game auxiliary display. It is a diagram for explaining the display contents of the game auxiliary display. It is a diagram for explaining the display status of the game auxiliary display. It is a diagram for explaining the display status of the game auxiliary display. It is a diagram for explaining the display status of the game auxiliary display. It is a diagram for explaining the display status of the game auxiliary display. It is a diagram for explaining the display status of the game auxiliary display. It is a diagram for explaining the display status of the game auxiliary display. It is a diagram for explaining the display status of the game auxiliary display. It is a flowchart showing the control contents related to the initialization determination of the game auxiliary display. It is a figure for explaining the control situation when an advantageous section ends. 3 is a flowchart showing control details of 3-byte data division processing performed by the main control unit. 3 is a flowchart showing control details of 3-byte data division processing performed by the main control unit. 12 is a flowchart showing control details of a modified example of 3-byte data division processing performed by the main control unit. 12 is a flowchart showing control details of a modified example of 3-byte data division processing performed by the main control unit. 3 is a flowchart showing control details of 3-byte data addition/storage processing performed by the main control unit. 3 is a flowchart showing control details of 3-byte data 1-byte addition processing performed by the main control unit. 12 is a flowchart showing conventional control contents of 3-byte data 1-byte addition processing performed by the main control unit. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an OUT instruction and an LD instruction that can be executed by a user program. 3 is a flowchart showing control details of a process in which the main control unit 41 initializes a plurality of output ports in main processing. 7 is a flowchart showing control details of a process in which the main control unit 41 initializes a plurality of output ports in a power outage process. 7 is a flowchart showing the control details of the startup process of the first embodiment performed by the main control unit 41. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the control details of the startup process of the second embodiment performed by the main control unit 41. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the control details of the startup process of the third embodiment performed by the main control unit 41. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the control details of the startup process of the fourth embodiment performed by the main control unit 41. FIG.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

[Form 1]
The slot machine of form 1-1 is
Equipped with a plurality of variable display parts (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variably display multiple types of identification information (symbols) that can each be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display on the variable display section, and a win can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of display results of a plurality of variable display sections,
a predetermining means (internal lottery) for determining display result combinations that are allowed to be derived before the display results are derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive display results;
a derivation control means (reel stop processing) that performs control to derive the display result;
When the determination result of the advance determination means is one of a plurality of types of specific results (navigation target combinations), an advantageous operation mode corresponding to the type of the specific result is notified. An operation mode notification means (navigation notification) that allows
When the determination result of the advance determination means becomes any type of specific result (navigation target combination) and the operation mode is notified by the operation mode notification means (in the case where navigation notification is performed), the operation mode is specific area setting means for setting a corresponding numerical value (navigation number) in a specific area (navigation number setting area);
A derivation order (stop order of each reel) that is the order in which display results are derived on the plurality of variable display sections using the numerical value (navigation number) set in the specific area (navigation number setting area); An external device transmits an operation mode signal (operation signal) that can specify the operation execution position (stop execution position of the first stop reel to the third stop reel), which is the position at which the derivation operation means of each of the variable display parts is operated. an external output processing means (operation signal setting processing) that performs processing for outputting to the test equipment;
Equipped with
The external output processing means (operation signal setting processing) specifies the derivation order (stop order of each reel) using the numerical value (navigation number) set in the specific area (navigation number setting area). processing (processing to specify stop order data) and the operation execution position (first stop reel) of each of the plurality of variable display sections using the numerical value (navigation number) set in the specific area (navigation number setting area). - the operation execution position specifying process (processing to specify the stop execution symbol number data) for specifying the stop execution position of the third stop reel), and the derivation order (the stop order of each reel) and the plurality of The present invention is characterized in that the operation mode signal (operation signal) that can specify the operation execution position (stop execution position of the first to third stop reels) of each variable display section is created.
According to this feature, the derivation order specifying process specifies the derivation order using a numerical value set in a specific area, and the operation execution position of each of the plurality of variable display parts is specified using the numerical value set in the specific area. In order to create an operation mode signal that can perform the operation execution position specifying process separately and specify the derivation order and the operation execution position of each of the plurality of variable display parts, the numerical value set in the specific area is used. Compared to a method that specifies both the derivation order and the operation execution position of each of a plurality of variable display parts in a single process, it is possible to specify the derivation order and the operation execution position of each of a plurality of variable display parts corresponding to the numerical value set in a specific area. Management is facilitated, and an operation mode signal is created regardless of the configuration in which only the derivation order is reported, the configuration in which only the operation execution position is reported, or the configuration in which both the derivation order and the operation execution position are reported. The program becomes easier to use.

The slot machine of form 1-2 is
Equipped with a plurality of variable display parts (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variably display multiple types of identification information (symbols) that can each be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display on the variable display section, and a win can be generated according to a display result combination that is a combination of display results of a plurality of variable display sections,
a predetermining means (internal lottery) for determining display result combinations that are allowed to be derived before the display results are derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive display results;
a derivation control means (reel stop processing) that performs control to derive the display result;
When the determination result of the advance determination means is one of a plurality of types of specific results (navigation target combinations), an advantageous operation mode corresponding to the type of the specific result is notified. An operation mode notification means (navigation notification) that allows
When the determination result of the advance determination means becomes any type of specific result (navigation target combination) and the operation mode is notified by the operation mode notification means (in the case where navigation notification is performed), the operation mode is specific area setting means for setting a corresponding numerical value (navigation number) in a specific area (navigation number setting area);
A derivation order (stop order of each reel) that is the order in which display results are derived on the plurality of variable display sections using the numerical value (navigation number) set in the specific area (navigation number setting area); An external device transmits an operation mode signal (operation signal) that can specify the operation execution position (stop execution position of the first stop reel to the third stop reel), which is the position at which the derivation operation means of each of the variable display parts is operated. an external output processing means (operation signal setting processing) that performs processing for outputting to the test equipment;
Equipped with
The plurality of variable display sections (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) can be variably displayed by rotating a display band (reel) on which identification information (symbols) are arranged by driving a stepping motor, and each of the identification information (symbols) can be displayed in a variable manner. The operation execution position (first stop reel ~ It is possible to specify the stop execution position of the third stop reel,
The external output processing means (operation signal setting processing) identifies each of the plurality of variable display sections corresponding to the operation execution position using the numerical value (navigation number) set in the specific area (navigation number setting area). An operation execution position specifying process (a process for specifying the stop execution symbol number data) that specifies the information number (stop execution symbol number of the first stop reel to the third stop reel), and an identification specified by the operation execution position specifying process. Convert the information number (stop execution symbol number of the 1st stop reel to 3rd stop reel) to the number of steps (stop execution position data of the 1st stop reel to 3rd stop reel) from the initial position (reel reference position) An operation execution position conversion process (a process of converting a stop execution symbol number into stop execution position data) The present invention is characterized in that the operation mode signal (operation signal) that can specify the number of steps (stop execution position data) from the initial position (reel reference position) as the stop execution position) is created.
According to this feature, since an operation mode signal that can specify the number of steps from the initial position as the operation execution position of each of the multiple variable display sections is output, the number of disposed identification information differs on the external device side. Even when specifying the operation execution position of a model, it is possible to specify the operation execution position using a common program. Also, when specifying the operation execution position using the numerical value set in the specific area, instead of directly specifying the number of steps from the initial position as the operation execution position, first use the numerical value set in the specific area. By specifying the identification information number corresponding to the operation execution position of each of the plurality of variable display sections and converting the specified identification information number into the number of steps from the initial position, the number of steps from the initial position is determined as the operation execution position. This makes it easier to manage the operation execution position at the program creation stage.

The slot machine of form 1-3 is the slot machine described in form 1-1 or 1-2,
In the specific area (navigation number setting area), if the determination result of the advance determination means is any type of specific result (navigation target hand) and the operation mode is notified by the operation mode notification means (navigation number setting area), When notification is performed), one of the consecutive numerical values from 1 to n (n≧2) (1 to 13) is set depending on the operation mode.
According to this feature, since the numerical value corresponding to the operating mode is a continuous numerical value from 1 to n, the processing when specifying the operating mode using the numerical value set in the specific area becomes easy.

The slot machine of form 1-4 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
In the specific area (navigation number setting area), if the decision result of the advance determination means is a decision result other than the specific result (if neither the general role nor the special role has been won, or any role other than the navigation target role) (if the general winning combination is won), the determination result of the advance determination means becomes any type of specific result (navigation target winning combination), and the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means (navigation notification is not carried out). ) is set to 0,
The external output processing means (operation signal setting processing) performs the operation according to the determination result (internal lottery result) of the advance determination means when 0 is set in the specific area (navigation number setting area). The feature is that a mode signal (operation signal) is created.
According to this feature, when the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means, it is possible to create an operation mode signal that can specify the operation mode according to the determination result of the advance determination means.

The slot machine of form 1-5 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-4,
A derivation order table (stop order data table) in which the derivation order (stop order of each reel (stop order data)) corresponding to the numerical value (navigation number (symbol stop pattern number)) corresponding to the operation mode is stored. ,
In the derivation order table (stop order data table), even if the derivation order (stop order data) corresponding to multiple types of numerical values (navigation number (symbol stop pattern number)) corresponding to the operation mode is common. , the derivation order (stop order data) corresponding to the numerical value (navigation number (symbol stop pattern number)) according to the operation mode is stored.
According to this feature, even if a derivation order corresponding to multiple types of numerical values depending on the operation mode is common, the derivation order table stores each derivation order corresponding to the numerical value according to the operation mode. , the program for specifying the derivation order using the numerical value set in the specific area does not become complicated.

The slot machine of form 1-6 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-5,
The operation execution position of each of the plurality of variable display units (stop execution position (stop execution symbol) of the first to third stop reels Equipped with an operation execution position table (stop execution pattern number table) in which number data)) are stored,
The operation execution position table (stop execution pattern number table) includes the operation execution positions of each of the plurality of variable display sections corresponding to a plurality of types of numerical values (navigation numbers (symbol stop pattern numbers)) according to the operation mode. Even if the (stop execution symbol number data) is common, the operation execution position (stop execution symbol It is characterized by the fact that each number (number data) is memorized.
According to this feature, even if the operation execution position of each of the multiple variable display parts is common, the operation execution position table corresponds to multiple types of numerical values depending on the operation mode. Since the operation execution positions of each of the plurality of variable display sections are stored, the program for specifying the operation execution position of each of the plurality of variable display sections using the numerical value set in the specific area does not become complicated.

The slot machine of form 1-7 is the slot machine described in form 1-6,
The operation execution position table (stop execution symbol number table) includes a plurality of types of numerical values (for example, navigation It is characterized in that the operation execution positions (stop execution symbol number data) of each of the plurality of variable display sections corresponding to the numbers (symbol stop pattern numbers) 1 to 6) are stored in consecutive areas.
According to this feature, in the operation execution position table, the operation execution positions of a plurality of common variable display parts are stored in consecutive areas, so that at the program creation stage, multiple It becomes easy to manage the operation execution position of each variable display section.

The slot machine of form 1-8 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-7,
The external output processing means (operation signal setting processing)
When the determination result of the advance determination means is one type of identification result (red middle bell A, red middle bell B), and the operation mode is notified by the operation mode notification means (when navigation notification is performed) ), when the deriving operation means is operated at the operation execution position within the specific range (stop execution position in red 7 area), the operation execution position outside the specific range (stop execution position outside red 7 area) The operation execution position (stop execution position included in the red 7 area) within the specific range can be specified for a specific variable display section (left reel) that is more advantageous than when the derivation operation means is operated in Create an operation mode signal (operation signal),
If the determination result of the advance determination means is any type of specific result (navigation target role) and the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means (navigation notification is not performed), the specific variable The present invention is characterized in that the operation mode signal (operation signal) that can specify the operation execution position (stop execution position included in the red 7 area) within the specific range on the display section (left reel) is created.
According to this feature, even if the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means, if the determination result of the advance determination means is one type of identification result, the operation mode signal is sent to the external device side. It becomes possible to specify an advantageous operation mode.

The slot machine of form 1-9 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-8,
The external output processing means (operation signal setting processing) is configured to perform an operation signal setting process when the determination result of the advance determination means becomes any type of specific result (navigation target hand) and the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means (navigation target combination). when the notification is not performed), the operation mode signal (operation signal) is created that can specify the same operation execution position (same stop execution position) for all of the plurality of variable display parts. There is.
According to this feature, when the determination result of the advance determination means is one of the types of identification results and the operation manner is not notified by the operation manner notification means, the operation execution position specified from the operation manner signal is displayed in any variable display. Since the parts are also the same, it becomes easy to manage the operation execution position when the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means at the program creation stage.

The slot machine of form 1-10 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-9,
The external output processing means (operation signal setting processing) is configured to detect the operation outside the predetermined range when the deriving operation means is operated at the operation execution position (stop execution position of symbol numbers 5 to 17) within a predetermined range. Regarding the variable display section (left reel), which is more advantageous than when the derivation operation means is operated at the execution position (stop execution position other than symbol numbers 5 to 17), the operation execution position (symbol number 5 to 17), the operation execution position is separated by one or more identification information from the boundary with the outside of the predetermined range (symbol number one or more symbols away from the boundary with the range other than pattern numbers 5 to 17) 12) The operation mode signal (operation signal) that can specify the operation mode signal is created.
According to this feature, an operation mode signal is output that can specify an operation execution position within a predetermined range that is separated by one or more identification information from the boundary with the outside of the predetermined range. Even if the detection of the operation mode signal or the output of the operation signal due to the detection of the operation mode signal is delayed, the operation signal can be output at a timing within a predetermined range.

The slot machine of form 1-11 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-10,
The decision result of the advance determination means is a special result (BB1, BB2) that allows the derivation of a special display result combination (special combination) that involves a transition of the gaming state, and the special display result combination (special combination) is not derived. A carryover means is provided to carry over the special results (BB1, BB2) to the next game or later when
The external output processing means (operation signal setting processing) is not allowed to derive the special display result combination (special combination), and when the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means (navigation notification is not performed). ), derivation of the special display result combination (special combination) is allowed, and even if the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means (navigation notification is not performed), the same operation The present invention is characterized in that the operation mode signal (operation signal) that can specify the execution position (same stop execution position) is created.
According to this feature, even if the derivation of a special display result combination is not allowed and the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means, the derivation of the special display result combination is allowed, and the operation mode notification means Even when the operation mode is not reported, an operation mode signal that can specify the same operation execution position is created, so that the operation execution position can be easily managed at the program creation stage.

The slot machine of Embodiment 1-12 is the slot machine described in Embodiment 1-11,
An operation execution position table (stop execution symbol number table) in which the operation execution positions (stop execution positions of the first to third stop reels (stop execution symbol number data)) of each of the plurality of variable display sections is stored. Prepare,
In the operation execution position table (stop execution symbol number table), derivation of the special display result combination (special combination) is not permitted, and if the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means (navigation notification is not performed). derivation of the operation execution position (stop execution symbol number data corresponding to symbol stop pattern number: 0) of each of the plurality of variable display parts corresponding to (if not executed) and the special display result combination (special combination) is permitted. and when the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means (navigation notification is not performed), the operation execution position (symbol stop pattern number: 14, 15) of each of the plurality of variable display sections is set. The corresponding stop execution symbol number data) are stored separately.
According to this feature, the operation execution position table does not allow the derivation of a special display result combination, and the operation execution position of each of the plurality of variable display parts corresponds to the case where the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means. and the operation execution position of each of the plurality of variable display parts corresponding to the case where the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means are allowed to derive the special display result combination, and the special display result combination is stored separately. There are two cases: a case where the derivation of a result combination is not allowed and the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means, and a case where the derivation of a special display result combination is allowed and the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means. The program can be shared with models that output operation mode signals that can identify different operation execution positions.

The slot machine of form 1-13 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-11 to 1-12,
The special display result combination (special combination) includes multiple types of special display result combinations (BB1, BB2) with different combinations,
The operation execution position (stop execution position) includes a specific operation execution position from which any type of the special display result combination is derived (a stop execution position where both BB1 and BB2 are outside the pull-in range),
The external output processing means (operation signal setting processing) is allowed to derive any type of special display result combination (BB1, BB2), and when the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means (navigation notification is not performed), the specific operation execution position (the stop execution position where both BB1 and BB2 are outside the pull-in range) can be specified, regardless of the type of allowed special display result combination (BB1, BB2). The present invention is characterized in that the operation mode signal (operation signal) is created.
According to this feature, the derivation of any type of special display result combination is allowed, and if the operation mode is not notified by the operation mode notification means, which type of special display result combination is allowed? However, since an operation mode signal that can identify a common specific operation execution position is created, it is easy to manage operation execution positions for creating operation mode signals even if multiple types of special display result combinations are provided. Become.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) for playing games,
Equipped with a microcomputer (main control unit 41) capable of executing user programs,
The microcomputer (main control unit 41) includes output ports (output ports 0 to 7) that can output data,
The instructions executable by the user program include a specific output instruction (1 byte OUT instruction) that causes data stored in a specific register (A register) to be output from the output port (output ports 0 to 7);
0 (00(H)) is stored in the specific register (A register) before the microcomputer (main control unit 41) is activated and the user program is started;
After starting the user program, when initializing the output ports (output ports 0 to 7) at a predetermined trigger (main processing, power-off processing) after game control starts, the specific register (A register) ) to set the data stored in 0 (00 (H)) to 0 (00 (H)) (XOR command to set the A register to 00 (H)), and then execute the specific output command (1 byte OUT command). Let the data output from the output ports (output ports 0 to 7) be 0,
When the output ports (output ports 0 to 7) are initialized at a specific trigger (startup process of the second embodiment) accompanying the start of the user program, the specific register (A register) is set after the user program starts. Before executing an instruction that changes stored data, an instruction to set the data stored in the specific register (A register) to 0 (00 (H)) (XOR to set the A register to 00 (H)) The data output from the output ports (output ports 0 to 7) is set to 0 (00(H)) by executing the specific output command (1-byte OUT command) without executing the command). It is said that
According to this feature, when initializing the output port at a predetermined timing after the start of the user program and the start of game control, after the instruction to set the data stored in the specific register to 0, It is necessary to execute a specific output instruction, but if you want to initialize the output port at a specific timing when the user program starts, set the specific register to 0 before the microcomputer starts up and the user program starts. Therefore, after the user program starts and before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in a specific register, a specific output can be generated without executing an instruction to set the data stored in a specific register to 0. By executing the instructions, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions required when initializing the output ports upon starting the user program.

The gaming machine of Form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 2-1,
The microcomputer (main control unit 41) includes a plurality of the output ports (output ports 0 to 7),
When initializing a plurality of the output ports (output ports 0 to 7) at the specific trigger (startup process of the second embodiment), the specific output command (1 After executing a byte OUT instruction) and before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in the specific register (A register), change the data stored in the specific register (A register) to 0 (00( Execute the specific output instruction (1-byte OUT instruction) targeting the other output port (output port 7) without executing the instruction (XOR instruction that sets the A register to 00 (H)). It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions when initializing a plurality of output ports upon starting a user program.

The gaming machine of form 2-3 is the gaming machine described in form 2-1 or 2-2,
The microcomputer (main control unit 41) includes a plurality of the output ports (output ports 0 to 7),
When initializing a plurality of the output ports (output ports 0 to 7) at the predetermined trigger (main processing/power-off processing), specifying one of the output ports (output port 5/output port 3) as a target. After executing an output instruction (1-byte OUT instruction), before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in the specific register (A register), change the data stored in the specific register (A register). 0 (00(H)) (XOR instruction to set the A register to 00(H)), target the other output ports (output port 4/output ports 2, 4, 7). It is characterized by executing a specific output command (1-byte OUT command).
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions when initializing a plurality of output ports after starting a user program and starting control of a game.

Type 2-4 gaming machines are
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) for playing games,
Equipped with a microcomputer (main control unit 41) capable of executing user programs,
The microcomputer (main control unit 41) includes output ports (output ports 0 to 7) that can output data,
The instructions that can be executed by the user program output 2-byte data stored in a 2-byte register (HL register) that can store 2-byte data to the first output port (output ports 0 to 7). Contains a 2-byte output command (2-byte OUT command) to output from the port and the second output port (output ports 1 and 2/output ports 3 and 4/output ports 5 and 6),
0 (0000 (H)) is stored in the 2-byte register (HL register) before the microcomputer (main control unit 41) is activated and the user program is started;
The first output port and the second output port (output ports 1 and 2/output ports 3 and 4/output ports 5 and 6) are initialized at a specific trigger (startup process in the second embodiment) accompanying the start of the user program. , the value stored in the 2-byte register (HL register) after the start of the user program and before executing an instruction to change the data stored in the 2-byte register (HL register). The first output port is The data output from the second output ports (output ports 1 and 2/output ports 3 and 4/output ports 5 and 6) is set to 0 (0000 (H)).
According to this feature, when initializing the first output port and the second output port at a specific timing associated with the start of the user program, the 2-byte register is Since 0 is stored in the 2-byte register, after the user program starts, before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in the 2-byte register, execute an instruction to set the value stored in the 2-byte register to 0. By executing the 2-byte LD instruction without having to do this, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions required to initialize the first output port and the second output port upon starting the user program.

The gaming machine of form 2-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-4,
It is characterized in that signals for driving electrical components (displays, LEDs, solenoids, motors, etc.) are output from the output ports (output ports 0 to 7).
According to this feature, the output port is initialized when the microcomputer is started, thereby preventing electrical components from being driven in an unstable situation at the time of startup.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) for playing games,
Equipped with a microcomputer (main control unit 41) capable of executing user programs,
The instructions that can be executed by the user program are a first transfer instruction (first LD instruction) that transfers arbitrary data (n) to a specified storage area, and a first transfer instruction (first LD instruction) that transfers arbitrary data (n) to a specified storage area. a second transfer instruction (second LD instruction) for transferring data,
The second transfer instruction (second LD instruction) has a smaller program capacity than the first transfer instruction (first LD instruction),
0 (00(H)) is stored in the specific register (A register) before the microcomputer (main control unit 41) is activated and the user program is started;
When the specific storage area (output port 8 register, I register) is initialized at a specific trigger (startup process of the fourth embodiment) accompanying the start of the user program, the specific register (A register) is initialized after the user program starts. ), before executing an instruction to change the data stored in the specific register (A register), execute an instruction to set the data stored in the specific register (A register) to 0 (00 (H)) (set 00 (H) to the A register). By specifying the specific storage area (output port 8 register, I register) and executing the second transfer instruction (second LD instruction) without executing the specific storage area (output port 8 register, I register), 8 register, I register) is set to 0 (00 (H)).
According to this feature, when a specific storage area is initialized at a specific timing associated with the start of a user program, instead of using the first transfer command to transfer arbitrary data to the specified storage area, Since the second transfer instruction for transferring data stored in the register is used, the storage capacity of the program can be reduced. In addition, since 0 is stored in a specific register before the microcomputer starts up and the user program starts, it is also necessary to avoid executing an instruction that changes data stored in a specific register after the user program starts. By specifying a specific storage area and executing a second transfer instruction without executing an instruction to set the data stored in a specific register to 0, the specific storage area can be initialized at the start of the user program. It is possible to reduce the number of instructions when doing so.

The gaming machine of Form 3-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1,
The specific storage area (I register) is characterized in that it is initialized and set to 0 (00(H)) only at the specific trigger (startup process of the fourth embodiment).
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably perform the process of setting a specific storage area to 0, which is performed only when a user program is started.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 3-3 is the gaming machine according to Embodiment 3-1 or 3-2,
When a special register (I register) is initialized as the specific storage area at the specific trigger (startup process of the fourth embodiment), data stored in the specific register (A register) after the start of the user program Before executing the instruction to change the specified register (A register), the special The data stored in the special register (I register) is set to 0 (00 (H)) by specifying a register (I register) and executing the second transfer instruction (second LD instruction). It is said that
According to this feature, when a special register is initialized at a specific timing associated with the start of a user program, the second transfer instruction is used, so the storage capacity of the program can be reduced. By specifying a special register and executing the second transfer instruction without executing an instruction to set the data stored in a specific register to 0 before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in the , the number of instructions required to initialize special registers at the start of a user program can be reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-4 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-3,
The special register (I register) is characterized in that 0 (00(H)) is stored in the special register (I register) before the microcomputer (main control unit 41) is activated and the user program is started.
According to this feature, 0 is stored in the special register before the microcomputer starts up and the user program starts, but the special register is also initialized at a specific occasion when the user program starts. Since 0 is stored, it is possible to ensure that 0 is stored in the special register.

The gaming machine of Form 3-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-1 to 3-4,
The microcomputer (main control unit 41) includes output ports (output ports 0 to 7) that can output data,
The instructions executable by the user program include a specific output instruction (1 byte OUT instruction) that causes data stored in a specific register (A register) to be output from the output port (output ports 0 to 7);
When the output ports (output ports 0 to 7) are initialized at the specific trigger (a modification of the startup process of the fourth embodiment), the information stored in the specific register (A register) after the user program starts is Before executing an instruction to change the data stored in the specified register, execute an instruction to set the data stored in the specific register (A register) to 0 (00 (H)) (XOR instruction to set the A register to 00 (H)). By executing the specific output command (1 byte OUT command) without executing it, the data output from the output port (output ports 0 to 7) is set to 0,
The specific register is inserted between execution of the specific output instruction (1-byte OUT instruction) and execution of the second input instruction (second LD instruction) that specifies the specific storage area (output port 8 register, I register). It is characterized by not executing instructions that change the data stored in the (A register).
According to this feature, after the start of the user program and before executing an instruction to change the data stored in a specific register, a specific output is generated without executing an instruction to set the data stored in a specific register to 0. By executing the instructions, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions required when initializing the output ports upon starting the user program. In addition, since no instruction that changes the data stored in a specific register is executed between the execution of a specific output instruction and the execution of the second input instruction that specifies a specific storage area, the output is output when the user program starts. The number of instructions when initializing both ports and specific storage areas can be reduced.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) for playing games,
Equipped with a microcomputer (main control unit 41) capable of executing user programs,
The microcomputer (main control unit 41) includes output ports (output ports 0 to 7) that can output data,
The instructions executable by the user program include a specific output instruction (1 byte OUT instruction) that causes data stored in a specific register (A register) to be output from the output port (output ports 0 to 7);
0 (00(H)) is stored in the specific register (A register) before the microcomputer (main control unit 41) is activated and the user program is started;
After starting the user program, when initializing the output ports (output ports 0 to 7) at a predetermined trigger (main processing, power-off processing) after game control starts, the specific register (A register) ) to set the data stored in 0 (00 (H)) to 0 (00 (H)) (XOR command to set the A register to 00 (H)), and then execute the specific output command (1 byte OUT command). Let the data output from the output ports (output ports 0 to 7) be 0 (00 (H)),
When the output ports (output ports 0 to 7) are initialized at a specific trigger (startup process of the first embodiment) accompanying the start of the user program, the specific register (A register) is set after the start of the user program. After executing an instruction to set the stored data to 0 (00(H)) (XOR instruction to set the A register to 00(H)), the specific output instruction (1-byte OUT instruction) is executed. It is characterized in that the data output from the output ports (output ports 0 to 7) is 0 (00 (H)).
According to this feature, after starting the user program, when initializing the output port at a predetermined timing after the start of game control, after the instruction to set the data stored in the specific register to 0, A specific output instruction needs to be executed. On the other hand, when initializing the output port at a specific moment when the user program starts, 0 is stored in the specific register before the microcomputer starts up and the user program starts, so it would normally be , even if a specific output instruction is executed without executing an instruction that sets the data stored in a specific register to 0, the output port should be initialized, and the data stored in the specific register should be set to 0. Although it is not necessary to execute an instruction to set the data stored in a specific register to 0, even in such a case, by executing a specific output instruction after an instruction to set the data stored in a specific register to 0, you can set the data stored in a specific register to a value other than 0 due to a momentary power outage. Even if the stored data is maintained, it is possible to ensure that the output port is initialized when the user program starts.

The gaming machine of Form 4-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 4-1,
The microcomputer (main control unit 41) includes a plurality of the output ports (output ports 0 to 7),
When initializing a plurality of the output ports (output ports 0 to 7) at the specific trigger (startup process of the first embodiment), the specific output command (1 After executing a byte OUT instruction) and before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in the specific register (A register), change the data stored in the specific register (A register) to 0 (00( Execute the specific output instruction (1-byte OUT instruction) targeting the other output port (output port 7) without executing the instruction (XOR instruction that sets the A register to 00 (H)). It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions when initializing a plurality of output ports upon starting a user program.

The gaming machine of Form 4-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 4-1 or 4-2,
The microcomputer (main control unit 41) includes a plurality of the output ports (output ports 0 to 7),
When initializing a plurality of the output ports (output ports 0 to 7) at the predetermined trigger (main processing/power-off processing), specifying one of the output ports (output port 5/output port 3) as a target. After executing an output instruction (1-byte OUT instruction), before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in the specific register (A register), change the data stored in the specific register (A register). 0 (00(H)) (XOR instruction to set the A register to 00(H)), target the other output ports (output port 4/output ports 2, 4, 7). It is characterized by executing a specific output command (1-byte OUT command).
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions when initializing a plurality of output ports in connection with game control.

The gaming machine of form 4-4 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) for playing games,
Equipped with a microcomputer (main control unit 41) capable of executing user programs,
The microcomputer (main control unit 41) includes output ports (output ports 0 to 7) that can output data,
The instructions that can be executed by the user program output 2-byte data stored in a 2-byte register (HL register) that can store 2-byte data to the first output port (output ports 0 to 7). Contains a 2-byte output command (2-byte OUT command) to output from the port and the second output port (output ports 1 and 2/output ports 3 and 4/output ports 5 and 6),
0 (0000 (H)) is stored in the 2-byte register (HL register) before the microcomputer (main control unit 41) is activated and the user program is started;
The first output port and the second output port (output ports 1 and 2/output ports 3 and 4/output ports 5 and 6) are initialized at a specific trigger (startup processing in the first embodiment) accompanying the start of the user program. , an instruction to set the value stored in the 2-byte register (HL register) to 0 (0000 (H)) after the start of the user program (CLR instruction to set the HL register to 0000 (H)) After executing the 2-byte output command (2-byte OUT command), the first output port and the second output port (output port 1/2/output port 3/4/output port 5/6 ) is set to 0 (0000 (H)).
According to this feature, when initializing the first output port and the second output port at a specific timing associated with the start of the user program, the 2-byte register is Since 0 is stored at The port is supposed to be initialized, and there is no need to execute an instruction that sets the data stored in the 2-byte register to 0, but even in this case, you cannot set the value stored in the 2-byte register to 0. By executing the 2-byte LD instruction after the instruction to start the user program, even if non-zero data is stored in the 2-byte register due to a momentary power failure, etc. Accordingly, it is possible to ensure that the output port is initialized.

The gaming machine of form 4-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-4,
It is characterized in that signals for driving electrical components (displays, LEDs, solenoids, motors, etc.) are output from the output ports (output ports 0 to 7).
According to this feature, the output port is initialized when the microcomputer is started, thereby preventing electrical components from being driven in an unstable situation at the time of startup.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) for playing games,
Equipped with a microcomputer (main control unit 41) capable of executing user programs,
The instructions that can be executed by the user program are a first transfer instruction (first LD instruction) that transfers arbitrary data (n) to a specified storage area, and a first transfer instruction (first LD instruction) that transfers arbitrary data (n) to a specified storage area. a second transfer instruction (second LD instruction) for transferring data,
The second transfer instruction (second LD instruction) has a smaller program capacity than the first transfer instruction (first LD instruction),
(00(H)) is stored in the specific register (A register) before the microcomputer (main control unit 41) is activated and the user program is started;
When initializing a specific storage area (output port 8 register, I register) at a specific trigger (startup process in the third embodiment) accompanying the start of the user program, after the user program starts, the specific register (A register) is initialized. ) After executing an instruction (LD instruction that sets 00(H) to A register) to set the data stored in 0 (00 (H)) to the specified storage area (output port 8 register, I register) By specifying and executing the second transfer instruction (second LD instruction), the data stored in the specific storage area (output port 8 register, I register) is set to 0 (00 (H)). It is a feature.
According to this feature, when a specific storage area is initialized at a specific timing associated with the start of a user program, instead of using the first transfer command to transfer arbitrary data to the specified storage area, Since the second transfer instruction for transferring data stored in the register is used, the storage capacity of the program can be reduced. In addition, since 0 is stored in a specific register before the microcomputer boots up and the user program starts, normally the instruction to set the data stored in the specific register to 0 would not be executed. By specifying the specific storage area and executing the second transfer instruction, the specific storage area should be initialized, and there is no need to execute an instruction to set the data stored in the specific register to 0. Even in such a case, by specifying a specific storage area and executing a second transfer instruction after an instruction to set the data stored in a specific register to 0, data other than 0 can be saved in a specific register due to a momentary power outage, etc. Even if the stored state is maintained, it is possible to ensure that the specific storage area is initialized with the start of the user program.

The gaming machine of Form 5-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 5-1,
The specific storage area (I register) is characterized in that it is initialized and set to 0 (00(H)) only at the specific trigger (startup process of the third embodiment).
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably perform the process of setting a specific storage area to 0, which is performed only when a user program is started.

The gaming machine of Form 5-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 5-1 or 5-2,
When a special register (I register) is initialized as the specific storage area at the specific trigger (startup process of the third embodiment), data stored in the specific register (A register) after the start of the user program After executing an instruction to set 0 (00 (H)) to 0 (00 (H)) (LD instruction to set 00 (H) to A register), specify the special register (I register) and execute the second transfer instruction (second LD instruction). ), the data stored in the special register (I register) is set to 0 (00(H)).
According to this feature, when a special register is initialized at a specific timing associated with the start of a user program, the second transfer instruction is used, so the storage capacity of the program can be reduced. After executing an instruction to set the data stored in 0 to 0, by specifying a special register and executing a second transfer instruction, it is possible to prevent data other than 0 from being stored in a specific register due to a momentary power outage, etc. Even if the special register is maintained, it can be ensured that the special register is initialized when the user program starts.

The gaming machine of Form 5-4 is the gaming machine described in Form 5-3,
The special register (I register) is characterized in that 0 (00(H)) is stored in the special register (I register) before the microcomputer (main control unit 41) is activated and the user program is started.
According to this feature, 0 is stored in the special register before the microcomputer starts up and the user program starts, but the special register is also initialized at a specific occasion when the user program starts. Since 0 is stored, it is possible to ensure that 0 is stored in the special register.

The gaming machine of Form 5-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 5-1 to 5-4,
The microcomputer (main control unit 41) includes a data storage means (ROM 41b) capable of only reading data,
In the instruction to set the data stored in the specific register (A register) to 0 (00(H)) (LD instruction to set 00(H) in the A register), the data stored in the data storage means (ROM41b) is The clear data (initial value of the output port 8 register) is stored in the specific register (A register).
According to this feature, the initial value set in the specific storage area can be managed by the data in the data storage means.

The gaming machine of Form 5-6 is the gaming machine described in Form 5-5,
The specific storage area includes a first specific storage area (output port 8 register) and a second specific storage area (I register),
When initializing the first specific storage area (output port 8 register), an instruction to set the data stored in the specific register (A register) to 0 (00 (H)) (00 (H) to the A register) LD command) stores the first clear data (initial value of the output port 8 register) stored in the data storage means (ROM41b) in the specific register (A register), and stores the first clear data (initial value of the output port 8 register) in the second specific storage area. In the instruction (LD instruction that sets 00 (H) to the A register) that sets the data stored in the specific register (A register) to 0 (00 (H)) when initializing the (I register), It is characterized in that the second clear data (upper address of the interrupt vector) stored in the data storage means (ROM 41b) is stored in the specific register (A register).
According to this feature, the initial value set in the first specific storage area and the initial value set in the second specific storage area can be managed by separate data in the data storage means.

An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment is comprised of a housing 1a with an open front, and a front door 1b rotatably supported at the side end of the housing 1a. There is. Inside the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as left reel, middle reel, and right reel) are arranged with the same number of symbols of a plurality of types that can be identified from each other in a predetermined order. ) are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. In the see-through window 3, they are displayed in three levels, top, middle, and bottom, and are arranged so as to be visible from the player's side. In addition, as shown in Figure 2, each reel has multiple types of symbols that can be identified ("Red 7", "White 7", "Replay a", "Replay b", "Bell a", " "bell b", "bell c", "watermelon", "cherry", "plum") are arranged in a predetermined order.

In this embodiment, a configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, a configuration using four or more reels may also be used. . In addition, in this embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R constitute a variable display section that variably displays symbols, but the variable display section may be other than the reels, for example, a plurality of symbols may be displayed on the outer peripheral surface. A configuration may also be used in which the symbols can be displayed in a variable manner by moving the belt on which the symbols are arranged. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display section is configured by a physical reel, but the variable display section may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front of the slot machine 1 includes a medal insertion section 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as gaming value owned by the player). ), the maximum number of bets is determined within the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state (in this example, normal gaming state: 3, special gaming state (RB): 2). The MAXBET switch 6 is operated when making settings, and is operated when settling the medals stored as credits and the medals used to set the number of bets (returning the medals used to set the credits and number of bets) The payment switch 10 to be operated, the start switch 7 to be operated when starting the game, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R to be operated to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively, can be operated by the player. Each is provided.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the front of the slot machine 1, there is a credit display 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, and a credit display 11 that displays the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of winnings and the details when an error occurs. A gaming auxiliary display 12 that displays error codes and navigation numbers corresponding to the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, a 1BET LED 14 that lights up to notify that the number of bets is set to 1, and a 1BET LED 14 that indicates that the number of bets is set to 2. 2BETLED 15 lights up to indicate that the number of bets has been set to 3; 3BETLED 16 lights up to indicate that the number of bets has been set to 3; and Start Valid indicates by lighting that the game start operation by operating the start switch 7 is valid. A gaming display section 13 is provided with an LED 18, a section display LED 19 that indicates by lighting that the gaming section is controlled to be an advantageous section, and a replay LED 20 that indicates by lighting that a replay game is in progress. There is.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) that lights up to notify that the operation to set the number of bets by operating the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside 8R, there are left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see Figure 3), respectively, which illuminate to indicate that the operation to stop the reels by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid. It is provided.

Furthermore, a liquid crystal display 51 capable of displaying an image is provided on the front of the slot machine 1. The liquid crystal display 51 has a liquid crystal panel that is transparent when no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and is located on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R of the front door 1b. The display area is arranged so that the display area is located at The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back side of the liquid crystal display 51 are visible from the player side through the transparent area corresponding to the transparent window 3 in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 and through the transparent window 3.

Inside the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, there is a reset switch 23 that detects a reset operation for canceling an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by operating a predetermined key. A set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time, a door open detection switch 25 that detects the open state of the front door 1b, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal input section 4 into the inside of the slot machine 1. A flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the hopper tank side or the medal payout port 9 side, which will be described later, is provided to detect medals that have been input from the medal input section 4 and flowed down to the hopper tank side. A medal selector 29 having input medal sensors 31a to 31c is provided.

Also, inside the slot machine 1, a reel unit 34 for rotating and stopping the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R described above according to control signals from the main control section 41, A hopper unit 35 is provided for dispensing medals from the medal dispensing port 9 in response to a signal.

Also, inside the slot machine 1, there is a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which normally functions as a reset switch to cancel an error state, and in a setting change state, as described below. A reset/setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (ball output rate) of the internal lottery, and a power switch 39 that is operated when turning the power on/off are provided.

Inside the slot machine 1, with the game control board 40 installed at a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a 4-digit 7-segment display is displayed at the bottom of the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. A gaming machine information display 50 consisting of a gaming machine is arranged (not shown). The gaming machine information display device 50 is configured such that when the gaming control board 40 is enclosed in a board case, the display contents can be viewed from outside the board case, and the gaming machine information is aggregated by the main control unit 41. The game machine information displayed on the display 50 based on the gaming history of the slot machine 1 can be recognized by a store clerk or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and a performance control board 90. The game control board 40 controls the game, and the performance control board 90 controls the game state. The performance is controlled according to the

The game control board 40 includes the aforementioned MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and a reel sensor of the reel unit 34 (not shown). , a payout sensor and a full tank sensor (not shown) of the hopper unit 35, a setting key switch 37, and a reset/setting switch 38 are connected, and detection signals from these connected switches, etc. are input. .

In addition, the game control board 40 includes the aforementioned credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, start valid LED 18, section display LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch valid LED 21, left, middle, right. Stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel unit 34, and hopper unit 35 are connected, and these electrical components and gaming machine information display mounted on gaming control board 40 The device 50 is driven under the control of a main control section 41, which will be described later, mounted on the game control board 40.

Furthermore, the game control board 40 is equipped with a main control section 41 that controls the game. The main control unit 41 includes a CPU 41a for performing calculations, a ROM 41b in which programs and the like are stored, and a RAM 41c in which work data is temporarily stored, and performs various controls according to the programs stored in the ROM 41b.

The main control unit 41 includes a plurality of registers used by the CPU 41a to perform calculations. The multiple registers include an accumulator register (A register), a flag register (F register), general-purpose registers (BC register, DE register, HL register), index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, and transmit register. Contains registers. Furthermore, among these registers, the accumulator register, flag register, and general-purpose register each include a front register and a back register configured in pairs (hereinafter, the front register and back register may be simply referred to as registers). be). By executing various instructions such as arithmetic instructions and read instructions included in the program, the CPU 41a updates the value of a predetermined register, and updates the storage area of the RAM 41c specified by the value (address) of a predetermined register. It is possible to update the values (data) stored in the .

Further, among the registers included in the main control unit 41, the flag register is configured so that its state changes to indicate the result of an operation by an instruction executed by the CPU 41a, and the change in the state of the flag register is used to change the state of the flag register. In this way, the CPU 41a can be caused to perform processing according to the calculation result of the previous instruction.

In addition, the flag register is composed of a plurality of bits (8 bits in this embodiment), and the plurality of bits contain information about the result of the arithmetic operation executed by the CPU 41a in order to reduce the processing load on the CPU 41a. This includes a first bit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a zero flag) and a second bit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a carry flag) whose state can be changed according to the flag.

The main control unit 41 also includes a serial communication circuit 41d that can perform serial communication with an externally provided test device.

The main control unit 41 also sends various commands to the sub control unit 91. Commands sent from the main control section 41 to the sub control section 91 are sent in only one direction, and no commands are sent from the sub control section 91 to the main control section 41.

The performance control board 90 is connected to performance devices such as the liquid crystal display 51 described above, a speaker capable of outputting audio, and a performance LED 57 that is used for performance and is visible from the player side, and outputs of these performance devices are connected to the performance control board 90. The state can be controlled by a sub-control unit 91 mounted on the production control board 90. The sub-control unit 91 receives commands sent from the main control unit 41 and performs various controls for performing effects.

The main control unit 41 executes basic processing (main processing) that performs processing in stages according to the control state, and also interrupts the basic processing at fixed time intervals (approximately 0.56 ms in this embodiment) and starts a timer. Execute interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt processing, the detection status of various switches and sensors and the elapsed time are updated, and in the basic processing, the processing according to the current control state is repeatedly looped until the conditions according to the control state are satisfied. The control state is shifted to the next control state by satisfying the conditions corresponding to the control state based on the detection states of various switches and sensors updated in the timer interrupt process and the passage of time.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the payout rate of medals changes depending on a set value. Specifically, the payout rate of medals is changed by using a winning probability according to a set value in a lottery that affects the advantage to the player, such as an internal lottery or an AT lottery. The set value is comprised of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and decreasing values in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

In order to change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the setting key switch 37 and then turn on the power switch 39 of the slot machine 1. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset/setting switch 38. Move to setting change state. When the reset/setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the displayed value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by 1 (if the setting value is further operated from setting value 6, it is updated to setting value 1). return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the displayed value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control section 41, and the game transitions to a state where the game can proceed.

The setting key switch 37 and the reset/setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened. Of the clerks at the game parlor where the system is installed, only those who possess a predetermined key can operate the system. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires an additional key operation, it can only be operated by an employee of the game parlor who has a key for operating the setting key switch 37. Further, although the reset switch 23 does not require opening the front door 1b, it requires key operation using a predetermined key, and therefore can only be operated by a store clerk who possesses the predetermined key. Further, the reset/setting switch 38 also functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state in normal times.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs a power outage determination process that periodically determines whether a voltage drop is detected in the timer interrupt process, and a voltage drop is detected in the power outage determination process. If it is determined that the data is normal or not, a power-off process (main) is executed to set data for determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal or not at the next recovery.

Then, the main control unit 41 returns the processing state of the main control unit 41 to the state before the power cut based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, on the condition that the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of startup. It is considered possible. On the other hand, if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at startup, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, an error flag indicating the RAM abnormality is set in the RAM 41c, and the RAM is controlled to an abnormal error state, making it impossible to proceed with the game. It has become. The RAM abnormality error state is canceled by moving to a setting change state and setting a new setting value, and the game can proceed.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when an abnormality is detected in accordance with the progress of the game, the main control unit 41 sets an error flag indicating the type of detected abnormality in the RAM 41c, and controls the state to a general error state. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. The general error state is canceled by a reset operation using the reset switch 23 or the reset/setting switch 38, and the game can proceed. Note that hereinafter, when there is no need to distinguish between a RAM abnormal error state and a general error state, they will simply be referred to as error states.

When playing a game in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, the player inserts medals from the medal inserter 4 or operates the MAXBET switch 6 to set the number of bets using credits. When a predetermined number of bets is set according to the gaming state, a predetermined winning line LN (see FIG. ) is enabled, and the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled, that is, the game can be started. It should be noted that if more medals are inserted than the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount will be added to the credits. Further, in this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, invalid lines LM1 to LM6 are set apart from the winning line LN in order to make it easier to recognize that the combination of symbols constituting a winning is completed on the winning line LN. Winning is not determined by the combination of symbols aligned on invalid lines LM1-LM6, but when the combination of symbols forming a winning line is aligned on winning line LN, invalid lines LM1-LM6 are By arranging a combination of symbols suggesting a winning in any of 6 (for example, Bell A-Bell A-Bell A), it is recognized that the combination of symbols constituting a winning is completed on the winning line LN. It makes it easier. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the invalid line LM1 is set across the upper row of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, that is, the symbols arranged horizontally on the upper row, and the lower row of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. , that is, the invalid line LM2 is set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower row, the upper row of reel 2L, the middle row of reel 2C, the lower row of reel 2R, that is, the invalid line is set astride the symbols arranged in a downward-to-right direction. LM3, the lower row of reel 2L, the middle row of reel 2C, the upper row of reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM4 set across the symbols arranged upward to the right, the upper row of reel 2L, the middle row of reel 2C, the upper row of reel 2R, i.e. The invalid line LM5 is set across the symbols arranged in a small V shape, the lower row of reel 2L, the middle row of reel 2C, the lower row of reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM6 is set astride the symbols arranged in a mound. Six types are defined as invalid lines.

When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotated, and the symbols on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously changed. When any stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is operated while the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are being rotated, stop control is performed for the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and the rotation of the relevant reel is stopped. The reels are stopped and the symbols on the reels are derived and displayed on the transparent window 3 as a display result.

In the stop control, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operation is stopped within the maximum stop delay time (in this example, 190 ms (milliseconds)) from the time when each stop switch is operated. is carried out, and until the maximum stop delay time (190 ms) has elapsed, it is possible to draw in symbols for a maximum of four frames. In other words, in stop control, one symbol is selected from among the symbols displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols up to 4 frames ahead, for a total of 5 frames (pull-in range). It is possible to select and derive the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As a result, in the stop control, when the rotation is stopped by operating the corresponding stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the winning combination won in the internal lottery to be described later is displayed. If the constituent symbols are within the pull-in range of 4 frames ahead from the symbol when the stop switch was operated, the symbol is pulled onto the winning line LN and the rotation of the reel when the stop switch was operated is stopped. On the other hand, if the symbols constituting the winning combinations that have been won in the internal lottery are not within the drawing range, the symbols constituting the winning combinations that have not been won in the internal lottery will be moved to the winning line LN. In order to prevent the reel from stopping above, it is possible to draw symbols that do not constitute any winning combination onto the winning line LN and control the rotation of the reel on which the stop switch is operated to stop.

In addition, in the stop control, when the winning of a special prize (BB1, BB2 in this example) that involves a transition of the gaming state is carried over, a minor prize that involves the award of medals is won in the internal lottery, When a special prize and a small prize are won at the same time, the symbols constituting the winning minor prize are controlled to be drawn into the winning line LN with priority within the above-mentioned pull-in range, and the winning small prize is When the constituent symbols of a winning combination cannot be drawn into the winning line LN, the constituent symbols of a winning special winning combination are controlled to be drawn into the winning line LN. For this reason, in a game where a special prize and a minor prize are won at the same time, it is difficult to win the winning special prize.

In addition, in the stop control, if the winning of the special winning combination (in this example, BB1, BB2) is carried over, a regaming winning combination with a replay award is won in the internal lottery, and the winning of the special winning combination is carried over. When the game winning combinations are won at the same time, the constituent symbols of the winning replaying combination are given priority and drawn into the winning line LN. The symbols that make up the replay combination on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged within a predetermined pull-in range, and when a replay combination is won, the symbols that make up the replay combination are always drawn into the winning line LN. Become. For this reason, in a game where a special winning combination and a replay winning combination are won at the same time, the winning special winning combination cannot be won.

Then, one game ends when all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and a predetermined combination of winning symbols is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R, and stops on the winning line LN. When a winning occurs, control is performed according to the winning. When a small winning combination is won, a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player according to the type of winning, and are added to the credits. Further, when the number of credits reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are directly paid out from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, if a re-game winning combination is won, a re-game is awarded that allows the player to play the game without inserting medals. Furthermore, when a special combination is won, the gaming state is shifted to a special gaming state.

In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a valid state, and ends when all the reels have stopped. In addition, one unit of control (game control) for executing a game starts when all controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all controls associated with the end of the current game are completed. finish.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the types of winning combinations (hereinafter referred to as winning combinations) are determined according to the gaming state, and include small winning combinations that involve the payout of medals, and small winning combinations that do not require setting the number of bets. There are two types of combinations: a replay combination that grants a replay that allows the next game to be started, and a special combination that accompanies a transition to a special gaming state. Hereinafter, the small role and the replayed role will be collectively referred to as the general role. In order to win a prize for each role determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag for that role. In the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to allow winnings for each of the above-mentioned winning combinations before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, after a specified number of This is determined using random numbers when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the number of bets set.

Of the winning flags for each role, the winning flags for small roles and replayable roles are valid only in the game in which the flag was set, and will be invalid in the next game, but the winning flag for the special role is valid only in the game in which the flag was set. It is valid until the combination of combinations allowed by the flag is completed, and becomes invalid in the game where the combination of combinations allowed by the flag is completed. In other words, once a special winning flag is won, the winning flag will not be invalidated and will be carried over to the next game, even if it is not possible to match the combination of winnings allowed by the flag. It has become.

In addition, in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (for example, push order, operation timing), the small winning combination is more advantageous than when the stop operation is performed in other operation modes. , a replay winning combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a navigation target winning combination) can be won. The navigation target winnings include, for example, winnings in which the stopping mode is more advantageous when the stopping operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode than the stopping mode when the stopping operation is performed in another operation mode. , including combinations in which when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation manner, the rate of stopping is higher in a more advantageous stop operation than when the stop operation is performed in another operation manner. Further, the advantageous stopping mode includes not only a stopping mode that involves the awarding of medals, but also a stopping mode that involves a transition to an advantageous gaming state, a stopping mode that avoids a transition to a disadvantageous gaming state, and the like.

The main control unit 41 executes a navigation notification that notifies the player of a navigation number that can specify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to control to an assist time (AT) state that is a possible notification period. The main control unit 41 starts controlling the AT state when the right to be controlled in the AT state is granted to the player. When the control is in the AT state, navigation notification is executed by winning the navigation target combination, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player (for example, the order in which they are pressed) is executed. , operation timing, etc.) using the game auxiliary display 12, and also transmits a command that can specify the operation mode that is advantageous to the player to the sub-control unit 91, so that the operation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. A navigation performance to be notified using a device 51 or the like is executed. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and navigation performance, it is possible to reliably win the navigation target combination won in the internal lottery.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a gaming auxiliary display 12 that can display the number of medals to be paid out, an error code, and navigation information, and uses the gaming auxiliary display 12 in controlling the navigation notification. Although the configuration is such that the navigation information is notified by using the navigation information, it is also possible to provide a dedicated display that can display only the navigation information, and use the dedicated display to notify the navigation information in controlling the navigation notification.

Further, in this embodiment, the game control board 40 can be connected to a test device via an interface board, and the main control unit 41 controls test signals generated in connection with the results of games in the slot machine 1. In addition to being output to the test device, test signals corresponding to operations by the player are input from the test device to the game control board 40, and the game control board 40 and the test device are connected. It is said that it is possible to perform simulation tests automatically. In addition, the main control unit 41 is capable of outputting an operation signal indicating a recommended operation mode to the test device as a test signal, and the test device specifies the operation mode recommended for each game, and specifies the operation mode recommended for each game. It is possible to perform a simulation test by outputting a test signal indicating the operation in the operation mode to the game control board 40.

[About gaming status]
As shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming state to either a normal gaming state or a special gaming state. The normal gaming state includes a normal gaming state (non-internal) in which neither the winnings of BB1 nor BB2 are carried over, and a normal gaming state (internal) in which the winnings of either BB1 or BB2 are carried over. include.

The normal gaming state (non-internal) is a state in which neither BB1 nor BB2 has been won in the normal gaming state. This gaming state is controlled in the factory-shipped state of the slot machine 1 or in a state in which the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is initialized by setting new setting values by shifting to the setting change state. Further, even when the special gaming state is ended, the normal gaming state (non-internal) is controlled. The normal gaming state (non-internal) continues until either BB1 or BB2 wins in the internal lottery. The game ends either by transitioning to the normal gaming state (internal) without winning a prize, or by transitioning to the special gaming state after winning BB1 or BB2 wins a prize in a game where either BB1 or BB2 wins in the internal lottery. .

The normal gaming state (internal) is a state in which either BB1 or BB2 is carried over from the normal gaming state. In this embodiment, when the special role and the minor role are won at the same time, control is performed to prioritize the minor role, and when the special role and the re-gaming role are won at the same time, the re-gaming role is controlled. By performing control to ensure that the winning combinations are aligned, the won BB1 or BB2 will not win even if a small winning combination is won in the normal gaming state (internal) or a replay winning combination. It has become. In the normal gaming state (internal medium), one of the small winning combinations or one of the replaying winnings is always won, so once the transition to the normal gaming state (internal medium), the won BB1 or BB2 will not win. After transitioning to the normal gaming state (internal), the normal gaming state (internal ) is now maintained.

The special gaming state is entered when BB1 or BB2 wins a prize in a game in which either BB1 or BB2 wins in the normal gaming state (non-internal), and during the entire period in the special gaming state, RB (normally This is a gaming state in which the winning probability of a small winning combination is higher than in the gaming state), and a predetermined termination condition is satisfied (in this example, the total number of medals paid out in the special gaming state exceeds 50). ), and ends when a predetermined end condition is met and the game shifts to the normal gaming state (non-internal).

In this way, in this embodiment, since the control will be in the normal gaming state (internal mode) during most of the games, it is assumed that the control is in the normal gaming state (internal mode), and the setting value (in this implementation In the example, the medal payout rate is designed according to 1 to 6).

[About the roles targeted for internal lottery]
As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state (non-internal), normal replay A, normal replay B, normal replay C, weak chance replay A, weak chance replay B, strong chance replay A, Strong chance replay B, specific small role A+1 piece, specific small role B+1 piece, 1 piece, navigation small role, 3 pieces, BB1, BB2, BB1+3 piece, BB2+3 piece are subject to internal lottery. In the normal gaming state (non-internal), normal replay A, normal replay B, normal replay C, weak chance replay A, weak chance replay B, strong chance replay A, strong chance replay B, specific small role A + 1 piece, specific small The winning probabilities of winning role B+1 piece, 1 piece, Navi small role, 3 pieces, BB1, BB2, BB1+3 piece, BB2+3 piece are about 1/9.9, about 1/65, about 1/16384, about 1/137, respectively. , about 1/101, about 1/524, about 1/655, about 1/49, about 1/49, about 1/49, about 1/1.37, about 1/3449, about 1/32768, about 1 /32768, approximately 1/29, approximately 1/29, and the probability of not winning (losing) is 0.

In addition, in the normal gaming state (internal), normal replay A, normal replay B, normal replay C, weak chance replay A, weak chance replay B, strong chance replay A, strong chance replay B, specific small role A + 1 piece, Specific small winning combination B+1 piece, 1 piece, Navi small winning combination, 3 pieces are subject to internal lottery. In the normal gaming state (internal), normal replay A, normal replay B, normal replay C, weak chance replay A, weak chance replay B, strong chance replay A, strong chance replay B, specific small role A + 1 piece, specific small role The winning probabilities for B+1 piece, 1 piece, navigation small role, and 3 pieces are about 1/9.9, about 1/65, about 1/8192, about 1/137, about 1/101, about 1/524, respectively. It is set to approximately 1/655, approximately 1/49, approximately 1/49, approximately 1/49, approximately 1/1.37, approximately 1/14.5, and the probability of not winning (losing) is 0. .

In addition, in the special gaming state (RB), the composite minor winnings A and composite minor winnings B are subject to internal lottery. In the special gaming state (RB), the winning probabilities of composite minor winnings A and composite minor winnings B are set to approximately 1/33 and approximately 1/1.2, respectively, and the probability of not winning (losing) is approximately It becomes 1/7.3.

When the normal replay A wins, the normal replay A always wins regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. When the normal replay B wins, the normal replay B always wins regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. When the normal replay C wins, the normal replay C always wins regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing.

When the weak chance replay A wins, the weak chance replay A always wins regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. When the weak chance replay B wins, the weak chance replay B always wins regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. When the strong chance replay A wins, the strong chance replay A always wins regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. When the strong chance replay B wins, the strong chance replay B always wins regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing.

A re-game is awarded when a prize is won in normal replay A, normal replay B, normal replay C, weak chance replay A, weak chance replay B, strong chance replay A, and strong chance replay B.

The specific small role A+1 piece is a winning combination of the specific small role A and 1 piece, and when the specific small role A+1 piece is won, the left reel will stop at the stop operation timing that is within the drawing range of the constituent symbols of the specific small role A. When the operation is performed, regardless of the order of the stop operations, the specified minor role A with the payout of 15 medals will be won, but the left reel will be moved at the timing of the stop operation that is outside the pull-in range of the constituent symbols of the specific minor role A. When a stop operation is performed, one medal is paid out and one medal is won regardless of the order of the stop operations.

The specific small role B + 1 piece is a winning combination of the specific small role B and 1 piece, and when the specific small role B + 1 piece is won, the left reel will stop at the stop operation timing that is within the drawing range of the constituent symbols of the specific small role B. When the operation is performed, regardless of the order of the stop operations, the specified minor role B with the payout of 15 medals will be won, but the left reel will be moved at the timing of the stop operation that is outside the pull-in range of the constituent symbols of the specific minor role B. When a stop operation is performed, one medal is paid out and one medal is won regardless of the order of the stop operations.

When winning a specific small role A+1 piece or a specific small role B+1 piece, as described later, if both are operated in an operation mode in which the left reel stop operation timing is the white 7 area, a specific small role with a payout of 15 pieces. It is possible to win A or specific small role B, but if the navigation notification is not performed when specific small role A+1 piece or specific small role B+1 piece is won, specific small role A or specific small role B A lottery related to AT is held by not winning a prize, and if the navigation notification is not performed when a specific small role A+1 piece or a specific small role B+1 piece is won, the left reel stop operation timing By performing the stop operation in an operation mode in which the is the red 7 area, that is, in an operation mode in which neither the specific small role A nor the specific small role B wins, the left reel stop operation timing is in the white 7 area, that is, the specific small role. This is more advantageous for the player than when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode in which winning combination A or specific small winning combination B is won. On the other hand, if a navigation notification is performed when a specific small role A+1 piece or a specific small role B+1 piece is won, the operation mode in which the left reel stop operation timing is the white 7 area, that is, the specific small role A or the specific small role By performing the stop operation in an operation mode in which B wins, the stop operation timing on the left reel is in the red 7 area, that is, the stop operation is performed in an operation mode in which neither specific small win A nor specific small win B wins. This is more advantageous to the player than in the case of

When one medal is won, one medal is always paid out and one medal is won regardless of the stop operation order and stop operation timing. As mentioned above, if a specific minor role A+1 piece is won and the left reel is stopped at a stop operation timing that is outside the pull-in range of the constituent symbols of the specific minor role A, or if a specific minor role B+1 piece is won. , Even if the left reel is stopped at a stop operation timing that is outside the pull-in range of the constituent symbols of the specific minor winning B, one piece will win regardless of the order of the stopping operations, so the specific minor winning If one piece wins as a result of performing a stop operation on the left reel at a stop operation timing that is outside the pull-in range of the constituent symbols of A, or a stop operation timing that falls outside the pull-in range of the constituent symbols of specific small role B, It is impossible to determine whether the specific small winning combination A+1 piece, the specific small winning combination B+1 piece, or one piece is winning.

A navigation minor role is a role in which multiple minor roles (in this example, a main minor role and a sub minor role) are won, and the stop operation order corresponding to each navigation minor role and each navigation minor role is a winning role. When a stop operation is performed on the reel that stops first (first stop reel) at the stop operation timing, a main/minor combination with a payout of 15 medals is won, while a stop operation other than the corresponding stop operation order is performed. If the stop operation is performed in sequence, or if the stop operation of the first stop reel is performed at a stop operation timing other than the corresponding stop operation timing, one medal is paid out according to the stop operation timing. Either the sub-minor role wins, or neither role wins. In other words, the expected value of the number of medals awarded changes due to the difference in the stop operation order and the stop operation timing of the first stop reel, and the stop operation order and stop operation timing corresponding to the won navigation small winning combination are changed by the navigation notification. The expected value of the number of medals to be awarded changes as a result of the notification.

When three medals are won, the three medals are always won with the payout of three medals, regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing.

When BB1 is won, if the stop operation is performed on all reels at the stop operation timing that is within the drawing range of the constituent symbols of BB1 (in this example, the combination of "White 7 - Replay b - Bell b"), While BB1 wins and the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state, if a stop operation is performed on any reel at a stop operation timing that is outside the pull-in range of the constituent symbols of BB1, none of the winning combinations will win. When the game loses and the winning of BB1 is carried over to the next game, the game enters the normal gaming state (internal mode).

When winning BB2, if the stop operation is performed on all reels at the stop operation timing that is within the drawing range of the constituent symbols of BB2 (in this example, the combination of "White 7 - Plum - Replay b"), BB2 will be won. wins and the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state, but if the stop operation is performed at a stop operation timing that is outside the pull-in range of the constituent symbols of BB2 on any reel, it will be a loss that none of the winning combinations will win. As a result, the winning of BB2 is carried over to the next game, and the game shifts to the normal gaming state (internal).

In addition, the pull-in range of "White 7", which is a constituent symbol of the left reel of BB1, is the area of symbol numbers 0 to 4, and the pull-in range of "Replay b", which is a constituent symbol of the middle reel, is the area of symbol numbers 0 to 4. 7, 18 to 19, and the pull-in range of “bell b”, which is a constituent symbol of the right reel, is the region of symbol numbers 0 to 5, 16 to 19. On the other hand, the retraction range of "White 7", which is a constituent symbol of the left reel of BB2, is the area of symbol numbers 0 to 4, and the retraction range of "Plum", which is a constituent symbol of the middle reel, is the area of symbol numbers 4 to 8. , 14-18, and the pull-in range of "Replay b", which is a constituent symbol of the right reel, is the region of symbol numbers 0-3, 14-18. Therefore, the area outside the retraction range of the left reel of BB1 and the area outside the retraction range of the left reel of BB2 overlap in the range of symbol numbers 5 to 17, and the area outside the retraction range of the middle reel of BB1 overlaps with the area outside the retraction range of the left reel of BB2. The area that is outside the retracting range of the middle reel of BB2 overlaps in the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13, and the area that is outside the retracting range of the right reel of BB1 and the area that is outside the retracting range of the right reel of BB2 overlap. The area overlaps with the symbol numbers 6 to 13.

BB1+3 is a winning combination of BB1 and 3 medals, and when BB1+3 is won, regardless of the stop operation order and stop operation timing, 3 medals are always paid out and 3 medals are won, and BB1 is won. is carried over to the next game and thereafter, the game enters the normal gaming state (internal mode).

BB2+3 is a winning combination of BB2 and 3, and when BB2+3 is won, regardless of the stop operation order and stop operation timing, 3 medals are always paid out and 3 medals are won, and BB2 is won. is carried over to the next game and thereafter, the game enters the normal gaming state (internal mode).

Composite minor role A is a role in which all the main minor roles, specific minor role A, and specific minor role B that make up the navigation minor role are won, and when composite minor role A is won, the stop operation order and stop operation timing are determined. Regardless, a specific main/minor combination with a payout of 15 medals will always win.

Composite small role B is a role in which all the secondary minor roles that make up the navigation minor role, 1 piece, and 3 pieces are won, and when composite small role B is won, regardless of the stop operation order or the stop operation timing, it is always a win. One medal is won with the payout of one medal.

The lottery targets (including non-wins) for the internal lottery include non-wins, normal replay A, normal replay B, normal replay C, weak chance replay A, weak chance replay B, strong chance replay A, strong chance replay B, and specific. A winning number (general role) and a winning number (special role) are assigned to minor role A+1 piece, specific minor role B+1 piece, 1 piece, navigation small role, 3 pieces, BB1, BB2, BB1+3 piece, and BB2+3 piece, respectively. The winning numbers (general prize) and winning numbers (special prize) corresponding to the lottery results of the internal lottery are set in the winning number setting area of the RAM 41c.

Specifically, the winning number (general role) is 0 for both BB1 and BB2, which are special roles that do not include the general role and non-winners who did not win any general role. Normal replay A, normal replay B, normal replay C, weak chance replay A, weak chance replay B, strong chance replay A, strong chance replay B, specific small role A + 1 piece, specific small role B + 1 piece, 1 piece, navigation 1 to 37 are assigned in order to the minor role, 3 pieces, composite minor role A, and composite minor role B. For the general role, BB1+3 pieces and BB2+3 pieces, which include 3 pieces, 3 pieces and 3 pieces are assigned. The same number 35 is assigned.

In addition, the winning numbers (special roles) are: non-winning where none of the special roles were won, normal replay A, normal replay B, normal replay C, weak chance replay A, weak chance replay B, strong chance replay A, strong Chance replay B, specific small role A+1 piece, specific small role B+1 piece, 1 piece, navigation small role, 3 pieces are all assigned 0, and special roles BB1 and BB2 are given in order. 1 and 2 are assigned, and 1 and 2 are assigned to BB1+3 pieces and BB2+3 pieces including the special winning combination BB1 or BB2 in the same order as BB1 or BB2.

Note that the winning number (general prize) set in the winning number setting area of the RAM 41c is held only in the game in which the winning number (general prize) is set, and is cleared when the game ends.

In addition, winning numbers other than 0 (special winning numbers) set in the winning number setting area of the RAM 41c are maintained until the special winning numbers (special winning numbers) corresponding to the winning numbers (special winning numbers) are won, and the game in which the special winning numbers were won ends. It will be cleared accordingly. In other words, once BB1 or BB2 is won and a winning number other than 0 (special prize) is set in the winning number setting area, even if the combination of winning numbers (special prize) cannot be matched, The winning numbers (special winning numbers) are not cleared and are carried over to the next game. Incidentally, the winning number (special prize) is also cleared by shifting to the setting change state.

In addition, the lottery targets (including non-winners) of the internal lottery include the corresponding flags for moving to advantageous areas from 0 to 4, lottery flags 1 from 0 to 3, lottery flags 2 from 0 to 3, and lottery flags from 0 to 4. The lottery flag 3 is assigned, and the advantageous section transition flag and lottery flags 1 to 3 are set in the RAM 41c according to the result of the internal lottery (winning number (general role)). The advantageous section shift flag is referenced when determining whether to shift to an advantageous section or not. Further, the lottery flags 1 to 3 are referred to when determining whether or not to conduct a lottery related to the AT state and when performing a lottery related to the AT state.

The advantageous section transition flag is assigned 0 to lottery targets other than the advantageous section transition combination, and for advantageous section transition combinations, for example, multiple types of winning combinations, multiple lottery targets with similar winning probabilities, etc. A common value is assigned to lottery targets that have common attributes that do not need to be distinguished when performing a lottery that is performed at the time of section transition. Therefore, when determining whether to shift to an advantageous section, the main control unit 41 does not need to individually identify whether or not the winning number (general role) is a shift to advantageous section. It is possible to specify whether or not it is an advantageous section transition combination depending on whether the advantageous section transition flag is 0 or not. In addition, when specifying the probability according to the winning number (general role) in the lottery held at the time of transition to an advantageous area, instead of specifying the probability from each winning number (general role), the value of the flag for transition to an advantageous area Since it is possible to specify the probability according to the winning number (general prize), there is no need to determine the probability for each winning number (general prize), and there are fewer advantageous numbers than the number of types of winning numbers (general prize). By determining the probability for each section transition flag, it is possible to specify the probability according to the attribute of the lottery target.

The lottery flag is assigned 0 to lottery targets that are not eligible for lottery related to AT status, and 0 is assigned to lottery targets that are not eligible for lottery related to AT status, and for lottery targets that are eligible for lottery related to AT granting, for example, multiple types of navigation small roles are assigned. A common value is assigned to lottery targets having common attributes that do not need to be distinguished when performing a lottery related to the AT state. Therefore, when performing a lottery related to the AT state, the main control unit 41 does not need to individually specify whether or not to perform the lottery based on each winning number (general prize), and the lottery flag is set to 0. Whether or not a lottery related to the AT state is to be performed can be specified depending on whether or not the AT state is determined. In addition, when specifying the probability according to the winning number (general prize) in a lottery related to the AT state, instead of specifying the probability from each winning number (general prize), the winning number is determined from the value of the lottery flag. (general prize), there is no need to determine the probability for each individual winning number (general prize), and it is possible to specify the probability for each lottery flag, which is smaller than the number of types of winning numbers (general prize). By setting the probability in , it is possible to specify the probability according to the attribute of the lottery target. In addition, the lottery flags include lottery targets that are not eligible for lottery related to the AT state, lottery targets that have common attributes that do not need to be distinguished when performing a lottery related to the AT state, and lottery flags 1 to 1 that differ from each other. 3, and by using any of lottery flags 1 to 3 depending on the type of lottery related to the AT state, you can be excluded from the lottery related to the AT state according to the type of lottery related to the AT state. The lottery targets can be made different, and the probabilities can be set to be different for each lottery target having a common attribute that does not need to be distinguished when performing a lottery related to the AT state.

[About navigation minor roles, specific minor roles, and complex minor roles]
The navigation minor winnings, specific minor winnings that are subject to internal lottery in the normal gaming state (non-internal/internal), and the composite minor winnings that are subject to internal lottery in the special gaming state (RB) will be explained.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 2, symbols placed on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are assigned symbol numbers 0 to 19 in order from the reel reference position (position where the number of steps is reset). In addition, 7 red areas and 7 white areas are assigned to reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively. On the left reel, the red 7 area is the area with symbol numbers 6 to 15, and the white 7 area is the area with symbol numbers 0 to 5 and 16 to 19. On the middle reel, the red 7 area is the area with symbol numbers 7 to 16, and the white 7 area is the area with symbol numbers 0 to 6 and 17 to 19. On the right reel, the red 7 area is the area with symbol numbers 6 to 15, and the white 7 area is the area with symbol numbers 0 to 5 and 16 to 19. On any reel, the red 7 area is an area that includes the pull-in range of the "red 7" symbol and the range where the "red 7" symbol is located in the transparent window 3, and is based on the timing when the "red 7" symbol passes. By doing so, it is possible to perform a stop operation in the red 7 area. In addition, on any reel, the white 7 area is an area that includes the pull-in range of the "white 7" symbol and the range where the "white 7" symbol is located in the transparent window 3, and the timing at which the "white 7" symbol passes is determined. As a guideline, this is the area in which the stop operation can be performed in the white 7 area. Further, on any reel, the range of the red 7 area and the white 7 area is the range of 10 consecutive symbols, and each is a range of 1/2 of one rotation of the reel.

In addition, hereinafter, the reel to be stopped first may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel to be stopped second to be stopped as a second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped third to be stopped to be called a third stop reel.

As shown in Figure 6, the navigation minor roles include red left middle bell A, red left middle bell B, red left and right bells A, red left and right bells B, red middle left bell A, red middle left bell B, and red middle right. Bell A, red middle right bell B, red right left bell A, red right left bell B, red right middle bell A, red right middle bell B, white left middle bell A, white left middle bell B, white left and right bells A, white left and right Includes bell B, white middle left bell A, white middle left bell B, white middle right bell A, white middle right bell B, white right left bell A, white right left bell B, white right middle bell A, white right middle bell B It will be done.

The red left middle bell A is a winning combination in which the upper bell A is a main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, and the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the red left middle bell A is won, if the corresponding operation mode is used (the operation mode in which the left reel, middle reel, and right reel are stopped in the order of stop operations, and the left reel stop operation timing is in the red 7 area), , the combination of the upper bell A is drawn out to the winning line LN, and the upper bell A wins. At this time, any of the bells a to c are aligned on the invalid line LM1. In addition, when the red left center bell A is won, if it is operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

The red middle bell B on the left is a winning combination in which the upper bell B is a main minor role with the payout of 15 medals and the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the red left middle bell B is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the order of stop operations of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel, and the operation mode in which the stop operation timing of the left reel is in the red 7 area), , the upper bell B is drawn out to the winning line LN, and the upper bell B wins. When the upper bell B wins, any of the bells a to c are aligned on the invalid line LM1. In addition, when the red left middle bell B is won, if the operation is performed in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor prize is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor prize is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

The red left and right bell A is a winning combination in which the right-down bell A is the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals and the sub-minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the red left and right bell A is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the order of stop operations of the left reel, right reel, and middle reel, and the operation mode in which the stop operation timing of the left reel is in the red 7 area), A combination of right-down bells A is derived to the winning line LN, and right-down bell A wins. When right-down bell A wins, any of bells a to c will line up on invalid line LM3. In addition, when winning the red left and right bell A, if an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is operated, the symbol combination of the sub-minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the sub-minor role is Either a prize is won, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination is derived to the winning line LN, and it is a loss that does not win any winning combination.

The red left/right bell B is a winning combination in which the small V bell A is won as the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, together with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the red left and right bell B is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the order of stop operations of the left reel, right reel, and middle reel, and the operation mode in which the stop operation timing of the left reel is in the red 7 area), The combination of small V bell A is drawn out to the winning line LN, and small V bell A wins. When the small V bell A wins, any of the bells a to c are aligned on the invalid line LM5. In addition, when winning the red left and right bell B, if an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is operated, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is Either a prize is won, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination is derived to the winning line LN, and it is a loss that does not win any winning combination.

The red middle left bell A is a combination in which the middle bell A is won as the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, together with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the red middle left bell A is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (middle reel, left reel, right reel stop operation order, and the middle reel stop operation timing is the red 7 area), , middle bell A is drawn out to the winning line LN, and middle bell A wins. When the middle bell A wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the winning line LN. In addition, when the red middle left bell A is won, if it is operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

Red middle left bell B is a winning combination in which Koyama Bell A is won as the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, together with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the red middle left bell B is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (middle reel, left reel, right reel stop operation order, and the middle reel stop operation timing is the red 7 area), , Koyama Bell A is derived to the winning line LN, and Koyama Bell A wins. When Koyama Bell A wins, any of Bells a to c will be aligned on the invalid line LM6. In addition, when the red middle left bell B is won, if the operation is performed in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

The red middle right bell A is a winning combination in which the rising right bell A is the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals and the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the red middle right bell A is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the order of stop operations of the middle reel, right reel, and left reel, and the operation mode where the stop operation timing of the middle reel is the red 7 area), , the combination of the rising right bell A is derived to the winning line LN, and the rising right bell A wins a prize. When the rising right bell A wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM4. In addition, when the red middle right bell A is won, if it is operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

The red middle right bell B is a winning combination in which the rising right bell B is the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, together with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the red middle right bell B is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (middle reel, right reel, left reel stop operation order, and the middle reel stop operation timing is the red 7 area), , the combination of the rising right bell B is derived to the winning line LN, and the rising right bell B wins a prize. When the rising right bell B wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM4. In addition, when the red middle right bell B is won, if it is operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

The red right-left bell A is a winning combination in which the rising right bell C is the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals and the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the red right/left bell A is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the right reel, left reel, middle reel stop operation order, and the right reel stop operation timing is the red 7 area), The combination of the rising bell C to the right is led out to the winning line LN, and the rising bell C to the right wins. When the rising right bell C wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM4. In addition, when the red right left bell A is won, if an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is operated, the symbol combination of the sub-minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the sub-minor role is Either a prize is won, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination is derived to the winning line LN, and it is a loss that does not win any winning combination.

Red right left bell B is a winning combination in which Koyama Bell B is won as the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals together with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the red right left bell B is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the right reel, left reel, middle reel stop operation order, and the right reel stop operation timing is the red 7 area), The combination of Koyama Bell B is derived to the winning line LN, and Koyama Bell B wins. When Koyama Bell B wins, any of Bells a to c will be aligned on the invalid line LM6. In addition, when the red right left bell B is won, if an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is operated, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is Either a prize is won, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination is derived to the winning line LN, and it is a loss that does not win any winning combination.

The red right middle bell A is a winning combination in which the middle bell B is won as the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, as well as the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the red right middle bell A is won, if the corresponding operation mode (operation mode in which the stop operation order of the right reel, middle reel, and left reel, and the stop operation timing of the right reel is in the red 7 area), , middle bell B is drawn out to the winning line LN, and middle bell B wins a prize. When the middle bell B wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the winning line LN. In addition, when the red right middle bell A is won, if it is operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

The red right middle bell B is a combination in which the lower bell A is won as the main minor prize with the payout of 15 medals, together with the secondary minor prize with the payout of 1 medal. When the red right middle bell B is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the stop operation order of the right reel, middle reel, and left reel, and the operation mode where the stop operation timing of the right reel is the red 7 area), , the combination of lower bell A is drawn out to the winning line LN, and lower bell A wins. When lower bell A wins, any of bells a to c are aligned on the invalid line LM2. In addition, when the red right middle bell B is won, if it is operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor prize is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor prize is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

The white left center bell A is a winning combination in which the upper bell C is won as the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, along with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the white left center bell A is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the order of stop operations of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel, and the operation mode in which the stop operation timing of the left reel is the white 7 area), , the upper bell C is drawn out to the winning line LN, and the upper bell C wins a prize. When the upper bell C wins, any of the bells a to c are aligned on the invalid line LM1. In addition, when winning the white left center bell A, if the operation is performed in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

The white left middle bell B is a winning combination in which the upper bell D is a main minor role with the payout of 15 medals and the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the white left center bell B is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the order of stop operations of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel, and the operation mode in which the stop operation timing of the left reel is the white 7 area), , the upper bell D is drawn out to the winning line LN, and the upper bell D wins a prize. When the upper bell D wins, any of the bells a to c are aligned on the invalid line LM1. In addition, when the white left center bell B is won, if the operation mode is other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

The white left and right bell A is a winning combination as the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, as well as the right-down bell B with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the white left and right bell A is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the order of stop operations of the left reel, right reel, and middle reel, and the operation mode in which the stop operation timing of the left reel is the white 7 area), A combination of bells B falling to the right is derived to the winning line LN, and bells B falling to the right win a prize. When the right-downward bell B wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM3. In addition, when the white left and right bell A is won, if the operation is performed in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is Either a prize is won, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination is derived to the winning line LN, and it is a loss that does not win any winning combination.

White Left/Right Bell B is a combination in which the small V Bell B is won as the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, together with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the white left and right bell B is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the order of stop operations of the left reel, right reel, and middle reel, and the operation mode in which the stop operation timing of the left reel is the white 7 area), The combination of small V bell B is drawn out to the winning line LN, and small V bell B wins. When the small V bell B wins, any of the bells a to c are aligned on the invalid line LM5. In addition, when winning the white left and right bell B, if an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is operated, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is Either a prize is won, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination is derived to the winning line LN, and it is a loss that does not win any winning combination.

The white middle left bell A is a winning combination in which the middle bell C is won as the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, along with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the white middle left bell A is won, if the corresponding operation mode is used (the order of stop operations of the middle reel, left reel, and right reel, and the operation mode in which the stop operation timing of the middle reel is the white 7 area), , middle bell C is drawn out to the winning line LN, and middle bell C wins a prize. When middle bell C wins, any of bells a to c line up on winning line LN. In addition, when the white middle left bell A is won, if it is operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

White middle left bell B is a winning combination in which Koyama Bell C is won as the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, along with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the white middle left bell B is won, if the corresponding operation mode is used (the order of stop operations of the middle reel, left reel, and right reel, and the operation mode in which the stop operation timing of the middle reel is the white 7 area), , Koyama Bell C is derived to the winning line LN, and Koyama Bell C wins. When Koyama Bell C wins, any of Bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM6. In addition, when the white middle left bell B is won, if it is operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

The white middle right bell A is a winning combination as the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, and the right-up bell D with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the white middle right bell A is won, if the corresponding operation mode is used (the order of stop operations of the middle reel, right reel, and left reel, and the operation mode in which the stop operation timing of the middle reel is the white 7 area), , the combination of the rising right bell D is derived to the winning line LN, and the rising right bell D wins a prize. When the rising right bell D wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM4. In addition, when winning the white middle right bell A, if the operation is performed in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

The white middle right bell B is a winning combination in which the right rising bell E is the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, together with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the white middle right bell B is won, if the corresponding operation mode is used (the order of stop operations of the middle reel, right reel, and left reel, and the operation mode in which the stop operation timing of the middle reel is the white 7 area), , the combination of the rising right bell E is derived to the winning line LN, and the rising right bell E wins a prize. When the right rising bell E wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM4. In addition, when winning the white middle right bell B, if the operation is performed in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

The white right-left bell A is a winning combination in which the rising right bell F is the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, along with the sub-minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the white right/left bell A is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the order of stop operations of the right reel, left reel, and middle reel, and the operation mode where the stop operation timing of the right reel is the white 7 area), The combination of the rising bell F to the right is derived to the winning line LN, and the rising bell F to the right wins a prize. When the rising right bell F wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM4. In addition, when the white right/left bell A is won, if the operation is performed in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the sub-minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the sub-minor role is Either a prize is won, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination is derived to the winning line LN, and it is a loss that does not win any winning combination.

White right/left bell B is a winning combination in which Koyama Bell D is won as the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, along with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When winning White Right/Left Bell B, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the right reel, left reel, middle reel stop operation order, and the right reel stop operation timing is the white 7 area), The combination of Bell Koyama D is drawn out to the winning line LN, and Bell D Koyama wins. When Koyama Bell D wins, any of Bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM6. In addition, when the white right left bell B is won, if an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is operated, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is Either a prize is won, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination is derived to the winning line LN, and it is a loss that does not win any winning combination.

The white right middle bell A is a winning combination in which the middle bell D is won as the main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, along with the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the white right middle bell A is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the stop operation order of the right reel, middle reel, and left reel, and the operation mode where the stop operation timing of the right reel is the white 7 area), , middle bell D is drawn out to the winning line LN, and middle bell D wins a prize. When the middle bell D wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the winning line LN. In addition, when the white right middle bell A is won, if it is operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the secondary minor role is will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

The white right middle bell B is a winning combination in which the lower bell B is a main minor role with the payout of 15 medals, and the secondary minor role with the payout of 1 medal. When the white right middle bell B is won, if the corresponding operation mode is operated (the right reel, middle reel, left reel stop operation order, and the right reel stop operation timing is the white 7 area), , the combination of the lower bell B is drawn out to the winning line LN, and the lower bell B wins. When the lower bell B wins, any of the bells a to c are aligned on the invalid line LM2. In addition, when winning the white right middle bell B, if the operation is performed in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the sub-minor role is derived to the winning line LN according to the stop operation timing, and the sub-minor role is drawn out to the winning line LN. will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any winning combination will be drawn to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which neither winning combination will be won.

It should be noted that among the main and minor winnings that make up the navigation minor winnings, the middle bells A to D all have any of the bells a to c aligned on the winning line LN, but the symbol combinations that align on the winning line LN are different. In addition, among the main minor winnings that make up the navigation minor winnings, upper bells A to D all have any of the bells a to c aligned on the invalid line LM1, but the symbol combinations aligned on the winning line LN are different. Furthermore, among the main and minor winnings that make up the navigation minor winnings, lower bells A and B both have any of the bells a to c aligned on the invalid line LM2, but the symbol combinations that align on the winning line LN are different. Furthermore, among the main and minor winnings that make up the navigation minor winnings, right-down bells A and B both have any of the bells a to c aligned on the invalid line LM3, but the symbol combinations that align on the winning line LN are different. In addition, among the main minor winnings constituting the navigation minor winnings, the bells A to F rising to the right all have any of the bells a to c aligned on the invalid line LM4, but the symbol combinations aligned on the winning line LN are different. Furthermore, among the main minor winnings constituting the navigation minor winnings, the small V bells A and B both have any of the bells a to c aligned on the invalid line LM5, but the symbol combinations aligned on the winning line LN are different. Furthermore, among the main minor winnings constituting the navigation minor winnings, Koyama Bells A to D all have any of the bells a to c aligned on the invalid line LM6, but the symbol combinations aligned on the winning line LN are different.

The specific small winning combination A+1 piece is a winning combination along with the specific small winning combination A with the payout of 15 medals and 1 piece with the payout of 1 medal. When a specific minor winning combination A+1 piece is won, if the left reel is operated in an operation mode in which the stop operation timing is in the white 7 area, the symbol combination of the specific minor winning combination A will be guided to the winning line LN regardless of the stop operation order. and specific small role A wins. When winning the specific minor winning combination A + 1 piece, if the left reel is operated in an operation mode in which the stop operation timing is in the red 7 area, regardless of the order of stop operations, 1 symbol combination will be derived to the winning line LN, and 1 The winning ticket will be awarded.

The specific small winning combination B+1 piece is a winning combination of the specific small winning combination B with the payout of 15 medals and 1 piece with the payout of 1 medal. When winning a specific minor winning combination B + 1 piece, if the left reel is operated in an operation mode in which the stop operation timing is in the white 7 area, the symbol combination of the specific minor winning combination B will be guided to the winning line LN regardless of the order of stop operations. Then, the specific small winning combination B wins. When winning a specific minor winning combination B + 1 piece, if the left reel is operated in an operation mode in which the stop operation timing is in the red 7 area, regardless of the order of stop operations, 1 symbol combination will be derived to the winning line LN, and 1 The winning ticket will be awarded.

Specific small prizes A and B are small prizes that will win regardless of the order of stop operations and will pay out 15 medals if the left reel stop operation timing is operated in the white 7 area. However, the symbol combinations on the winning line LN are different. In addition, as mentioned above, the range of red 7 areas and white 7 areas on the left reel is the range of 10 consecutive symbols, which is 1/2 of one revolution of the left reel, so specific small winning combination A + 1 piece When the specific small winning combination B+1 piece is won, the specific small winning combinations A and B win in 1/2 of the plurality of operating modes, and 1 piece wins in 1/2 of the operating modes.

Composite small role 1 consists of all the main and minor roles that make up the navigation minor role, namely, upper bells A to D, middle bells A to D, lower bells A and B, downward-sloping right bells A and B, and upward-right bells A to F. , Koyama Bells A to D, Small V Bells A and B, and specific small winnings A and B are winning combinations at the same time. When winning Composite Small Win 1, regardless of the stop operation order and stop operation timing, one of the symbol combinations of middle bells A to D that will always result in the payout of 15 medals will be drawn to the winning line LN, and the middle bell A ~D will win a prize.

Composite minor winning combination 2 is a winning combination in which all of the secondary minor winnings that make up the navigation minor winning combination, 1 card, and 3 cards are selected. When the composite small winning combination 2 is won, regardless of the stop operation order and stop operation timing, one symbol combination accompanied by the payout of one medal is always led to the winning line LN, and one medal is won.

[About controls related to navigation minor roles, specific minor roles, and composite minor roles]
After the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 transmits an internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 transmits the internal lottery result specified from the internal lottery command. The content of the performance is determined according to the content of the performance, and the performance is executed according to the determined content of the performance.

As shown in FIG. 6, when a navigation minor prize is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 controls the type of navigation minor prize and the corresponding one, whether the navigation notification is to be made or the navigation notification is not to be made. Regardless of the operation mode, an internal winning command that indicates the winning number (general role) 11 common to all Navi minor roles, that is, it is possible to identify that the Navi minor role has been won, but the corresponding operation mode cannot be specified. An internal winning command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

In addition, if the navigation minor prize is won in the internal lottery and the navigation notification is not to be performed, the main control unit 41 sets "0" indicating that the navigation notification will not be performed in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. , When performing navigation notification, set a navigation number from "1" to "12" according to the operation mode corresponding to the won navigation minor role in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c, and set it in the navigation number setting area. By displaying the selected navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, navigation notification is performed to urge a stop operation in an operation mode corresponding to the won navigation small winning combination. Incidentally, if a winning combination that is not subject to navigation notification is won in the internal lottery, "0" indicating that navigation notification will not be performed is set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, when either the red left center bell A or the red left center bell B wins and the navigation is notified, "1" is set as the navigation number in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. As shown in FIG. 7, by displaying "1" set as the navigation number on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the stop operation order of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel and the stop operation timing of the left reel are determined. A navigation notification is provided to prompt the driver to stop the vehicle in the red 7 area (left red area, center stop, right stop).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when either the red left/right bell A or the red left/right bell B wins and the navigation is notified, "2" is set as the navigation number in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. As shown in 7, by displaying "2" set as the navigation number on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the stop operation order of the left reel, right reel, middle reel and the stop operation timing of the left reel are changed to red 7. A navigation notification is provided to prompt the driver to stop the vehicle in certain operating modes (left red area, right, middle stop).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when either the red middle left bell A or the red middle left bell B wins and the navigation is notified, "3" is set as the navigation number in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. , as shown in FIG. 7, by displaying "3" set as the navigation number on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the stop operation order of the middle reel, left reel, and right reel and the stop operation timing of the middle reel can be changed. A navigation notification is provided to prompt the driver to stop in the red 7 area (medium red area, left/right stop).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when either the red middle right bell A or the red middle right bell B wins and the navigation is notified, "4" is set as the navigation number in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. , as shown in FIG. 7, by displaying "4" set as the navigation number on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the stop operation order of the middle reel, right reel, and left reel, and the stop operation timing of the middle reel can be changed. A navigation notification is provided to encourage a stop operation in the red 7 area (middle red area, right/left stop).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when either the red right/left bell A or the red right/left bell B wins and the navigation is notified, "5" is set as the navigation number in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c, and as shown in FIG. As shown in 7, by displaying "5" set as the navigation number on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the stop operation order of the right reel, left reel, middle reel and the stop operation timing of the right reel are changed to red 7. A navigation notification is provided to prompt the driver to stop in certain operating modes (red right area, left, middle stop).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when either the red right middle bell A or the red right middle bell B wins and the navigation is notified, "6" is set as the navigation number in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. , as shown in FIG. 7, by displaying "6" set as the navigation number on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the stop operation order of the right reel, middle reel, and left reel, and the stop operation timing of the right reel can be changed. A navigation notification is provided to prompt the driver to stop in the red 7 area (right red area, center stop, left stop).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6, when either the white left middle bell A or the white left middle bell B wins and the navigation is notified, "7" is set as the navigation number in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. , as shown in FIG. 7, by displaying "7" set as the navigation number on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the order of stop operations of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel and the stop operation timing of the left reel can be changed. A navigation notification is provided to prompt a stop operation in the operation mode that corresponds to the white 7 area (left white area, middle, right stop).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, if either the white left/right bell A or the white left/right bell B wins and the navigation is notified, "8" is set as the navigation number in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. As shown in 7, by displaying "8" set as the navigation number on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the stop operation order of the left reel, right reel, middle reel and the stop operation timing of the left reel are changed to white 7. A navigation notification is provided to prompt the driver to stop in the operation mode that corresponds to the area (left white area, right, middle stop).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when either the white middle left bell A or the white middle left bell B wins and the navigation is notified, "9" is set as the navigation number in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. , as shown in FIG. 7, by displaying "9" set as the navigation number on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the stop operation order of the middle reel, left reel, and right reel, and the stop operation timing of the middle reel can be changed. A navigation notification is provided to prompt a stop operation in the white 7 area (center white area, left/right stop).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when either the white middle right bell A or the white middle right bell B wins and the navigation is notified, "10" is set as the navigation number in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. , as shown in FIG. 7, by displaying "10" set as the navigation number on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the stop operation order of the middle reel, right reel, and left reel, and the stop operation timing of the middle reel can be changed. A navigation notification is provided to prompt a stop operation in the white 7 area (center white area, right/left stop).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when either the white right/left bell A or the white right/left bell B wins and the navigation is notified, "11" is set as the navigation number in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c, and As shown in 7, by displaying "11" set as the navigation number on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the stop operation order of the right reel, left reel, middle reel and the stop operation timing of the right reel are changed to white 7. A navigation notification is provided that prompts the driver to stop in the operation mode that corresponds to the area (right white area, left, middle stop).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6, when either the white right middle bell A or the white right middle bell B wins and the navigation is notified, "12" is set as the navigation number in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. , as shown in FIG. 7, by displaying "12" set as the navigation number on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the stop operation order of the right reel, middle reel, and left reel and the stop operation timing of the right reel can be changed. A navigation notification is provided to prompt a stop operation in the operation mode that corresponds to the white 7 area (right white area, middle, left stop).

In this way, even if the types of navigation minor winnings are different, if a navigation minor winning combination corresponding to the same operation mode is won, a common navigation notification is performed.

In addition, if the navigation notification is not performed when the navigation minor prize is won, the main control unit 41 can specify the navigation number "0" for which the operation mode corresponding to the navigation minor prize is not specified after transmitting the internal winning command. While transmitting navigation commands, as shown in FIG. 6, if either red left middle bell A or red left middle bell B wins and a navigation notification is performed, the corresponding operation mode is the left red area. A navigation command that can specify the navigation number "1" indicating the center/right stop is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and a navigation notification is made as to which of the red left and right bells A and red left and right bells B is selected. In this case, a navigation command that can specify the navigation number "2" indicating that the corresponding operation mode is left red area, right, middle stop is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the red middle left bell A, If either of the red middle left bells B wins and a navigation notification is made, a navigation command that can specify the navigation number "3" indicating that the corresponding operation mode is the middle red area, left or right stop will be subbed. When transmitting to the control unit 91 and performing navigation notification when either red middle right bell A or red middle right bell B wins, the corresponding operation mode is middle red area, right/left stop. A navigation command that can specify the navigation number "4" indicating the number "4" is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and if either the red right left bell A or the red right left bell B is won and the navigation notification is performed, the corresponding operation is performed. A navigation command that can specify the navigation number "5" indicating that the mode is a right red area, left, or middle stop is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and a navigation command that can specify the navigation number "5" indicating that the mode is right red area, left, or middle stop is sent to the sub-control unit 91, When winning and performing navigation notification, a navigation command that can specify the navigation number "6" indicating that the corresponding operation mode is right red area, middle, and left stop is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. However, if either the white left center bell A or the white left center bell B is selected and the navigation is notified, the navigation number "7" indicating that the corresponding operation mode is left white area, middle, right stop. When transmitting a navigation command that can specify the white left/right bell A or white left/right bell B to the sub-control unit 91 and performing navigation notification as to whether the white left/right bell A or the white left/right bell B has been won, the corresponding operation mode is the left white area/right white area. - Sends a navigation command that can specify the navigation number "8" indicating a middle stop to the sub-control unit 91, and sends a navigation notification as to whether the white middle left bell A or the white middle left bell B wins. When doing so, a navigation command that can specify the navigation number "9" indicating that the corresponding operation mode is center white area/left/right stop is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and the white center right bell A is , white center right bell B is selected and if a navigation notification is to be made, a navigation command that can specify the navigation number "10" indicating that the corresponding operation mode is the center white area, right/left stop is required. A message is sent to the sub-control unit 91 to indicate that when either the white right/left bell A or the white right/left bell B is selected and the navigation is notified, the corresponding operation mode is right white area/left/middle stop. A navigation command that can specify the navigation number "11" shown is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and if either the white right middle bell A or the white right middle bell B wins and the navigation is notified, the corresponding navigation command is executed. A navigation command that can specify the navigation number "12" indicating that the operation mode is right white area, center, and left stop is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

In this way, even if the types of navigation minor winnings are different, if a navigation minor winning combination corresponding to the same stop operation order is won, a common navigation command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control unit 41 determines whether navigation notification is to be made or not when specific small winning combination A+1 piece, specific small winning combination B+1 piece, and 1 piece are won in the internal lottery. Also, regardless of whether a specific minor role A+1 piece, a specific minor role B+1 piece, or 1 piece is won, an internal winning command indicating the common winning number (general role) 8, that is, a specific minor role A+1 piece, a specific minor role An internal winning command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 that makes it possible to specify that either B+1 ticket or 1 ticket has been won, but it is not possible to specify which one has been won.

In addition, the main control unit 41 sends a message to the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c that the navigation notification will not be performed when the specific small winning combination A+1 piece and the specific small winning combination B+1 piece are won in the internal lottery and the navigation notification is not performed. If you set "0" indicating "0" and perform the navigation notification, the navigation number "13" corresponding to the operation mode corresponding to the specific small winning combination A+1 piece and the specific small winning combination B+1 piece is set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. By setting the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area on the game auxiliary display 12, the navigation notification prompts the stop operation in the operation mode corresponding to the specific small winning combination A+1 piece and the specific small winning combination B+1 piece. I do. In addition, if a winning ticket that is not eligible for navigation notification is won in the internal lottery, "0" indicating that navigation notification will not be made will be placed in the navigation number setting area of RAM 41c, similar to other winning combinations that are not eligible for navigation notification. is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, if either the specific small winning combination A+1 piece or the specific small winning combination B+1 piece is won and the navigation is notified, “13” is set as the navigation number in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. By displaying "13" set as the navigation number on the gaming auxiliary display 12, as shown in FIG. 7, the operation mode in which the left reel stop operation timing is in the white 7 area (left white area) Provides a navigation notification to prompt the driver to stop the vehicle.

In this way, no matter which of the specific small winning combinations A+1 and specific small winnings B+1 winning, the operation mode for winning the specific small winnings A and B is the same, and the navigation notification that the specific small winning combination A+1 is won. A common navigation notification is performed both in the case where a specific small winning combination B+1 piece is won and the navigation notification is performed.

If the main control unit 41 does not notify the navigation when either the specific small winning combination A+1 piece or the specific small winning combination B+1 piece is won, after transmitting an internal winning command, the main control unit 41 sends a navigation number that does not specify which one won. While transmitting a navigation command that can specify "0", as shown in Figure 6, if a specific small winning combination A+1 piece or a specific small winning combination B+1 piece is won and the navigation is notified, the left reel A navigation command is sent to the sub-control unit 91 that can specify the navigation number "13" indicating that the stop operation is in an operation mode in which the stop operation timing is in the white 7 area (left white area).

In addition, since the navigation notification is not performed when one ticket is won, the main control unit 41 transmits the internal winning command when one ticket is won, and then sends the navigation number "0", which does not specify which one has won. Send a navigation command that can identify the

In this way, no matter which of the specific small winning combinations A+1 and specific small winnings B+1 winning, the operation mode for winning the specific small winnings A and B is the same, and the navigation notification that the specific small winning combination A+1 is won. A common navigation command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 both in the case where the specific small winning combination B+1 piece is won and the navigation notification is performed.

In addition, if a winning combination that is not subject to navigation notification is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 transmits an internal winning command, and then transmits the navigation number setting area to the navigation number setting area when a winning combination that is not subject to navigation notification is won in the internal lottery. Sends a navigation command that can specify the navigation number "0" set to .

When the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command indicating the winning of a navigation minor prize, it is possible to specify from the internal winning command that one of the navigation minor prizes has been won; Since the corresponding operation mode cannot be specified, if the navigation notification is not performed on the main control unit 41 side and the corresponding operation mode is not specified from the navigation command received after the internal winning command, the navigation minor win is won and the navigation Control when notification is not performed, for example, determining one of the performance contents from a group of performances corresponding to the winning of the navigation minor role and no navigation notification (for example, a performance indicating the winning of the navigation minor role, etc.) Then, the performance is performed according to the determined performance content.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command specifying the winning of the navigation minor prize and then receives a navigation command indicating the navigation number "1", the sub-control unit 91 displays the liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. By displaying an image of "Red 7-2-3" on the device 51, a navigation effect is performed that prompts a stop operation in the left red area, middle, and right stop operation mode. At this time, even if red left middle bell A is won or red left middle bell B is won, a common internal winning command and a common navigation command are transmitted, so the sub control unit 91 , performs navigation effects that encourage stop operations in the left red area, middle, and right stop operation modes using common control.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command specifying the winning of the navigation minor prize and then receives a navigation command indicating the navigation number "2", the sub-control unit 91 displays the liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. By displaying the image of "Red 7-3-2" on the device 51, a navigation effect is performed that prompts a stop operation in the left red area, right, and middle stop operation mode. At this time, even if red left and right bells A are won, and even if red left and right bells B are won, a common internal winning command and a common navigation command are transmitted, so the sub-control unit 91 Under the control of , a navigation effect is performed that encourages stop operations in the left red area, right, and middle stop operation modes.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command specifying the winning of the navigation minor prize and then receives a navigation command indicating the navigation number "3", the sub-control unit 91 displays the liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. By displaying the image "2-Red 7-3" on the device 51, a navigation effect is performed that prompts a stop operation in the middle red area, left, right stop operation mode. At this time, even if red middle left bell A has been won or red middle left bell B has been won, a common internal winning command and a common navigation command are transmitted, so the sub control unit 91 , performs navigation effects that encourage stop operations in the middle red area, left, and right stop operations using common control.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command specifying the winning of the navigation minor prize and then receives a navigation command indicating the navigation number "4", the sub-control unit 91 displays the liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. By displaying the image "3-Red 7-2" on the device 51, a navigation effect is performed that prompts a stop operation in the middle red area, right/left stop operation mode. At this time, even if red middle right bell A is won or red middle right bell B is won, a common internal winning command and a common navigation command are transmitted, so the sub control unit 91 , performs navigation effects that encourage stop operations in the middle red area, right and left stop operations using common control.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command specifying the winning of the navigation minor prize and then receives a navigation command indicating the navigation number "5", the sub-control unit 91 displays the liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. By displaying the image "2-3-Red 7" on the device 51, a navigation effect is performed that prompts a stop operation in the right red area, left, and middle stop operation mode. At this time, even if red right/left bell A has been won or red right/left bell B has been won, a common internal winning command and a common navigation command are transmitted, so the sub-control unit 91 Under the control of , a navigation effect is performed that encourages stop operations in the right red area, left, and middle stop operation modes.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command specifying the winning of the navigation minor prize and then receives a navigation command indicating the navigation number "6", the sub-control unit 91 displays the liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. By displaying the image "3-2-Red 7" on the device 51, a navigation effect is performed that prompts a stop operation in the right red area, middle, and left stop operation modes. At this time, even if red right middle bell A is won or red right middle bell B is won, a common internal winning command and a common navigation command are transmitted, so the sub control unit 91 , performs navigation effects that encourage stop operations in the right red area, middle, and left stop operation modes using common control.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command specifying the winning of the navigation small winning combination and then receives a navigation command indicating the navigation number "7", the sub-control unit 91 displays a screen on the liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. By displaying an image of "White 7-2-3" on 51, a navigation effect is performed that prompts a stop operation in the left white area, middle, and right stop operation mode. At this time, even if white left middle bell A is won or white left middle bell B is won, a common internal winning command and a common navigation command are transmitted, so the sub control unit 91 , performs navigation effects that encourage stop operations in the left white area, middle, and right stop operation modes using common control.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command specifying the winning of the navigation minor prize and then receives a navigation command indicating the navigation number "8", the sub-control unit 91 displays the liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. By displaying the image of "White 7-3-2" on the device 51, a navigation effect is performed that prompts the stop operation in the left white area, right, and middle stop operation mode. At this time, even if white left and right bells A have been won, and even if white left and right bells B have been won, a common internal winning command and a common navigation command are transmitted. Under the control of , a navigation effect is performed that prompts a stop operation in the left white area, right, and middle stop operation mode.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command specifying the winning of the navigation minor prize and then receives a navigation command indicating the navigation number "9", the sub-control unit 91 displays the liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. By displaying the image "2-white 7-3" on the device 51, a navigation effect is performed that prompts a stop operation in the middle white area, left, and right stop operation mode. At this time, even if white middle left bell A is won or white middle left bell B is won, a common internal winning command and a common navigation command are transmitted, so the sub control unit 91 , performs navigation effects that encourage stop operations in the center white area, left, and right stop operations using common control.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command specifying the winning of the navigation minor prize and then receives a navigation command indicating the navigation number "10", the sub-control unit 91 displays the liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. By displaying the image "3-White 7-2" on the device 51, a navigation effect is performed that prompts a stop operation in the middle white area, right, left stop operation mode. At this time, even if white middle right bell A has been won or white middle right bell B has been won, a common internal winning command and a common navigation command are transmitted, so the sub-control unit 91 , performs navigation effects that encourage stop operations in the center white area, right, and left stop operations using common control.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command specifying the winning of the navigation minor prize and then receives a navigation command indicating the navigation number "11", the sub-control unit 91 displays a liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. By displaying the image "2-3-White 7" on the device 51, a navigation effect is performed that prompts the stop operation in the right white area, left, and middle stop operation mode. At this time, even if white right/left bell A has been won or white right/left bell B has been won, a common internal winning command and a common navigation command are transmitted, so the sub-control unit 91 Under the control of , a navigation effect is performed that encourages stop operations in the right white area, left, and middle stop operation mode.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command specifying the winning of the navigation minor prize and then receives a navigation command indicating the navigation number "12", the sub-control unit 91 displays the liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. By displaying the image "3-2-white 7" on the device 51, a navigation effect is performed that prompts the stop operation in the right white area, middle, and left stop operation modes. At this time, even if white right middle bell A is won or white right middle bell B is won, a common internal winning command and a common navigation command are transmitted, so the sub control unit 91 , performs navigation effects that encourage stop operations in the right white area, middle, and left stop operation modes using common control.

When the sub control unit 91 receives an internal winning command indicating the winning of a specific small winning combination A+1 piece, a specific small winning combination B+1 piece, and 1 piece, the navigation notification is not performed on the main control unit 41 side, and after the internal winning command If the corresponding operation mode is not specified from the received navigation command, control for the case where one of the specified small winning combinations A+1 piece, specific small winning combination B+1 piece, and 1 piece is won and navigation notification is not performed, e.g. A group of performances that correspond to the case where there is a winning of minor role A + 1 piece, specific minor role B + 1 piece, and 1 piece, and there is no navigation notification (for example, a performance that suggests the winning of specific small role A + 1 piece, specific small role B + 1 piece, and 1 piece) etc.), and executes the performance based on the determined performance content.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command indicating the winning of specific small winning combination A+1 piece and specific small winning winning combination B+1 piece, and then receives a navigation command indicating the navigation number “13”, As shown, by displaying the image "White 7-2-3" on the liquid crystal display 51, a navigation effect is performed that prompts a stop operation in the left white area stop operation mode. At this time, even if the specific small winning combination A+1 piece is won or the specific small winning combination B+1 piece is won, a common internal winning command and a common navigation command are transmitted, so the sub control unit 91 , performs a navigation effect that prompts a stop operation in the left white area stop operation mode under common control. In addition, the stop operation in the left white area stop operation mode is included in the left white area, middle, and right stop operation modes, so if white left middle bell A is won or white left middle bell B is won. Performs the same navigation effect as when the vehicle is running.

In addition, in this embodiment, the navigation notification that is performed when the white left middle bell A, the white left middle bell B, the white left and right bell A, and the white left and right bell B are won among the navigation small roles, and the specific small role A+1 This is different from the navigation notification that is carried out when a special small role B+1 piece is won, but when a specific small role A+1 piece or a specific small role B+1 piece is won, a specific small role A or B is won. The operation mode is to stop the left white area/middle/right corresponding to white left middle bell A, white left middle bell B, or the left white area/right/right stop corresponding to white left/right bell A, white left/right bell B. Since it is included in the operation mode of the middle stop, the navigation that will be performed when the white left middle bell A and the white left middle bell B are won when the specific small role A + 1 piece and the specific small role B + 1 piece are won. It is also possible to perform navigation notification in the same manner as the navigation notification performed when the notification or white left and right bells A and white left and right bells B are won.

In addition, in this embodiment, the navigation command that is sent when the white left middle bell A, the white left middle bell B, the white left and right bell A, and the white left and right bell B are won among the navigation small roles, and the specific small role The configuration is different from the navigation command sent when A+1 piece and specific small role B+1 piece are won, but when the specific small role A+1 piece and specific small role B+1 piece are won, white left It may be configured to send a navigation command that specifies a common operation mode when middle bell A, white left middle bell B is won, or when white left and right bells A and white left and right bells B are won. .

[About the winning probability of the small roles that make up the navigation small role, specific small role, and composite small role]
In this example, as shown in FIG. 8, in the normal gaming state (non-internal/internal), the probability of winning the red left middle bell A when the upper bell A wins, and the winning probability of the red left middle bell when the upper bell B wins. The winning probability of B, the winning probability of red left and right bells A that lower right bell A wins, the winning probability of red left and right bells B that small V bell A wins, the winning probability of red middle left bell A that wins middle bell A, Probability of winning red middle left bell B when Koyama Bell A wins, probability of winning red middle right bell A when rising right bell A wins, probability of winning red middle right bell B when rising right bell B wins, rising right bell. Winning probability of red right left bell A winning C, winning probability of red right left bell B winning Koyama Bell B, winning probability of red right middle bell A winning middle bell B, red right middle winning lower bell A. Probability of winning bell B, probability of winning white left middle bell A with upper bell C winning, probability of winning white middle bell B with upper bell D winning, probability of winning white left and right bell A with lower right bell B winning. , the probability of winning the white left and right bells B when the small V bell B wins, the probability of winning the white middle left bell A when the middle bell C wins, the probability of winning the white middle left bell B when the small bell C wins, the probability of winning the right rising bell D Winning probability of white middle right bell A winning, winning probability of white middle right bell B winning right rising bell E, winning probability of white right left bell A winning right rising bell F winning, white winning probability of white right bell D winning right rising bell F. The winning probability of right and left bell B, the winning probability of white right middle bell A that middle bell D wins, and the winning probability of white right middle bell B that lower bell B wins, are all 2000/65536, and specific small role A. The winning probability of the specific small winning combination A+1 piece in which the specified small winning combination B is won and the winning probability of the specific small winning combination B+1 piece in which the specific small winning combination B is won are both 1345/65536.

In addition, in the special gaming state (RB), all the main and minor roles, namely, upper bells A to D, middle bells A to D, lower bells A, B, lower right bells A, B, upper right bells A to F, small mountain. The winning probability of Composite Small Win 1 in which Bells A to D, Small V Bells A and B, and Specific Small Wins A and B are won is 2001/65536, and the normal gaming state (Non-internal medium/Internal medium) It is set higher than the winning probability (2000/65536) for each of the main and minor roles in .

In addition, the probability of winning any of the main and minor prizes in the special gaming state (RB) (2001/65536) is higher than the probability of winning any of the major and minor prizes in the normal gaming state (non-internal/internal) (48000/65536). ) is set lower. In other words, the winning probability of each main and minor combination in the normal gaming state (non-internal medium and internal medium) is set lower than the winning probability of the main and minor combination in the special gaming state (RB). The probability of winning a main/minor combination in the special gaming state (RB) is set lower than the probability of winning any of the main/minor combinations in the special gaming state (RB).

From this, for example, if there is only one type of main and minor winning combination in navigation minor winnings that correspond to the same operation mode, the probability of winning each of the main and minor winnings in the normal gaming state (non-internal medium, internal medium) is high. Therefore, if the winning probability of the main and minor prizes in the special gaming state (RB) is set higher than that, the winning probability of the major and minor prizes in the special gaming state (RB) will become relatively high. In the embodiment, in a configuration in which the winning probability of the main and minor winning combinations in the special gaming state (RB) is set higher than the winning probability of each of the main and minor winnings in the normal gaming state (non-internal medium and internal medium), the same operation mode is used. By setting multiple types (in this example, two types) of the main and minor roles that can be won in the corresponding navigation minor roles, the probability of winning each of the main and minor roles in the normal gaming state (non-internal medium and internal medium) decreases. , it is possible to correspondingly lower the winning probability of the main and minor winning combinations in the special gaming state (RB).

In addition, the probability of winning specific minor roles A and B in the normal gaming state (non-internal/internal) is 1345/65536, respectively, and It is set lower than the winning probability (2000/65536). For this reason, if the left reel is operated in an operation mode in which the stop operation timing is in the white 7 area, the probability of winning the specific small winning combinations A and B, which can reliably obtain 15 medals, does not increase excessively.

In addition, the winning probability of composite minor role 1 in which all the main minor roles and specific minor roles A and B are won in the special gaming state (RB) is 2001/65536, and in the normal gaming state (non-internal, medium, Higher than the winning probability (2000/65536) for each of the main and minor roles in the internal medium (internal medium), and higher than the winning probability (1345/65536) for each of the specific minor roles A and B in the normal gaming state (non-internal medium and internal medium) It is set.

In addition, the probability (50690/65536) of winning either the main or minor role or specific minor role A or B in the normal gaming state (non-internal/internal) is higher than the probability of winning the main or minor role in the special gaming state (RB). The winning probability (2001/65536) of , and the winning probability of specific small winning combinations A and B (2001/65536) in the special gaming state (RB) are set lower. In other words, the probability of winning each of the main and minor roles and specific minor roles A and B in the normal gaming state (non-internal/internal) is the probability that the main and minor roles and specific minor roles A and B will be won in the special gaming state (RB). Although it is set lower than the probability of winning any of the main and minor prizes, specific minor prizes A and B in the normal gaming state (non-internal medium/internal medium), the probability of winning the main and minor prizes in the special gaming state (RB) The probability of winning the winning combination and specific small winning combinations A and B is set low.

In addition, if there is only one type of specific small role, the probability of winning the specific small role in the normal gaming state (non-internal medium/inside medium) is high, and even more so in the special gaming state (RB). If the winning probability of the main and minor prizes is set high, the winning probability of the specific minor prizes and the major and minor prizes in the special gaming state (RB) will become relatively high, but in this example, in the normal gaming state (RB) In a configuration in which the winning probability of a specific minor role and main minor role in the special gaming state (RB) is set higher than the winning probability of a specific minor role in the non-internal medium and internal medium), multiple types of specific minor roles (in this implementation In the example, 2 types), the individual winning probability of specific small winning combinations A and B in the normal gaming state (non-internal medium/internal medium) decreases, so the specific small winning combination A in the special gaming state (RB) decreases accordingly. , B, and the winning probability of the main and minor roles can be lowered.

[About the gaming section]
The main control unit 41 can control the game period to be either a normal period or an advantageous period.

The normal section is a game section in which navigation notification is not performed, and is started by starting the next game after the advantageous section ends. Thereafter, the normal section ends in a game in which an advantageous section transfer combination is won in an internal lottery in a game controlled to a gaming state other than the special gaming state. In the normal section, the section display LED 19 is always controlled to be off.

The advantageous section is a game section in which navigation notification may be performed, and is a game section that is advantageous for the player compared to the normal section because the navigation notification can be performed. The advantageous section is determined to be transferred to the advantageous section by winning an advantageous section transfer combination in an internal lottery in a game that is controlled to a gaming state other than the special gaming state in the normal section game, and will start from the next game. be done. Thereafter, the process ends when the end conditions for the advantageous section (end conditions 1 to 3, which will be described later) are satisfied. The main control unit 41 can make it possible to recognize that the vehicle is in an advantageous section by lighting the section display LED 19 at the start of the advantageous section. Thereafter, the main control unit 41 turns off the section display LED 19 when the advantageous section ends, and ends the section display.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 lights up the section display LED 19 at the start of the game when the advantageous section starts, thereby starting to notify that the advantageous section is being controlled. After the start of the section, at the start of the game where the medal payout rate (number of payouts/number of bets) can exceed 100% due to the first navigation notification, the section is controlled to be an advantageous section by lighting up the section display LED 19. It may also be configured to start notifying the user of the situation.

When a navigation target combination is won in an internal lottery in an advantageous section, the main control unit 41 controls navigation notification (controls displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, and transmits a navigation command that can specify the navigation number). It is possible to notify the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are advantageous to the player by performing control such as controlling the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the advantageous section is a game section that is more advantageous to the player than the normal section. becomes.

The main control unit 41 also controls, in the advantageous section, a normal state in which navigation notification is not performed, a CZ (chance zone) state in which navigation notification is not performed but the probability of transition to the AT state increases, and an AT state in which navigation notification is performed. It is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous section states with different degrees of advantage for the player, including the following.

The end conditions for the advantageous section include termination condition 1, which is satisfied when the number of games in the advantageous section (number of games in the advantageous section) reaches a first specified number (1500 games in this example) determined as the upper limit number of games. , an end that is established when the net increase in the number of medals after the increase or decrease in the number of medals changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number (2400 in this example) determined as the upper limit number. Condition 2 includes termination condition 3, which is satisfied when a predetermined arbitrary condition (in this example, the AT state termination condition is satisfied), and at least one of termination conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied. The advantageous section is ended when the following is established.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game period is controlled to be the normal period, the game period is shifted to the advantageous period by winning a predetermined advantageous period shift combination, but if the game period is controlled to be the normal period. When the control is in the normal section, by winning the lottery target hand for advantageous section transfer in the internal lottery, a lottery for transfer to advantageous section will be performed, and by winning in the lottery for transfer to advantageous section, the game section will be changed to the advantageous section. It may also be configured to move to .

[About main processing]
The control details of the main processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be explained based on FIG. 9. Note that the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game. One period of the main processing corresponds to one unit of the game.

As shown in FIG. 9, the main control unit 41 first performs a game start waiting process (Sa1), and performs a process from the end of the control of the previous game to the start of the next game. In the game start waiting process, the number of bets is set according to the insertion of medals, etc., and when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the specified number of bets set, the next game is started. Perform the process to start.

Next, when the game starts, an internal lottery process (Sa2) is performed to determine whether or not to allow the occurrence of a prize (internal lottery). In the internal lottery process, winnings are allowed to occur based on preset values (1 to 6) in the slot machine 1 and random numerical values for the internal lottery acquired at the same time as the start of the game by detection of the start switch 7. An internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not to do so (that is, whether or not to allow the derivation of display results). Then, the winning number (general winning combination) corresponding to the won winning combination is stored in the winning number setting area of the RAM 41c so that the winning result in the internal lottery can be specified. Further, when a special prize is won, the winning number (special prize) corresponding to the won special prize is stored in the winning number setting area of the RAM 41c.

Next, a flag generation process for advantageous section transition (Sa3) that converts the winning number (general role) into a flag for transition to an advantageous zone, and a lottery flag generation process (Sa4) that converts the winning number (general role) into a flag for lottery. conduct. In the advantageous section shift flag generation process, the advantageous section shift flag conversion table is used to obtain the value of the advantageous section shift flag corresponding to the winning number (general winning combination), and the value is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, in the lottery flag generation process, the values of lottery flags 1 to 3 corresponding to the winning numbers (general winning combination) are obtained using the lottery flag conversion table and stored in predetermined areas of the RAM 41c.

Next, a game start ball payout control process (Sa5) is performed to perform a process related to the game section and a process related to navigation notification at the timing when the game is started. In the processing related to the game section, if the advantageous section transfer combination is won in the normal section, the processing is performed to move to the advantageous section.The processing related to navigation notification includes the processing for setting the navigation number and the management of the advantageous section status. Perform related processing. In the process of setting the navigation number, if the winning combination is the target of the navigation notification and the navigation notification is to be performed, the navigation number of "1" to "13" is set in the RAM 41c according to the operation mode to be notified. area, and if a winning combination that is subject to navigation notification is won and navigation notification is not performed, or if a winning combination that is not subject to navigation notification is won, "0" is set in the navigation number setting area of RAM 41c. .

Next, interrupts are set to be prohibited (Sa6), and operation signal setting processing is performed (Sa7). In the operation signal setting process, a process is performed to transmit an operation signal that can specify a recommended stop operation mode to the test device.

Next, after the operation signal setting process, interrupt permission is set (Sa8), and a game start command transmission process (Sa9) is performed, so that it is possible to specify that one game has started, and the start point of one game can be specified. A control state command group including a plurality of commands that can specify various control states in the command queue is set in a command queue and sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

Next, after the game start command transmission process, a freeze process (Sa10) is performed to control a freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time. In the freeze processing, when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to control to the freeze state, and if it is determined that it has been decided to control to the freeze state In this case, the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, when performing a reel effect in which the reels are varied in the frozen state, a process is performed in which the reels are varied in a variation manner according to the type of reel effect.

Next, after the freeze process is completed, interrupts are set to be prohibited (Sa11), and a game start time setting process (Sa12) is performed to set a predetermined start time of rotation of the reels. In the game start time setting process, a process for starting the rotation of the reels in conjunction with the start of the game is performed, and the reels are started to rotate at a constant speed.

Next, after the game start setting processing, interrupts are set to permission (Sa13), and an external output signal at the start of rotation is sent from a predetermined output port to external equipment such as a call lamp, hall computer, or test equipment. At the start of rotation, external signal processing (Sa14) is performed to output a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used.

Next, after the external signal processing at the start of rotation, reel stop processing (Sa15) is performed to control the reel stop. In the reel stop process, when performing navigation notification, the operation mode is notified by displaying the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area on the game auxiliary display 12. Furthermore, when all the reels that are rotating are rotating at a constant speed, the reception of an operation to stop the reels that are currently rotating is enabled, and the system waits until the player performs an operation to stop the reels. Then, when a valid stop operation is detected for a reel for which a stop operation is enabled, reel stop control is performed to stop the reel for which a valid stop operation has been performed. Such reel stop control is repeatedly performed on the rotating reels to stop the rotation of all the reels, thereby completing the reel stop process.

Next, after the reel stop process, a winning search process (Sa16) is performed. In the winning search process, a winning symbol combination is searched based on the symbol combinations stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a winning flag indicating the presence or absence of a winning and the number of medals to be paid out in conjunction with the winning are stored in the RAM 41c. Set in a predetermined area.

Next, interrupts are set to be prohibited (Sa17), and gaming machine information calculation processing (Sa18) is performed to calculate the gaming history used when calculating the gaming machine information displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

Next, after the gaming machine information calculation processing, interrupt permission is set (Sa19), and special gaming state end check processing (Sa20) is performed. In the special game state end check process, it is determined whether the end condition is satisfied when the special game state is controlled. Next, a gaming state setting process (Sa21) is performed. In the game state setting process, the game state of the next game is set based on the winning data set by the winning search process and the result of the special game state end check process.

Next, at the timing when the game ends, a game end ball payout control process (Sa22) is performed to perform a process related to an advantageous section and a process related to navigation notification. In the process related to the advantageous section, it is determined whether the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process of setting the advantageous section end flag is performed, and the navigation notification is performed. The processing related to the management of advantageous section conditions is performed.

Next, a game end command transmission process (Sa23) is performed to set a control state command group including a plurality of commands that can specify various control states at the end of one game in a command queue, and send the command to the sub-control unit 91. are sent sequentially.

Next, after the game end command transmission process, a payout process that awards the number of medals corresponding to the winnings generated as a result of the game based on the payout number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the winning search process (Sa16). (Sa24). In the payout process, a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player according to the winnings that occur, and the number of medals to be given is added to the credits, and the credits are set to the upper limit (in this implementation). In the example, when the number reaches 50), the medals not added to the credits are paid out from the medal payout port 9.

Next, after the payout process, an external output signal (such as a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals awarded) at the end of the game is output from a predetermined output port to external equipment such as a call lamp, hall computer, and testing device. External signal processing (Sa25) is performed at the end of the game.

Next, a game end setting process is performed (Sa26). In the game end setting process, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the replaying combination has stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and if the symbol combination of the replaying combination has stopped, it will be restarted in the next game. Processing for setting the number of bets for playing a game, processing for setting a replaying flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, processing for controlling the replaying LED 20 to an ON state (lit state), etc. are performed.

Next, advantageous section end processing is performed (Sa27). In the advantageous section end processing, it is determined whether an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is to be ended is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and if it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set, An advantageous section data initialization process is performed to initialize an advantageous section related area in which data related to control of an advantageous section is stored in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and to terminate the advantageous section. In the advantageous section data initialization process, the advantageous section flag indicating that the section is in an advantageous section and the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area are initialized, and a message is sent to an external device such as a test device to indicate that the section is in an advantageous section. The signal buffer is turned off during the advantageous period for outputting the signal.

Next, after the advantageous section end process, the advantageous section signal control process (Sa28) is performed. In the advantageous section signal control process, when the advantageous section flag is set in the RAM 41c, control is performed to turn on the advantageous section signal buffer in the RAM 41c.

Next, after the advantageous section signal control process, advantageous section notification end processing (Sa29) is performed. In the advantageous section notification end process, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section signal buffer in the RAM 41c is OFF, and when it is determined that the advantageous section signal buffer is OFF, the section display LED 19 is controlled to be turned off.

Next, after the advantageous section notification end process, a game end initialization setting process (Sa30) is performed. In the initialization setting process at the end of the game, the area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the game is set in the initialization process Sa32. At times other than when the special game state ends, the size of the area initialized at the end of every game is set, and at the end of the special game state, the size of the area initialized at the end of the special game state is set.

Next, interrupts are set to be disabled (Sa31), and initialization processing (Sa32) is performed. In the initialization process, by initializing an area of the size set in the game end initialization setting process from the initialization end address of the game RAM area allocated to the RAM 41c, even when the special game state is not ended, For example, an area that is initialized at the end of each game is initialized, and if it is at the end of a special game state, an area that is initialized at the end of the special game state is initialized. After the initialization process, interrupts are set to be enabled (Sa33), and the process returns to Sa1.

Thereafter, the processes Sa1 to Sa33 are repeated. When the main process completes one cycle, the process related to the control of one unit of game ends, and the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game.

[About initialization of gaming RAM area]
Next, initialization of the game RAM area will be explained based on FIG. 10.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the RAM 41c has a gaming RAM area used as work for a gaming program related to the progress of the game stored in the ROM 41b, ranging from F000(H) (hexadecimal) to F1BB(H). The memory contents are allocated to a continuous area throughout the slot machine 1, so that even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the stored contents are retained for a predetermined period of time by the backup power supply.

The gaming RAM area includes a total initialization target area, a target area at the start of setting, a target area at the end of advantageous section, a target area at the end of setting, a target area at the end of special gaming state, and a target area at the end of each game. The target area at the end of every game includes a target area at the end of every game (usually 1), a target area at the end of every game (AT related), and a target area at the end of every game (usually 2). These areas, from F000(H) to F1BB(H), include the entire initialization target area, the target area at the start of the setting, the target area at the end of the advantageous section, the target area at the end of the setting, the target area at the end of the special gaming state, and the target area at the end of the special gaming state. They are assigned in the following order: target area at the end of the game (usually 1), target area at the end of every game (AT-related), and target area at the end of every game (usually 2).

The entire initialization target area is an area in which data such as setting values that are not initialized except when a RAM abnormality occurs is stored. The setting start target area is an area in which data that needs to be initialized at the start of a setting change state, such as input buffers for various switches and sensors, and output buffers for LEDs, etc., is stored. The target area at the end of an advantageous section is data that needs to be initialized at the end of an advantageous section among information related to an advantageous section (for example, an advantageous section flag, an advantageous section signal buffer, data indicating an advantageous section state, etc.) This is the area where is stored. The target area at the end of setting is an area in which data that needs to be initialized at the end of the setting change state, such as the credit counter, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and data related to reel rotation control, is stored. The special gaming state end target area is an area in which data that needs to be initialized when the special gaming state ends, such as a gaming state flag indicating the gaming state and information related to the special gaming state, is stored. The target area at the end of each game is an area where data that needs to be initialized every game is stored, such as internal lottery results (winning numbers (general role)), lottery flag, number of medals inserted, number of medals paid out, etc. It is. Among the target areas at the end of each game, the target area at the end of each game (AT-related) in particular stores data that needs to be initialized every game (for example, navigation number, etc.) among information related to advantageous sections. It is an area.

In addition, below, the target area for all initialization is area A, the target area at the start of setting is area B, the target area at the end of advantageous section is area C, the target area at the end of setting is area D, and the target area at the end of special gaming state is area. The E area, the target area at the end of every game (usually 1) is sometimes called the F area, the target area at the end of every game (AT related) is sometimes called the G area, and the target area at the end of every game (usually 2) is sometimes called the H area.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the main control unit 41 determines that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c at the time of starting the slot machine 1, etc., the main control unit 41 sets the entire initialization address (F000(H)) The areas (A to H areas) from (see (a)) to the initialization end address (F1BB(H)) (see FIG. 10(a)) are initialized all at once and set to 0.

Furthermore, before shifting to the setting change state, the main control unit 41 controls the area (B to H areas) from the setting start address (see FIG. 10(a)) to the initialization end address (F1BB(H)). All at once and set to 0.

Furthermore, at the end of the setting change state, the main control unit 41 collectively updates the area (D to H area) from the setting end address (see FIG. 10(a)) to the initialization end address (F1BB(H)). Initialize it and set it to 0.

Furthermore, at the end of the special gaming state, the main control unit 41 controls the area (E to H areas) from the address at the end of the special gaming state (see FIG. 10(a)) to the initialization end address (F1BB(H)). Initialize them all at once and set them to 0.

Furthermore, at the end of the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 controls the area (D area) from the advantageous section end address 1 (see FIG. 10A) to the setting end address and the advantageous section end address 2 (see FIG. 10A). The areas (G area) from (see (a)) to address 2 at the end of every game (see FIG. 10(a)) are each initialized and set to 0.

Furthermore, at the end of each game, the main control unit 41 controls the area (F to G area) from the address 1 at the end of each game (see FIG. 10(a)) to the initialization end address (see FIG. 10(a)). Initialize them all at once and set them to 0.

[About operation signal setting processing]
Next, the control contents of the operation signal setting process performed by the main control unit 41 in the main process will be explained based on FIGS. 11 to 19. In this description, numerical values ending in (H) are expressed in hexadecimal notation, and other numerical values are expressed in decimal notation unless otherwise specified.

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, in the operation signal setting process, first, all registers are saved to the stack (Sb1), then serial communication circuit settings are performed (Sb2), and the serial communication circuit 41d is activated.

Next, the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 41d is initialized (Sb3), and the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c is obtained and set in the A register (Sb4). Then, it is determined whether or not the navigation number set in the A register is 0 (Sb5), and if the navigation number is not 0, that is, if the navigation number is 1 or more and navigation notification is performed, Sb14 Proceed to. When proceeding from Sb5 to Sb14 (when navigation notification is performed), the navigation number set in the A register becomes the symbol stop pattern number for specifying the recommended operation mode.

In addition, if it is determined that the navigation number is 0 in Sb5, that is, if the navigation notification is not performed, the winning number (general winning number) set in the winning number setting area of RAM 41c is obtained, and (Sb6).

After calculating the logical sum of the values in the A register, 0 is set in the A register (Sb7, Sb8). When the winning number (general combination) set in the A register is 1 or more, that is, when any of the general combinations has been won, the calculation result of Sb7 is 1, so the zero flag is turned OFF. On the other hand, when the winning number (general combination) set in the A register is 0, that is, when no general combination has been won, the calculation result of Sb7 is 0, so the zero flag is turned ON. In Sb9, as a result of the calculation in Sb7, it is determined whether the zero flag is ON or not, and if the zero flag is OFF, that is, if one of the general winning combinations is won in the internal lottery and the navigation notification is not performed. , proceed to Sb14. When proceeding from Sb9 to Sb14, that is, when any general winning combination is won and navigation notification is not performed, 0 set in the A register becomes the symbol stop pattern number.

In addition, if it is determined that the zero flag is ON in Sb9, that is, if no general winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the symbol stop pattern setting table provided in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b (see FIG. 14) Set the starting address (XX59(H)) as a pointer in the HL register (Sb10), obtain the winning number (special winning number) set in the winning number setting area of RAM41c, and write the winning number (special winning number) in the A register. ) is set (Sb11). The symbol stop pattern setting table is a table in which symbol stop pattern numbers corresponding to winning numbers (special combinations) are set, and are set in descending order of winning numbers (special combinations) for each byte from the top address (XX59 (H)). Symbol stop pattern numbers (0, 14, 15 in this embodiment) are set in (0 to 2 in this embodiment).

Then, the value set in the A register is added to the value (pointer) of the HL register to update the pointer (Sb12), and the symbol stop pattern number stored in the area of the address indicated by the updated pointer is obtained. and sets it in the A register (Sb13), and proceeds to Sb14.

At Sb14, the start address (XX5C(H)) of the stop order data table (see FIG. 15) provided in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b is set in the HL register as a pointer. The stop order data table is a table in which stop order data indicating the recommended stop order of each reel with respect to the symbol stop pattern number is set. The stop order data corresponding to is stored in descending order of symbol stop pattern numbers (from 0 to 15 in this embodiment). The stop order data is 3 bytes of data, the 1st byte is the reel number corresponding to the 1st stop reel, the 2nd byte is the reel number corresponding to the 2nd stop reel, and the 3rd byte is the reel number corresponding to the 3rd stop reel. The reel number to be played is stored. The reel number is a number indicating each reel, and in this embodiment, 1 corresponds to the left reel, 2 corresponds to the middle reel, and 3 corresponds to the right reel.

In Sb15 to Sb17, the value tripled of the symbol stop pattern number set in the A register is calculated. This is because the pointer needs to be updated 3 bytes at a time when specifying the stop order data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number. Thereafter, the value of the AF register (the triple value of the symbol stop pattern number stored in the A register) is saved to the stack (Sb18).

Next, the value tripled of the symbol stop pattern number stored in the A register is added to the HL register to update the pointer (Sb19). Then, the start address (YY00 (H)) of the stop order data storage area (see Figure 18) of the operation signal storage area allocated to the RAM 41c is set as a pointer in the DE register (Sb20), and the number of times of processing for 3 reels is set. 3 is set in the BC register (Sb21). The stop order data storage area is an area in which the reel number of the first stop reel, the reel number of the second stop reel, and the reel number of the third stop reel are stored for each byte from the start address (YY00(H)). YY00(H) to YY02(H)).

In Sb22, the stop order is determined based on a pointer indicating the address of the stop order data table set in the HL register, a pointer indicating the address of the stop order data storage area set in the DE register, and the number of processing times set in the BC register. Obtain the reel numbers corresponding to the first stop reel, second stop reel, and third stop reel from the data table, and store the reel numbers corresponding to the first stop reel, second stop reel, and third stop reel in the stop order data storage area. Performs processing to store the reel number. Specifically, first, the reel number stored at the address in the stop order data table indicated by the pointer set in the HL register is stored in the address area of the stop order data storage area indicated by the pointer set in the DE register. Next, add 1 to the DE register to update the stop order data storage area pointer to the address corresponding to the next reel, and add 1 to the HL register to update the stop order data table pointer to the address corresponding to the next reel. Update to. Then, the number of processing times is subtracted by 1 from the BC register. This is regarded as one set, and by repeating this until the number of processing times in the BC register becomes 0, and executing a total of three sets, the reel number corresponding to the first stop reel is changed to YY00 ( H), and in the second set of processing, the reel number corresponding to the second stop reel is stored in YY01 (H) of the stop order data storage area, and in the third set of processing, the reel number corresponding to the third stop reel is stored in YY01 (H) of the stop order data storage area. The number is stored in YY02(H) of the stop order data storage area.

After Sb22, by restoring the value of the AF register that had been saved to the stack, a value three times the symbol stop pattern number is set in the A register (Sb23), and then the stop execution symbol provided in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b is The start address (XX8C(H)) of the number table (see FIG. 16) is set as a pointer in the HL register (Sb24). The stop execution symbol number table is a table in which stop execution symbol number data indicating the stop execution positions of the first to third stop reels corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number is stored, and the start address (XX8C(H)) For every 3 bytes, the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number is stored in descending order of the symbol stop pattern number (from 0 to 15 in this embodiment). The stop execution symbol number data is 3-byte data, the first byte is the stop execution symbol number corresponding to the first stop reel, the second byte is the stop execution symbol number corresponding to the second stop reel, and the third byte is the stop execution symbol number. A stop execution symbol number corresponding to the third stop reel is stored. The stop execution symbol number is a symbol number that includes the stop execution position on each reel, and in this embodiment, one of 2, 12, and FF (H) is assigned. Incidentally, FF (H) is a stop execution symbol number indicating that the stop execution position is not specified and may be operated at any position.

Then, the value tripled of the symbol stop pattern number stored in the A register is added to the HL register to update the pointer (Sb25). After that, the start address (YY03 (H)) of the stop execution symbol number storage area (see Figure 18) among the operation signal storage areas allocated to the RAM 41c is set as a pointer in the DE register (Sb26), and processing for 3 reels is performed. 3 is set in the BC register as the number of times (Sb27). The stop execution symbol number storage area stores the stop execution symbol number of the first stop reel, the stop execution symbol number of the second stop reel, and the stop execution symbol of the third stop reel for each byte from the start address (YY03 (H)). This is an area (YY03(H) to YY05(H)) where numbers are stored.

In Sb28, based on the pointer indicating the address of the stop execution symbol number table set in the HL register, the pointer indicating the address of the stop execution symbol number storage area set in the DE register, and the number of processing times set in the BC register, The stop execution symbol numbers corresponding to the first stop reel, second stop reel, and third stop reel are acquired from the stop execution symbol number table, and the first stop reel, second stop reel, and third stop reel are stored in the stop execution symbol number storage area. A process is performed to store the stop execution symbol numbers corresponding to each of the three stop reels. In detail, first, the stop execution symbol number stored in the address of the stop execution symbol number table indicated by the pointer set in the HL register is transferred to the area of the address of the stop execution symbol number storage area indicated by the pointer set in the DE register. Store in. Next, add 1 to the DE register to update the pointer of the stop execution symbol number storage area to the address corresponding to the next reel, and add 1 to the HL register to update the pointer of the stop execution symbol number table to correspond to the next reel. Update the address to the one you want. Then, the number of processing times is subtracted by 1 from the BC register. This is regarded as one set, and by repeating until the number of processing times in the BC register becomes 0, and executing a total of three sets, the stop execution symbol number corresponding to the first stop reel is transferred to the stop execution symbol number storage area in the first set of processing. In the second set of processing, the stop execution symbol number corresponding to the second stop reel is stored in YY04 (H) of the stop execution symbol number storage area, and in the third set of processing, the third The stop execution symbol number corresponding to the stop reel is stored in YY05 (H) of the stop execution symbol number storage area.

Furthermore, when the process of Sb28 is completed, the start address (YY06(H)) of the stop execution position data storage area (see FIG. 18) among the operation signal storage areas allocated to the RAM 41c is set in the DE register. The state will be as follows. This is because the stop execution symbol number storage area and the stop execution position data storage area are arranged consecutively in the operation signal storage area, and by adding 1 to the DE register in the third set of processing, the stop execution position data is This is because the address is updated to the first address (YY06(H)) of the storage area. The stop execution position data storage area stores the stop execution position data of the first stop reel, the stop execution position data of the second stop reel, and the stop execution position of the third stop reel every 2 bytes from the start address (YY06 (H)). This is an area (YY06(H) to YY0B(H)) where data is stored. The stop execution position data is 2-byte data obtained by converting the position indicated by the stop execution symbol number into the number of steps from the reel reference position.

Next, set the start address (YY03 (H)) of the stop execution symbol number storage area (see Figure 18) in the operation signal storage area as a pointer in the HL register (Sb29), and set it in the B register as the number of processing times for 3 reels. 3 is set (Sb30).

After saving the number of processing times of the BC register to the stack in Sb31, the stop execution symbol number stored in the address of the stop execution symbol number storage area indicated by the pointer set in the HL register is set in the B register (Sb32), Add 1 to the stop execution symbol number stored in the B register to set the number of additions (Sb33). In Sb33, when the stop execution symbol number stored in the B register is FF (H), an overflow occurs by adding 1 to the B register, and the value becomes 0. Next, in Sb33, as a result of adding 1 to the B register, it is determined whether the operation result is 0 or not, and if it is not 0, that is, if the stop execution symbol number is other than FF (H), proceed to Sb36. . In addition, when the value of the B register is 0, that is, when the stop execution symbol number is FF (H), 1 is added to the reference symbol number (20 in this example), which is the total number of symbols on one reel. The value (21 in this embodiment) is set in the B register as the number of additions (Sb35), and the process proceeds to Sb36.

Next, the address set in the HL register as a pointer to the stop execution symbol number storage area is saved to the stack (Sb36), and the address set in the DE register as a pointer to the stop execution position data storage area is saved to the stack (Sb37). ).

Then, 0 is set in the DE register (Sb38), and the start address (XXBC(H)) of the stop execution position data table (see FIG. 17) provided in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b is set as a pointer in the HL register (Sb39). ). The stop execution position data table is a table for calculating the stop execution position data, and the addition value corresponding to the number of additions (1 to 21 in this example) is added every 2 bytes from the start address (XXBC(H)). (5, 15, 16, 17, 700 in this embodiment) are stored.

In Sb40 to Sb44, stop execution position data is calculated based on the address of the stop execution position data table indicated by the pointer set in the HL register, the value of the DE register, and the number of additions of the B register. Specifically, first, an addition value is specified from the address of the stop execution position data table indicated by the pointer set in the HL register, and added to the DE register (Sb40). Next, 2 is added to the HL register and the pointer of the stop execution position data table is updated to the address where the next added value is stored (Sb41, Sb42). Then, the number of additions in the B register is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether the operation result is 0 (Sb43, Sb44). In Sb44, if the number of additions in the B register is not 0, the addition value corresponding to the number of additions is added to the DE register by repeatedly executing Sb40 to Sb44 until the number of additions in the B register becomes 0. When the number of additions in the B register becomes 0, the value in the DE register becomes the stop execution position data.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17, when the stop execution symbol number is 2, the number of additions is 3, and the addition value 5 corresponding to the first time is added to the DE register, and the addition value 5 corresponding to the second time is added to the DE register. The value 15 is added to the DE register, and the added value 17 corresponding to the third time is added to the DE register, so the stop execution position data becomes 37. Further, when the stop execution symbol number is 12, the number of additions is 13, and by sequentially adding the addition values corresponding to the 1st to 13th times to the DE register, the stop execution position data becomes 205. In addition, when the stop execution symbol number is FF (H), the number of additions is 21, and by sequentially adding the addition values corresponding to the 1st to 21st times to the DE register, the stop execution position data is 1023. As with the stop execution symbol number, it becomes FF (H) indicating that it can be operated at any position. After Sb40 to Sb44, the value of the HL register and the value of the DE register are exchanged, and the stop execution position data stored in the DE register is moved to the HL register (Sb45). Then, the pointer of the stop execution position data storage area that was saved in the stack is returned to the DE register (Sb46), and the stop actual position data of the HL register is transferred to the stop execution position data storage area indicated by the pointer set in the DE register. (Sb47).

Next, 2 is added to the DE register to update the pointer of the stop execution position data storage area to the address corresponding to the next reel (Sb48, Sb49). Then, the pointer of the stop execution symbol number storage area that was saved in the stack is returned to the HL register (Sb50), and the number of processing times that was saved in the stack is returned to the BC register (Sb51).

Next, 1 is added to the HL register and the pointer of the stop execution symbol number storage area is updated to the address corresponding to the next reel (Sb52). Then, 1 is subtracted from the number of processing times in the B register (Sb53), and it is determined whether the operation result is 0 or not (Sb54). If it is not 0, the process returns to Sb31 and the value of the B register becomes 0. In other words, the processes of Sb31 to Sb54 are repeatedly executed until the process of storing stop execution position data for three reels is completed.

As a result, in the processing of Sb31 to Sb54 of the first round, the stop execution position data corresponding to the first stop reel is calculated, and the area corresponding to the first stop reel in the stop execution position data storage area (YY06 (H) to YY07 (H)), and in the processing of Sb31 to Sb54 of the second round, the stop execution position data corresponding to the second stop reel is calculated, and the stop execution position data corresponding to the second stop reel is stored in the stop execution position data storage area. (YY08(H) to YY09(H)), and in the processing of Sb31 to Sb54 of the third round, the stop execution position data corresponding to the third stop reel is calculated, and the stop execution position data corresponding to the third stop reel is stored in the third stop execution position data storage area. It is stored in the area (YY0A(H) to YY0B(H)) corresponding to the stop reel.

Then, when the process of storing the stop execution position data for three reels is completed and it is determined in Sb54 that the value of the B register is 0, 00 (H) indicating the start of outputting the operation signal is transmitted via serial communication. After transferring to the transmission register of the circuit 41d (Sb55), the reel numbers of the first stop reel, second stop reel, and third stop reel are acquired from the stop order data storage area, and the reel number of the first stop reel (D1) is obtained. , the reel number of the second stop reel (D2), and the reel number of the third stop reel (D3) in this order to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 41d (Sb56 to Sb58).

Next, the stop execution position data of the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel are acquired from the stop execution position data storage area, and the stop execution position data (D4) of the first stop reel and the stop execution position data of the second stop reel are acquired. The stop execution position data (D5) and the stop execution position data (D6) of the third stop reel are transferred to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 41d in this order (Sb59 to Sb61).

Finally, after transferring 00 (H) indicating the end of outputting the operation signal to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 41d (Sb62), the register saved to the stack in Sb1 is restored (Sb63), and the process returns to the main processing.

As explained in FIGS. 11 to 13, in the operation signal setting process, it is determined whether or not navigation notification is performed based on whether the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area in the game is 0, and is 1 or more, that is, when navigation notification is performed, the navigation number is set as the symbol stop pattern number. On the other hand, when the navigation number is 0, that is, when the navigation notification is not performed, the symbol stop pattern number is set according to the winning number (general role) and the winning number (special role), ie, the result of the internal lottery.

Then, a process of specifying stop order data indicating the stop order corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number, and stop execution symbol number data indicating the stop execution symbols of the first to third stop reels corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number are performed. By performing this separately from the identifying process, the recommended stop order and stop execution symbol numbers of the first to third stop reels are specified according to the navigation number or internal lottery result, and the stop execution symbol number data is Processing is performed to convert the stop execution symbol numbers of the first to third stop reels specified from the above into stop execution position data indicating the number of steps from the reel reference position corresponding to the position indicated by the stop execution symbol number.

Then, based on the navigation number, the stop order data specified according to the internal lottery result, and the stop execution symbol number (stop execution position data), 00 (H) indicating the start of the operation signal, the first stop reel (D1) , second stop reel (D2), third stop reel (D3), first stop reel stop execution position data (D4), second stop reel stop execution position data (D5), third stop reel stop execution By transferring the position data (D6) and 00 (H) indicating the end of the operation signal to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 41d in the order of ), it is possible to output operation signals to the test device in the order of 00 (H), D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, 00 (H), and the test device side can output operation signals in the relevant game. The recommended stopping order and timing of stopping operations can be specified.

In this way, in the operation signal setting process, the symbol stop pattern number is set according to the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area or the result of the internal lottery, and the stop order indicating the stop order corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number is set. The process of specifying the data and the process of specifying the stop execution symbol number data indicating the stop execution symbols of the first to third stop reels corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number are performed separately, and the recommended stop order and Since an operation signal that can specify the stop execution symbol number of the 1st stop reel to the 3rd stop reel is created, both the stop order data and the stop execution symbol number data can be specified in one process using the symbol stop pattern number. Compared to , it is easier to manage the stop order data and stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number, and there are configurations in which only the stop order is notified, configurations in which only the stop execution position is notified, and the stop order and stop execution position. Regardless of the configuration in which both are notified, it is easy to use a program that creates an operation signal.

Specifically, when specifying both the corresponding stop order data and stop execution symbol number data in one process using the symbol stop pattern number, the stop order data and stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number are specified. Since it is necessary to integrally manage large-sized data that is a combination of data, the management becomes complicated. In contrast, there is a process of specifying stop order data indicating the stop order corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number, and a stop execution symbol indicating the stop execution symbol of the first to third stop reels corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number. By performing the process of specifying the number data separately, it becomes possible to separately manage the stop order data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number and the stop execution symbol number data, making the management easier. Become.

In addition, a common program is used to create the operation signal in any of the configurations in which only the stop order is notified, only the stop execution position is notified, and both the stop order and the stop execution position are notified. In this case, it is necessary to specify and set the stop order data and the stop execution symbol number data from the combined data of the stop order data and the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number. By managing the stop order data corresponding to the number and the stop execution symbol number data separately, it is possible to easily specify the stop order data and the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number. Therefore, in any of the configurations in which only the stop order is notified, only the stop execution position is notified, or both the stop order and the stop execution position are notified, a common program that creates the operation signal can be used. becomes easier.

[About setting the pattern stop pattern number]
Next, the process of setting the symbol stop pattern number will be explained. The symbol stop pattern number is a numerical value for specifying a recommended operation mode in the operation signal setting process.

When the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c is 1 or more, that is, when navigation notification is performed, the main control unit 41 sets the navigation number as the symbol stop pattern number. The navigation number is a continuous value from 1 to 13 assigned to each operation mode notified by the navigation notification.

Further, when the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c is 0, that is, when navigation notification is not performed, the main control unit 41 sets a symbol stop pattern number according to the result of the internal lottery. . At this time, if the winning number (general combination) is 1 or more, that is, if any of the general combinations has been won, 0 is set as the symbol stop pattern number. On the other hand, if the winning number (general role) is 0, that is, if no general role has been won, the symbol stop pattern number is specified according to the winning number (special role) using the symbol stop pattern table. , set the specified symbol stop pattern number. As shown in FIG. 14, in the symbol stop pattern setting table, the symbol stop pattern numbers corresponding to the winning numbers (special combinations) are set. (Special role): 14 is set corresponding to 1, and winning number (special role): 15 is set corresponding to 2. Therefore, when the winning number (special role) is 0, that is, when no special role has been won, 0 is set as the symbol stop pattern number, and when the winning number (special role) is 1, i.e. If BB1 is won, 14 is set as the symbol stop pattern number, and if the winning number (special role) is 2, that is, if BB2 is won, 15 is set as the symbol stop pattern number. be done.

As a result, one of the consecutive values from 0 to 15 will be set as the symbol stop pattern number depending on the presence or absence of navigation notification and the result of the internal lottery.

[About the process of identifying stop order data]
Next, a process for specifying stop order data will be described.

The main control unit 41 performs a process of specifying stop order data from the stop order data table based on the symbol stop pattern number. As shown in FIG. 15, stop order data corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers is set in the stop order data table. The stop order data includes a reel number corresponding to the first stop reel, a reel number corresponding to the second stop reel, and a reel number corresponding to the third stop reel. Regarding the reel numbers, 1 corresponds to the left reel, 2 corresponds to the middle reel, and 3 corresponds to the right reel.

In the stop order data table, stop order data corresponding to each symbol stop pattern number is stored in consecutive address areas, and the main control unit 41 uses the symbol stop pattern number to determine the address in the stop order data table. By moving the pointer indicating the pointer, the stop order data stored at the address indicated by the pointer can be specified as the stop order data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number.

In the stop order data table, as shown in FIG. 15, the first stop reel: 1 (left) and the second stop reel: 2 (middle) correspond to symbol stop pattern numbers 0, 1, 7, 13 to 15. , 3rd stop reel: 3 (right) is set, and corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers 2 and 8, 1st stop reel: 1 (left), 2nd stop reel: 3 (right), and 3rd stop reel: 2 (middle) is set, and corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers 3 and 9, 1st stop reel: 2 (middle), 2nd stop reel: 1 (left), and 3rd stop reel: 3 (right) are set. The first stop reel: 2 (middle), the second stop reel: 3 (right), and the third stop reel: 1 (left) are set corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers 4 and 10, and the symbol stop pattern numbers 1st stop reel: 3 (right), 2nd stop reel: 1 (left), and 3rd stop reel: 2 (middle) are set corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers 6 and 12. When the first stop reel: 3 (right), the second stop reel: 2 (middle), and the third stop reel: 1 (left) are set, and symbol stop pattern numbers 1 to 13 are set, In other words, when navigation notification is performed, stop order data indicating the stop order to be notified by navigation notification is specified, and if symbol stop pattern number 0 is set, that is, navigation notification is not performed and the general winning combination is If you have won, if neither the general role nor the special role has been won, if the symbol stop pattern number 14 is set, that is, the navigation notification is not performed, the general role has not been won, and BB1 has been won. In this case, if symbol stop pattern number 15 is set, that is, if the navigation notification is not performed and the general winning combination is not won and BB2 is won, the first stop reel: 1 (left), Stop order data indicating 2 stop reel: 2 (middle) and 3rd stop reel: 3 (right) is specified.

In addition, in the stop order data table, when common stop order data corresponds to multiple types of symbol stop pattern numbers, such as stop order data corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers 0, 1, 7, 13 to 15, However, the stop order data is stored separately for each symbol stop pattern number, and by simply moving the pointer of the stop order data table according to the symbol stop pattern number, the stop order data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number can be changed. It becomes possible to specify the stop order data. In addition, it is also easy to change the stop order data corresponding to some symbol stop pattern numbers among the multiple types of symbol stop pattern numbers to which the common stop order data corresponds to stop order data indicating other stop orders. .

[About the process of identifying the stop execution symbol number data]
Next, the process of specifying the stop execution symbol number data will be explained.

The main control unit 41 performs a process of specifying stop execution symbol number data from the stop execution symbol number table based on the symbol stop pattern number. As shown in FIG. 16, stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number is set in the stop execution symbol number table. The stop execution symbol number data consists of a stop execution symbol number corresponding to the first stop reel, a stop execution symbol number corresponding to the second stop reel, and a stop execution symbol number corresponding to the third stop reel. The stop execution symbol number is a value of 0 to 19 corresponding to the symbol number, or a value of FF (H) indicating that the operation may be performed at any position.

In the stop execution symbol number table, stop execution symbol number data corresponding to each symbol stop pattern number is stored in consecutive address areas, and the main control unit 41 uses the symbol stop pattern number to determine the stop execution symbol number. By moving the pointer indicating the address in the table, the stop execution symbol number data stored at the address indicated by the pointer can be specified as the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number.

In the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. 16, the first stop reel: 12, the second stop reel: 12, and the third stop reel: 12 are set corresponding to the symbol stop pattern numbers 0, 14, and 15. The first stop reel: 12, the second stop reel: FF (H), and the third stop reel: FF (H) are set corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers 1 to 6, and symbol stop pattern numbers 7 to 13 are set. 1st stop reel: 2, 2nd stop reel: FF (H), 3rd stop reel: FF (H) are set correspondingly, and when symbol stop pattern numbers 1 to 6 are set, That is, when the navigation notification is performed and the red 7 area is notified as the operation timing of the first stop reel by the navigation notification, the 12th symbol included in the red 7 area is used as the stop execution symbol number of the first stop reel. If the stop execution symbol number data indicating FF (H) is specified as the stop execution symbol number of 12, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, and symbol stop pattern numbers 7 to 13 are set, that is, navigation notification is carried out, and when the white 7 area is notified by the navigation notification as the operation timing of the first stop reel, 2, which indicates the second symbol included in the white 7 area as the stop execution symbol number of the first stop reel, If the stop execution symbol number data indicating FF (H) is specified as the stop execution symbol number of the second stop reel and the third stop reel and the symbol stop pattern number 0 is set, that is, the navigation notification is not performed, and If the general role is won, or neither the general role nor the special role is won, or symbol stop pattern number 14 is set, in other words, navigation notification is not performed, the general role is not won, and BB1 is won. If the symbol stop pattern number 15 is set, that is, if the navigation notification is not performed and the general winning combination is not won and BB2 is won, the first stop reel, the second stop reel Stop execution symbol number data indicating 12 indicating the 12th symbol is specified as the stop execution symbol number for both the reels and the third stop reel.

In the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. 16, stop execution symbol number data corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers 0, 14, and 15, stop execution symbol number data corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers 1 to 6, and symbol stop Even if common stop execution symbol number data corresponds to multiple types of symbol stop pattern numbers, such as the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to pattern numbers 7 to 13, the stop execution is performed separately for each symbol stop pattern number. The symbol number data is stored, and the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number can be specified by simply moving the pointer of the stop execution symbol number table according to the symbol stop pattern number. becomes possible. In addition, the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to some symbol stop pattern numbers among the multiple types of symbol stop pattern numbers to which the common stop execution symbol number data corresponds to the stop execution symbol number data indicating other stop execution symbols. It is also easy to change.

In addition, in the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. 16, stop execution symbol number data corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers 1 to 6, stop execution symbol number data corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers 7 to 13, etc. , stop execution symbol number data for which the stop execution symbol number is a common operation mode for all reels from the first stop reel to the third stop reel are stored in consecutive address areas, and the stop execution symbol number data is stored in consecutive address areas. For all reels up to the 3rd stop reel, the stop execution symbol number can be specified in a range where the stop execution symbol number data is a common operation mode, so at the program creation stage, the stop execution pattern number corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number can be specified. Management of executed symbol number data becomes easy.

In this example, if red left middle bell A and red left middle bell B are won among the navigation small winnings, the order of stop operations of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel, and the stop operation timing of the left reel are red. When the operation is performed in an operation mode with 7 areas, a main/minor combination with a payout of 15 pieces is won. Then, when Red Left Center Bell A and Red Left Center Bell B are won and a navigation notification is performed, 1 will be set as the navigation number, and 1, which is the same as the navigation number, will be set as the symbol stop pattern number. In the stop order data table, as shown in FIG. 15, the stop order data corresponding to symbol stop pattern number: 1 is: 1st stop reel: 1 (left), 2nd stop reel: 2 (middle) , the third stop reel: 3 (right) is set, and in the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. 16, the first stop reel is set as the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number: 1. :12, 2nd stop reel: FF (H), 3rd stop reel: FF (H) are set, and the stop order data and stop execution symbol number data that can win the main and minor roles are specified. It has become so.

On the other hand, if any of the navigation minor roles including red left center bell A and red left center bell B is won and the navigation notification is not performed, 0 is set as the navigation number, 0 is set as the symbol stop pattern number, Either 14 or 15 is set, and in the stop order data table, as shown in FIG. 1st stop reel: 1 (left), 2nd stop reel: 2 (middle), and 3rd stop reel: 3 (right) are set, and in the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. The stop execution symbol number data corresponding to pattern numbers: 0, 14, and 15 are set to 1st stop reel: 12, 2nd stop reel: 12, and 3rd stop reel: 12. If a minor role is won and the navigation notification is not performed, the stop order data for winning the main minor role when Red Left Center Bell A and Red Left Center Bell B are won is specified, and Red Left Center Bell A, Red Regarding the left reel (first stop reel) where it is necessary to perform a stop operation in the red 7 area in order to win the main and minor roles when left center bell B is won, stop execution where symbol number 12 included in the red 7 area is specified. The symbol number data is specified.

Therefore, even if one of the navigation small winning combinations is won and the navigation notification is not performed, if the red left middle bell A and the red left middle bell B are won, the test equipment will receive a signal from the operation signal. It becomes possible to specify an advantageous operation mode.

In this embodiment, if any of the navigation minor winning combinations is won and navigation notification is not performed, 0 is set as the navigation number, and one of 0, 14, and 15 is set as the symbol stop pattern number. In the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. 12 indicating the same symbol number is set as the stop execution symbol number of the reels and the third stop reel, and if any of the navigation small winning combinations is won and the navigation notification is not performed, the first stop reel, Stop execution symbol number data is specified in which the same symbol number is specified as the stop execution symbol number of the second stop reel and the third stop reel.

In this way, if any of the navigation small winning combinations is won and the navigation notification is not performed, the stop execution symbol number specified from the operation signal will be the same for all reels, so at the program creation stage, the navigation notification It becomes easy to manage the stop execution symbol number when the stop execution symbol number is not performed.

In this example, if a navigation minor prize is won in which the stop operation timing of the corresponding first stop reel is in the red 7 area, and a navigation notification is performed, the first stop reel is stopped at the timing of the red 7 area. In this case, it is possible to win a main/minor combination with a payout of 15 pieces, which is more advantageous for the player than when the first stop reel is stopped at the timing of the white 7 area. In addition, if a navigation small winning combination in which the stop operation timing of the corresponding first stop reel is in the red 7 area is won and a navigation notification is performed, 1 to 6 will be set as the navigation number, and the navigation number will be set as the symbol stop pattern number. The same numbers 1 to 6 as the number are set, and in the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. 16, the first stop in the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers 1 to 6 As the reel stop execution symbol number, among the symbols included in the red 7 area (left reel: symbol numbers 6 to 15, middle reel: symbol numbers 7 to 16, right reel: symbol numbers 6 to 15), the white 7 area and A symbol number 12 is set for a symbol that is one or more symbols away from the boundary.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a navigation small winning combination is won in which the stop operation timing of the corresponding first stop reel is the white 7 area, and a navigation notification is performed, the first stop reel is moved at the timing of the white 7 area. When the player performs the stop operation, he can win a main/minor combination with a payout of 15 pieces, which is more advantageous for the player than when the first stop reel is stopped at the timing of the red 7 area. In addition, if a navigation small winning combination in which the stop operation timing of the corresponding first stop reel is the white 7 area is won and a navigation notification is performed, 7 to 12 will be set as the navigation number, and the navigation number will be set as the symbol stop pattern number. The same numbers as the numbers 7 to 12 are set, and in the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. 16, the first stop in the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers 7 to 12 is set. The symbols included in the white 7 area are used as the reel stop execution symbol numbers (left reel: symbol numbers 0 to 5, 16 to 19, middle reel: symbol numbers 0 to 6, 17 to 19, right reel: symbol numbers 0 to 5). , 16 to 19), symbol number 2 is set for a symbol that is one or more symbols away from the boundary with the red 7 area.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the specific minor role A or specific minor role B is won and a navigation notification is performed, if the left reel is stopped at the timing of the white 7 area, 15 pieces will be paid out. Since it is possible to win the specific small winning combination A or the specific small winning combination B, it is more advantageous for the player than when the left reel is stopped at the timing of the red 7 area. In addition, when specific small winning combination A or specific small winning combination B is won and a navigation notification is performed, 13 is set as the navigation number, and 13, which is the same as the navigation number, is set as the symbol stop pattern number. In the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. 16, in the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to symbol stop pattern number: 13, the stop execution symbol number of the first stop reel (left reel) is set in the white 7 area. Among the included symbols (left reel: symbol numbers 0 to 5, 16 to 19), symbol number 2 is set for a symbol that is one or more symbols away from the boundary with the red 7 area.

In addition, in this embodiment, if BB1 or BB2 wins alone and the winning BB1 or BB2 wins a prize, it will be controlled to a special gaming state, and during that time, the lottery related to AT will not be held. Therefore, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when both BB1 and BB2 are outside the retraction range, it is more advantageous for the player than when the stop operation is performed at the timing when BB1 or BB2 is within the retraction range. In addition, if specific minor role A or specific minor role B is won and the navigation notification is not performed, it is possible to receive a lottery related to AT by not allowing specific minor role A or specific minor role B to win. Therefore, if the left reel is stopped at the timing of the red 7 area where neither the specific small winning combination A nor the specific small winning combination B wins, it is more advantageous for the player than when the left reel is stopped at the timing of the white 7 area. Become. For this reason, in a situation where the navigation notification is not performed and the internal lottery result cannot be determined, for the left reel, the timing of symbol numbers 5 to 17 where the red 7 area and BB1 and BB2 are outside the pull-in range, and for the middle reel, the timing of symbol numbers 5 to 17 is , by performing a stop operation at the timing of symbol numbers 9 to 13 when both BB1 and BB2 are out of the retraction range, and for the right reel, at the timing of symbol numbers 6 to 13 when both BB1 and BB2 are out of the retraction range, other timings can be performed. This is more advantageous for the player than if the player performs the stop operation. In addition, when navigation notification is not performed, 0 is set as the navigation number, and either 0, 14, or 15 is set as the symbol stop pattern number, and in the stop execution symbol number table, As shown in FIG. 16, in the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to symbol stop pattern numbers: 0, 14, and 15, as the stop execution symbol number of the first stop reel (left reel), the red 7 area and BB1 and BB2 are also drawn. Among the symbols that are out of range (symbol numbers 5 to 17), symbol number 12 of the symbol that is one symbol or more away from the boundary of the red 7 area, BB1 or BB2 retraction range is set, and the second stop reel (middle reel) ) is set as the symbol number 12 of the symbol that is one or more symbols away from the boundary with the retraction range of BB1 or BB2 among the symbols (symbol numbers 9 to 13) in which both BB1 and BB2 are outside the retraction range. Then, as the stop execution symbol number on the second stop reel (middle reel), among the symbols (symbol numbers 6 to 13) in which neither BB1 nor BB2 are outside the pull-in range, one or more symbols from the boundary with the pull-in range of BB1 or BB2 A symbol number 12 of a distant symbol is set.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a player performs a stop operation within a predetermined range, the reels are more advantageous to the player than when a stop operation is performed outside the predetermined range. The stop execution symbol number data in which the symbol number of a symbol that is one or more symbols away from the boundary is set as the stop execution position symbol is specified, and the boundary between the stop execution symbols within the predetermined range and outside the predetermined range is specified. Since an operation signal that can specify the timing of a stop execution symbol that is one symbol or more away from the symbol is output, the test device detects the operation signal and requests the slot machine 1 to perform a stop operation upon detection of the operation signal. Even if the output of the operation signal is delayed, the operation signal can be output at a timing within a predetermined range.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the navigation notification is not performed, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when both BB1 and BB2 are outside the pull-in range, the game will be more difficult to play than when the stop operation is performed at the timing when BB1 or BB2 is within the pull-in range. If the left reel is stopped at the timing of the red 7 area where neither specific small winning combination A nor specific small winning combination B wins, it is more advantageous for the player than when the left reel is stopped at the timing of the white 7 area. This is an advantageous configuration, but for example, it is equipped with a small winning combination that can be won by performing a stop operation on a specific reel within a specific range, and by performing a stop operation on a specific reel within a specific range. The configuration may be such that it is more advantageous for the player than if the stop operation is performed outside a specific range for a specific reel. The stop execution symbol data in which the stop execution symbol is set may be specified. In addition, in such a configuration, the stop execution symbol number data in which the symbol number of a symbol that is one or more symbols away from the boundary with the outside of the specific range for a specific reel is set as the stop execution symbol is specified. By doing this, an operation signal that can specify the timing of a stop execution symbol that is one or more symbols away from the boundary with the outside of the specific range among the stop execution symbols within a specific range is output. Even if the output of the operation signal requesting the slot machine 1 to stop the slot machine 1 due to the detection of the operation signal or the detection of the operation signal is delayed, the operation signal can be output at a timing within a specific range.

In this example, in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop reel, if the navigation small winning combination in which the stop operation timing of the first stop reel is in the red 7 area is won and the navigation notification is performed, the left reel If you stop the left reel at the timing of the red 7 area, you can win a main/minor combination with a payout of 15 pieces, which is more advantageous for the player than if you stop the left reel at the timing of the white 7 area. , In a situation where the navigation notification is not performed and the result of the internal lottery cannot be determined, the left reel can be stopped at the timing of symbol numbers 5 to 17, when the red 7 area and both BB1 and BB2 are out of the pull-in range. , it is more advantageous for the player than when the stop operation is performed at other timings, and in both situations, there is a range in which the operation timings that are advantageous on the left reel overlap. In such a case, the common symbol number 12 in the range where the operation timing that is advantageous in any situation overlaps is specified as the stop execution symbol number, and the types of stop execution symbol numbers are increased. This makes it easier to manage the stop execution symbol numbers.

In this embodiment, if BB1 or BB2 wins and the winning BB1 or BB2 wins, it will be controlled to a special gaming state and during that time, the lottery related to AT will not be held, so BB1 If the stop operation is performed at a timing when both BB1 and BB2 are outside the retraction range, it is more advantageous for the player than when the stop operation is performed at a timing when BB1 or BB2 are within the retraction range. In addition, in this example, after BB1 or BB2 is carried over, BB1 or BB2 will not win a prize, but after BB1 or BB2 is carried over, if neither of the general prizes wins, etc., BB1 or BB2 will be In a game where BB1 or BB2 can win after BB1 or BB2 is carried over, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when both BB1 and BB2 are outside the pull-in range, the pull-in range of BB1 or BB2 This is more advantageous for the player than if the player performs the stop operation at the timing when . In this embodiment, when BB1 is won and the navigation notification is not performed, 14 is set as the symbol stop pattern number, and when BB2 is won and the navigation notification is not performed, 14 is set as the symbol stop pattern number. , 15 is set as the symbol stop pattern number, and in the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. Both BB1 and BB2 have stop execution symbol number data set with a stop execution symbol number indicating a symbol number that is outside the pull-in range, and if BB1 or BB2 is won and the navigation notification is not performed, As the stop execution symbol numbers of the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, stop execution symbol number data is specified in which a symbol number in which both BB1 and BB2 are outside the pull-in range is specified.

On the other hand, if neither BB1 nor BB2 is won and the navigation notification is not performed, 0 is set as the symbol stop pattern number, and in the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. Corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number: 0, the same symbol number as the symbol stop pattern numbers: 14 and 15 is set for all reels, that is, the stop execution symbol number indicating the symbol number where both BB1 and BB2 are outside the pull-in range is set. If the stop execution symbol number data is set and neither BB1 nor BB2 is won and the navigation notification is not performed, either the stop operation was performed at a timing when both BB1 and BB2 were outside the pull-in range, or BB1 or BB2 The advantage for the player does not change depending on whether the player performs the stop operation at a timing that is within the pull-in range, but the first stop reel, the second stop reel, etc. As the stop execution symbol number of the stop reel and the third stop reel, the stop execution symbol number data is specified which specifies the symbol number where both BB1 and BB2 are outside the pull-in range.

In this way, even if BB1 or BB2 is won and the navigation notification is not performed, even if neither BB1 nor BB2 is won and the navigation notification is not performed, both BB1 and BB2 will be drawn for all reels. The same stop execution symbol number data set with a stop execution symbol number that indicates a symbol number that is outside the range is specified, and the stop execution symbol number data that has a different stop execution symbol number depending on whether BB1 or BB2 is won. Since there is no need to prepare, it becomes easy to manage the stop execution symbol number data at the program creation stage.

In addition, in this example, even if BB1 or BB2 is won and the navigation notification is not performed, or if neither BB1 nor BB2 is won and the navigation notification is not performed, the same is true for both reels. The stop execution symbol number data in which the stop execution symbol number indicating the symbol number is set will be specified, but in the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. 16, BB1 or BB2 is won, Pattern stop pattern numbers set when navigation notification is not performed: Stop execution pattern number data corresponding to 14 and 15, and pattern stop that is set when neither BB1 nor BB2 is won and navigation notification is not performed. Since the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to pattern number 0 is stored separately, there are two cases in which the special role is won and the navigation notification is not performed, and the case where the special role is not won and the navigation notification is not performed. The program that specifies the stop execution symbol number data can be shared with another model that outputs an operation signal that specifies a different stop execution symbol number for any reel.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple types of special winnings consisting of BB1 and BB2, and for each reel, an area where the area outside the pull-in range of BB1 and the area outside the pull-in range of BB2 overlap. include. In the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. 16, BB1 is won and the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number: 14, which is set when the navigation notification is not performed, is also , even in the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to symbol stop pattern number: 15, which is set when BB2 is won and navigation notification is not performed, the area is outside the pull-in range of BB1 for any reel. The same stop execution symbol number included in the overlapping area with the area outside the pull-in range of BB2 is specified, and if BB1 or BB2 is won and the navigation notification is not performed. In addition, regardless of the type of special winning combination, the same stop execution symbol number will be specified as the operating signal, so even if there are multiple types of special winnings, there is no need to create an operating signal. It becomes easy to manage the stop execution symbol number.

In addition, in this example, even if BB1 is won and the navigation notification is not performed, even if BB2 is won and the navigation notification is not performed, the same symbol number will be used for both reels. The stop execution symbol number data in which the stop execution symbol number indicating the stop execution symbol number is set will be specified, but in the stop execution symbol number table, as shown in FIG. 16, BB1 is won and the navigation notification is performed. The stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number: 14 that is set when there is no symbol stop pattern number: 15 that is set when BB1 is won and the navigation notification is not performed. Since the executed symbol number data and are stored separately, there are two cases: BB1 has been won and the navigation notification is not made, or BB2 has been won and the navigation notification has not been made. A program for specifying stop execution symbol number data can be shared with another model that outputs an operation signal that specifies a different stop execution symbol number for the reels.

[About conversion to stop execution position data]
Next, conversion from stop execution symbol number data to stop execution position data will be explained.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, a stepping motor that rotates once at a cycle of 336 steps (0 to 335) is used as the reel motor that drives each reel. That is, by driving the reel motor 336 steps, the reel makes one revolution. Then, 20 areas (pieces) are defined that are divided into 16 or 17 steps (the number of steps that one symbol moves) for one reel rotation, and the symbols of each reel are arranged in each of these areas. Therefore, it is possible to specify the symbol number by the number of steps from the reel reference position (0 step), or to specify the number of steps from the reel reference position (0 step) from the symbol number. It is possible to specify the reel position by the number of steps from the reference position (0 step) or by the symbol number.

In addition, the main control unit 41 uses the stop execution position data table to determine the position indicated by the stop execution symbol number of each reel specified from the stop execution symbol number data, using the stop execution position data table indicating the number of steps from the reel reference position. Performs processing to convert to . As shown in FIG. 17, the stop execution position data table stores addition values corresponding to the number of additions (1 to 21 in this embodiment). The additional value corresponding to one addition is 5, the additional value corresponding to two additions is 15, the additional value corresponding to 3 to 20 additions is 16 or 17, and the additional value corresponding to 21 additions. is 700.

Then, the main control unit 41 calculates the stop execution position data of the stop execution symbol number by sequentially adding the addition value corresponding to the number of additions over the number of additions of the stop execution symbol number + 1 time.

As shown in FIG. 17, when the stop execution symbol number is 0, the number of additions is 1, and the additional value 5 corresponding to the first time is added, so the area of the stop execution symbol number 0 (reel reference position 5 included in steps 0 to 16) is calculated as the stop execution position data. In addition, when the stop execution symbol number is 1, the number of additions is 2, and the additional value 5 corresponding to the first time is added, and the additional value 15 corresponding to the second time is added, so the stop execution symbol number 20 included in the region 1 (17 to 32 steps from the reel reference position) is calculated as stop execution position data. In addition, when the stop execution symbol number is 2, the number of additions is 3 times, the addition value 5 corresponding to the first time is added, the addition value 15 corresponding to the second time is added, and the addition value corresponding to the third time is added. Since the value 17 is added, 37 included in the area of stop execution symbol number 2 (33 to 49 steps from the reel reference position) is calculated as stop execution position data. Thereafter, when the stop execution symbol number is 3 to 19, the number of additions will be 4 to 20 times, and the 16 steps or 17 steps for the area of 1 symbol will be added sequentially as the addition value corresponding to the 4th to 20th times. Therefore, the number of steps included in the area of the stop execution symbol number is calculated as the stop execution position data. In addition, when the stop execution symbol number is FF (H), the number of additions is the standard number of symbols (20) + 1 time (21 times in this example), and 700 is added at the 21st time, resulting in 1023, Like the stop execution symbol number, it is FF (H) indicating that it can be operated at any position.

Then, the main control unit 41 converts the position indicated by the stop execution symbol number of each reel specified from the stop execution symbol number data into stop execution position data indicating the number of steps from the reel reference position, and determines the stop execution position. It is designed to be output to the test equipment as an operation signal indicating the

In this way, in this embodiment, since the stop execution position data that can specify the number of steps from the reel reference position as the stop execution position is output as an operation signal, the test device side can detect the difference between models with different numbers of symbols on one reel. Even when specifying the stop execution position, it is possible to specify the stop execution position using a common program.

In addition, when creating stop execution position data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number, instead of directly specifying the number of steps from the reel reference position and creating the stop execution position data, first correspond to the symbol stop pattern number. Specify the stop execution symbol number data indicating the stop execution symbol number of each reel to be executed, and convert the stop execution position indicated by the stop execution symbol number of each reel into the number of steps from the reel reference position in the specified stop execution symbol number data. By doing this, stop execution position data is created, and since the stop execution position can be grasped from the stop execution symbol number of each symbol at the program creation stage, it becomes easy to manage the stop execution position.

In addition, the stop execution position data converted from the stop execution position pattern is not the number of steps that is the boundary of the stop execution position pattern, but the number of steps 4 to 6 steps ahead from the boundary of the stop execution position pattern, so the test equipment Even if the output timing of the operation signal that requests the slot machine 1 to perform a stop operation is slightly shifted due to the detection of the operation signal or the detection of the operation signal on the side, the operation signal will be reliably output at the timing when the stop execution position symbol passes. It becomes possible to output.

In addition, the number of steps from the reel reference position corresponding to the stop execution symbol number is calculated by adding the addition value corresponding to the number of additions until the number of additions corresponds to the stop execution symbol number. The data is specified, and the amount of data required is smaller than when storing stop execution position data for each stop execution symbol number.

In addition, even if the stop execution symbol numbers are different, the stop execution position data corresponding to the stop execution symbol numbers are calculated by a common program, so there is no need to prepare different stop execution position data for each stop execution symbol number, Even if the execution symbol number is changed, it can be handled with the same program.

[About reel stop processing]
Next, the control details of the reel stop processing performed by the main control unit 41 in the main processing will be explained based on FIG. 20.

In the reel stop processing, first, a stop control table setting process is executed (Sc1), and a stop control table that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing at which a stop operation is performed is set in the RAM 41c for all reels. As a result, the stop control table for each reel is set during the acceleration control of each reel by the timer interrupt process.

After executing the stop control table setting process, a timer interrupt wait process is executed (Sc2). In the timer interrupt wait process, timer interrupts are set to be enabled and the process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed once.

After the timer interrupt wait process is completed, a rotation abnormality determination process is executed to determine whether or not a reel rotation abnormality has occurred (Sc3). In the rotation abnormality determination process, a reel step number counter is updated in the timer interrupt process and counts the number of steps from the reel reference position (for each reel, it counts the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time of the timer interrupt). It is a counter and is updated by timer interrupt processing.In this example, it can count from 0 to 400 steps, and is set to a value larger than the 336 steps required for the reels to make one revolution.) Based on the value and whether or not a rotation abnormality flag is set in the process, it is determined whether or not a rotation-related abnormality has occurred with respect to the reel under rotation control. Among the reels whose rotation is being controlled for which the stop operation has not been completed, the reels that have started rotating without the reel reference position being detected or the number of reel steps since the previous reel reference position was detected have exceeded the predetermined number of steps. In some cases, when the reel reference position is detected by the reel sensor and the value of the reel step number counter does not reach the number of steps required for the reel to complete one rotation, an abnormality in reel rotation (hereinafter referred to as rotation) may occur. If it is determined that an error (referred to as an error) has occurred, and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, a rotation abnormality flag that can identify the reel in which the abnormality has occurred is set in the RAM 41c.

After the rotation abnormality determination process is completed, it is determined whether or not an abnormal rotation of the reel has been detected (Sc4), and if it is determined that an abnormal rotation has been detected, the reel stop operation during rotation control is disabled. settings (Sc5) and executes error handling (Sc6). In the error processing, the rotation of all reels under rotation control is stopped, and a rotation error flag is set in the error flag setting area provided in the RAM 41c so that the reel whose rotation has been stopped due to the error processing can be identified. At the same time, the game is put into an error state that disables the game from progressing, and the game is put on standby. Thereafter, when the error state is canceled by a reset operation, the error processing is terminated, and reel acceleration processing is executed for the reel whose rotation was being controlled when the error processing was executed (Sc7). By once clearing the excitation pattern of the reel motor and setting a new pattern for starting the reel to excite the reel motor, rotation control is performed again from the beginning and the rotation is accelerated again to constant speed.

If it is determined that no rotational abnormality is detected in step Sc4, interrupts are set to prohibited (Sc8), and the reel speed status flag updated by timer interrupt processing and set in a predetermined area of RAM 41c is acquired. (Sc9), based on the reel speed state flag, it is determined for each reel whether or not the rotation state of the reel under rotation control is a constant speed state, and all reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed. It is determined whether or not it is being rotated (Sc10). In step Sc10, if it is determined that at least one reel is not rotating at a constant speed and all the reels under rotation control are not rotating at a constant speed, Sc2 Returning to step 2, steps Sc2 to Sc10 are repeatedly executed until all reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed. The reel speed status flag is updated in the timer interrupt process, and it is possible to identify whether each reel motor under rotation control is rotating at a constant speed at the time the timer interrupt process is performed. It is information.

On the other hand, in step Sc10, if it is determined that all reels under rotation control that have not been subjected to a stop operation are being rotated at a constant speed, a stop operation is accepted for all reels under rotation control. of the valid LED output buffers in the RAM 41c, the stop valid LED output buffers corresponding to all the reels whose rotation is being controlled are set to a lit state (Sc11). By setting the output buffer of the stop valid LED to the lighting state, the process of lighting the stop valid LED is performed by the subsequent timer interrupt process.

After enabling reception of the stop operation in step Sc11, the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c is acquired (Sc12), and it is determined whether the acquired navigation number is 0 or not. (Sc13), and if the navigation number is 0, proceed to Sc15, and if the navigation number is not 0, that is, if the navigation number is 1 or more, the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. The data is converted into display data and set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 in the RAM 41c (Sc14), and the process proceeds to Sc15. By setting the display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the subsequent timer interrupt process causes the game auxiliary display 12 to display display content based on the display data.

In Sc15, it is determined whether a valid stop operation has been detected for the reel whose rotation is being controlled. In Sc15, when the port input data of the stop switch is in the same state in the continuous timer interrupt processing a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, twice), it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the current and previous input data are stored. Referring to the history of confirmed data indicating that they are in the same state, it is determined that among the stop switches under rotation control, the confirmed data has changed from off to on, and the output buffer of the stop valid LED is in the lit state. , it is determined that a valid stop operation has been detected for a stop switch that satisfies both conditions.

If it is determined in Sc15 that no valid stop operation has been detected, the process returns to step Sc2, repeats steps Sc2 to Sc15, and waits until a valid stop operation is detected.

On the other hand, if a valid stop operation is detected in Sc15, the stop operation-related process 1 is executed in the interrupt-prohibited state set in step Sc8 (Sc16), and then interrupts are set to be enabled ( Sc17), and the stop operation related process 2 is executed (Sc18). In the stop operation related processing 1, processing is performed such as setting the output buffer of the stop valid LED corresponding to the stop switch on which the stop operation has been performed to an off state. Thereafter, the stop valid LED is turned off by timer interrupt processing.

After finishing the stop operation related process 2 in Sc18, a reel rotation stop process is executed (Sc19), and settings are made to stop the reel corresponding to the valid stop operation detected in step Sc15. After that, it is determined whether there is an unstopped reel that has not been stopped (Sc20), and if it is determined that there is an unstopped reel, the process returns to step Sc2 and the remaining unstopped reels are checked. Control of steps Sc2 to Sc20 is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in Sc20 that there is no unstopped reel, that is, if the reel rotation stop processing based on the stop operation of the third stop reel has been completed, it is determined whether display data corresponding to the navigation number is set or not. Regardless, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized (Sc21). If the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, it will be hidden after the timer interrupt process is performed.

After initializing the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12 in Sc21, a timer interrupt wait process is performed (Sc22), and it is determined whether all reels have stopped (Sc23), and it is determined that all reels have stopped. In this case, it is further determined whether or not the stop switch of the third stop reel is being operated, and in Sc23 it is determined that all the reels have stopped, and in Sc24 it is determined that the stop switch of the third stop reel is not being operated. The processing from Sc22 to Sc24 is repeated until all the reels stop and the operation of the stop switch of the third stop reel is released, thereby ending the reel stop processing and returning to the main processing.

In this way, in the reel stop process, it is determined whether all the reels under rotation control are being rotated at a constant speed, and if it is determined that all the reels under rotation control are being rotated at a constant speed The reel is designed to repeat the process of determining whether a stop operation is detected or not, and when the stop operation is performed while all reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed, the reels stop. This can be guaranteed.

In addition, it is determined whether all the reels under rotation control are being rotated at a constant speed, and when it is determined that all reels under rotation control are being rotated at a constant speed, the information is set in the RAM 41c. If the acquired navigation number is 1 or more, the process of setting display data for displaying the navigation number in the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12 is repeatedly executed. . As a result, if a navigation number of 1 or more is set, it is determined that all reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed, and the display data for displaying the navigation number is The navigation number is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Furthermore, even after the display data for displaying the navigation number is set in the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12, every time it is determined that all the reels under rotation control are being rotated at a constant speed, The display data for displaying the navigation number is repeatedly set in the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12, and after that, the stop operation of all reels is completed and the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12 is set. The navigation number is continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 until it is initialized. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the navigation notification is reliably performed in a state in which all the reels under rotation control are being rotated at a constant speed, that is, in a state in which the stop operation is effective.

In addition, during the reel stop process, if the power supply is stopped while the navigation number is displayed, and then the power supply is restarted and the state before the power supply was stopped, the output of the gaming auxiliary display 12 The buffer is initialized and the game auxiliary display 12 is hidden, but after that, the reels start to rotate again and it is determined that all the reels under rotation control are being rotated at a constant speed. , Display data for displaying the navigation number again is set in the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12, and the navigation number is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12, so that when the power supply is restored, the gaming Even if the auxiliary display is hidden, the navigation notification can be restarted when all the reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed, that is, when the stop operation is valid.

[About gaming machine information calculation processing]
Next, the control contents of gaming machine information calculation processing performed by the main control unit 41 in the main processing will be explained based on FIGS. 21 to 26.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the gaming machine information calculation process, first, the values of all registers are saved to the stack (Sd1). After each state count process (Sd2) is executed, the value of the register saved in Sd1 is restored (Sd3), and then the gaming machine information calculation process is ended and the process returns to the main process.

[About each state count process]
Next, the control contents of each state count process performed by the main control unit 41 in the gaming machine information calculation process will be explained based on FIG. 22.

In each state counting process, first, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached an upper limit (Se1). The total number of games is the total number of games since the time of shipment from the factory or after the data in the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason, and is stored in a 3-byte storage area, and can be counted up to a maximum of 1,677,7215 games. In addition, the total cumulative number of coins paid out is the cumulative number of coins paid out at the time of shipment from the factory or after the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason, and is stored in a 3-byte storage area, and can be counted up to a maximum of 16777215 coins. be. Then, in Se1, if a total cumulative count stop flag, which will be described later, is set in the RAM 41c, it is determined that the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached the upper limit.

If it is determined in Se1 that the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Se21. If it is determined in Se1 that the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has not reached the upper limit, 1 is set as an additional value in the DE register (Se2), and the area where the total cumulative number of games is stored is set in the RAM 41c. The start address of is set in the HL register (Se3), and 3-byte data addition/storage processing is performed in which the addition value set in the DE register is added to the 3-byte numerical value stored in the address set in the HL register (Se4). ), update the total cumulative number of games.

Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit and an overflow has occurred (Se5). In the 3-byte data addition/storage process, if the result after addition overflows, the carry flag (described later) is set to ON, and if it does not overflow, the carry flag is set to OFF. Therefore, in Se5, the carry flag is set to OFF. It is determined whether an overflow has occurred depending on whether it is ON or not.

If no overflow has occurred in Se5, proceed to step Se7, and if an overflow has occurred, that is, if the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit, a total cumulative count stop flag is set in the RAM 41c. (Se6), proceed to step Se7.

In the steps from Se7, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games is in the range of 0 to 5999 games, 6000 to 174999 games, or 175000 games or more (Se7 to Se19). Depending on the result of the determination, a value indicating that it is within each range is set as a lighting identification segment (Se7, Se18, Se19). The set lighting identification segment is stored in the display monitor digestion game determination area allocated to the RAM 41c. Then, after sequentially executing the accessory ratio update process (Se21), the continuous accessory ratio update process (Se22), and the instruction-included accessory ratio update process (Se23), the process returns to the gaming machine information calculation process.

[About accessory ratio update process]
Next, the control contents of the accessory ratio update process performed by the main control unit 41 in each state count process will be explained based on FIG. 23.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the accessory ratio updating process, first, a determination game number counter for counting the number of games for determining the number of games is incremented by 1 (Sf1).

Next, the number of coins to be paid out in the current game set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the winning search process (Sa16) in the main process is added to the total payout counters of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 (Sf2 to Sf6).

Here, the cumulative buffer 1 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter, a 3-byte accessory payout counter, a 3-byte continuous accessory payout counter, and a 3-byte accessory payout counter including instructions. When this occurs and medals are paid out, each counter counts. When 6000 games are reached after counting starts, each counter is updated to the initial value of 0, and counting for the next game is started from the initial value.

Similar to the cumulative buffer 1, the cumulative buffer 2 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter, a 3-byte accessory payout counter, a 3-byte consecutive accessory payout counter, and a 3-byte accessory payout counter with instructions. When a winning occurs and medals are paid out, each counter counts. When 6000 games are reached after counting starts, each counter is updated to the initial value of 0, and counting for the next game is started from the initial value. However, the game at which counting starts is 2000 games behind the cumulative buffer 1.

Similar to the cumulative total buffer 1 and the cumulative total buffer 2, the cumulative total buffer 3 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter, a 3-byte accessory payout counter, a 3-byte continuous accessory payout counter, and a 3-byte accessory payout counter with instructions. When a prize is won in a game and medals are paid out, each counter counts. When 6000 games are reached after counting starts, each counter is updated to the initial value of 0, and counting for the next game is started from the initial value. However, the games that start counting are 4000 games behind cumulative buffer 1 and 2000 games behind cumulative buffer 2.

Further, the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 are stored in the RAM 41c for each of the total payout counter, the accessory payout counter, the continuous accessory payout counter, and the instruction-included accessory payout counter. Specifically, the total payout counter is stored in the consecutive address area in the order of the total payout counter of cumulative buffer 1, the total payout counter of cumulative buffer 2, and the total payout counter of cumulative buffer 3. The accessory payout counter of buffer 1, the accessory payout counter of cumulative buffer 2, and the accessory payout counter of cumulative buffer 3 are stored in consecutive address areas in this order. The object payout counter, the continuous accessory payout counter of cumulative buffer 2, and the continuous accessory payout counter of cumulative buffer 3 are stored in consecutive address areas in this order. The object payout counter, the instruction-inclusive accessory payout counter of the cumulative total buffer 2, and the instruction-included accessory payout counter of the cumulative total buffer 3 are stored in consecutive address areas in this order.

Therefore, by setting the start address of the counter to be updated among the total payout counter, accessory payout counter, continuous accessory payout counter, and instruction-included accessory payout counter in cumulative buffer 1, the cumulative total is calculated from the set address. The counter value of the buffer 1 can be specified, the counter value of the cumulative buffer 2 can be specified from the set address +3, and the counter value of the cumulative buffer 3 can be specified from the set address +6.

Returning to FIG. 23, in the process of adding the number of payouts in the current game to the total payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 (Sf2 to Sf6), first, the start address of the total payout counter of cumulative buffer 1 (for winning payout addition Address (start)) is set in the HL register (Sf2), and the number of coins to be paid out in the current game, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the winning search process (Sa16) in the main process, is set as an additional value in the B register (Sf3). ).

Next, by performing 3-byte data 1-byte addition processing that adds the addition value set in the B register to the 3-byte numerical value stored in the address set in the HL register, the total payout counter of cumulative buffer 1 is updated with the current value. Add the number of coins paid out in the game. In addition, in the 3-byte data 1-byte addition process, the address set in the HL register is updated to the value (address + 3) indicating the next counter address, and the Sf4 3-byte data 1-byte addition process Upon completion, the start address of the total payout counter of the cumulative buffer 2 is set in the HL register.

Next, 3-byte data 1-byte addition processing is performed (Sf5), and the number of coins to be paid out in the current game is added to the total payout counter in the cumulative buffer 2. Then, when the 3-byte data 1-byte addition process of Sf5 is completed, the start address of the total payout counter of the cumulative buffer 3 is set in the HL register.

Next, 3-byte data 1-byte addition processing is performed (Sf6), and the number of coins to be paid out in the current game is added to the total payout counter in the cumulative buffer 3.

After the process of adding the number of coins paid out in the current game to the total payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 (Sf2 to Sf6), it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins paid out has reached the upper limit ( Sf7). In Sf7, if the aforementioned total cumulative count stop flag is set in the RAM 41c, it is determined that the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached the upper limit.

If it is determined in Sf7 that the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached the upper limit, the process advances to step Sf13. If it is determined in Sf7 that the total number of games played or the total number of coins paid out has not reached the upper limit, the number of coins paid out in the current game is set as an additional value in the DE register (Sf8), and the total number of coins paid out in the RAM 41c is set. The start address of the area where is stored is set in the HL register (Sf9), the aforementioned 3-byte data addition and storage processing is performed (Sf10), and the number of coins to be paid out in the current game is added to the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out.

Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached the upper limit and an overflow has occurred (Sf11). In Sf11, it is determined whether an overflow has occurred based on whether the carry flag is ON. If no overflow has occurred in Sf11, the process proceeds to step Sf13, and if an overflow has occurred, that is, if the total cumulative payout number has reached the upper limit, a total cumulative count stop flag is set in the RAM 41c. (Sf12), proceed to step Sf13. Note that the total cumulative count stop flag is the same flag that is used when the total cumulative number of games reaches the upper limit value.

In Sf13, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the accessory game. In this embodiment, since only RB is included as an accessory game, it is determined whether or not the game is controlled by RB. If it is determined in Sf13 that the accessory game is not in progress, the process advances to Sf23. If it is determined in Sf13 that the accessory game is in progress, the payout in the current game set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the winning search process (Sa16) in the main process is added to the accessory payout counter in the cumulative buffers 1 to 3. Add the number of sheets (Sf14 to Sf18).

In the process of adding the number of coins paid out in the current game to the accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 (Sf14 to Sf18), the start address of the accessory payout counter of cumulative buffer 1 (address for accessory payout addition (start) ) is set in the HL register (Sf14), and the number of coins to be paid out in the current game set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the winning search process (Sa16) in the main process is set in the B register as an additional value (Sf15). Thereafter, by performing the 3-byte data 1-byte addition process three times, the number of coins to be paid out in the current game is added to the accessory payout counters in the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 (Sf16 to Sf18).

After the process of adding the number of coins paid out in the current game to the accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 (Sf14 to Sf18), it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins paid out has reached the upper limit. (Sf19). In Sf19, if the aforementioned total cumulative count stop flag is set in the RAM 41c, it is determined that the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached the upper limit.

If it is determined in Sf19 that the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached the upper limit, the process advances to step Sf23. If it is determined in Sf19 that the total number of games played or the total number of coins paid out has not reached the upper limit, the number of coins paid out in the current game is set as an addition value in the DE register (Sf20), and the total number of coins paid out in the RAM 41c is stored. Set the start address of the area where the number of coins to be paid out is stored in the HL register (Sf21), perform the 3-byte data addition and storage process described above (Sf22), and add the number of coins to be paid out in this game to the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out for accessory items. do.

Next, set the start address of the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out in the HL register (Sf23), set the leading address of the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out in the DE register (Sf24), and read the value stored at the address set in the DE register ( By performing a 3-byte data division process that calculates the percentage of the numerical value (dividend) stored in the address set in the HL register with respect to the divisor), the total cumulative win, which is the ratio of the total cumulative accessory payout number to the total cumulative payout number, is calculated. The material payout ratio is calculated (Sf25). Then, the calculated total cumulative accessory payout ratio is stored in the RAM 41c (Sf26).

Next, with reference to the game number counter for determination, it is determined whether the game in question is the updated number of games (Sf27 to Sf30). The judgment game number counter is a counter that counts cyclically between 1 and 6000 games, and is used to judge whether the number of games after starting counting has reached 2000 games, 4000 games, or 6000 games. This is the counter used. The above determination is made based on whether or not there is a remainder after dividing the determination counter by 2000. If there is a remainder, it is determined that the game is not the number of updated games and the process returns to each state counting process.

Further, when the determination counter is divided by 2000 and there is no remainder, it is determined from the quotient of the division result whether the game is an updated game of 2000 games, 4000 games, or 6000 games (Sf31). Then, among the cumulative buffers 1 to 3, the value of the total payout counter of the cumulative buffer corresponding to the specified updated game is read out and stored in the 6000 game cumulative payout number of the 6000 calculation buffer in the RAM 41c, and the total number of coins from the read source is read out. The payout counter is updated to the initial value of 0 (Sf32 to Sf34). Similarly, the value of the accessory payout counter of the cumulative buffer corresponding to the specified update game is read out and stored in the 6000 game cumulative accessory payout number of the 6000-time calculation buffer in the RAM 41c, and the readout source accessory payout counter is initialized. The value is updated to 0 (Sf35 to Sf37).

Next, set the start address (accessories payout (6000 cumulative) address) of the cumulative number of paid out coins for 6000 games in the buffer for 6000 calculations to the HL register (Sf38), By setting the start address (winning payout (6000 total) address) in the DE register (Sf39) and performing the 3-byte data division process described above, the ratio of the cumulative number of accessory payouts in 6000 games to the total number of payouts in 6000 games is determined. Calculate the accessory payout ratio (6000G) (Sf40). Then, the calculated accessory payout ratio (6000G) is stored in the RAM 41c (Sf41). Thereafter, the process returns to each state counting process.

[About the update status of each buffer]
With reference to FIG. 24, the update status of the cumulative calculation buffers 1 to 3, the 6000 times calculation buffer, and the total cumulative calculation buffer in which the total cumulative payout number and the total cumulative accessory payout number are stored will be explained with reference to FIG. 24. do. The memory contents of cumulative buffers 1 to 3, the buffer for 6000 calculations, and the buffer for total cumulative calculation are stored in the RAM 41c, so they will be retained unless initialized at the time of shipment from the factory or due to an abnormality in the data in the RAM 41c for some reason. has been done.

Counting in the cumulative total buffer 1 and the total cumulative calculation buffer starts from the state where each buffer value is initialized. After 2000 games have passed, counting in the cumulative total buffer 2 is started. Cumulative total buffer 1 continues counting. Subsequently, when 2000 games have passed, counting in the cumulative total buffer 3 is started. Cumulative total buffer 1 and cumulative total buffer 2 continue counting.

After another 2000 games have elapsed, the counting period in the cumulative buffer 1 reaches 6000 games. Here, the count contents of the cumulative total buffer 1 are stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times. Then, the count contents of the cumulative total buffer 1 are initialized and counting starts from the initial value (0).

When the next 2000 games pass, the counting period in the cumulative buffer 2 reaches 6000 games. Here, the count contents of the cumulative buffer 2 are stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times. Then, the count contents of the accumulation buffer 2 are initialized and counting starts from the initial value (0).

In this way, the counting results for the 6000 games counted in the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 are stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times for every 2000 games. During this time, the counting results of the total accumulation calculation buffer are accumulated and counted without being initialized.

[About continuous role item ratio update process]
Next, the control contents of the continuous accessory ratio update process performed by the main control unit 41 in each state count process will be explained based on FIG. 25.

In the continuous accessory ratio update process, first, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the continuous accessory game (Sg1). In this embodiment, since only RB is included as a continuous accessory game, it is determined whether or not the game is controlled by RB. If it is determined in Sg1 that the continuous accessory game is not in progress, the process advances to Sg11. If it is determined in Sg1 that a continuous accessory game is in progress, the continuous accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 are filled with the current game set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the winning search process (Sa16) in the main process. Add the number of coins paid out in (Sg2 to Sg6).

In the process (Sg2 to Sg6) of adding the number of coins paid out in the current game to the continuous accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3, the start address of the continuous accessory payout counter of cumulative buffer 1 (address for continuous accessory payout addition) (first)) is set in the HL register (Sg2), and the number of coins to be paid out in the current game, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the winning search process (Sa16) in the main process, is set as an additional value in the B register (Sg3). . Thereafter, by performing 3-byte data 1-byte addition processing three times, the number of coins to be paid out in the current game is added to the continuous accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 (Sg4 to Sg6).

After the process of adding the number of coins paid out in the current game to the continuous accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 (Sg2 to Sg6), it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins paid out has reached the upper limit. (Sg7). At Sg7, if the aforementioned total cumulative count stop flag is set in the RAM 41c, it is determined that the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached the upper limit.

If it is determined at Sg7 that the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached the upper limit, the process advances to step Sg11. If it is determined in Sg7 that the total number of games played or the total number of coins paid out has not reached the upper limit, the number of coins paid out in the current game is set as an additional value in the DE register (Sg8), and the total number of consecutive winnings is stored in the RAM 41c. Set the start address of the area where the number of paid out objects is stored in the HL register (Sg9), perform the above-mentioned 3-byte data addition and storage process (Sg10), and add the number of paid out pieces in this game to the total cumulative number of paid out consecutive role objects. Add.

Next, by setting the start address of the total cumulative number of consecutive paid out coins in the HL register (Sg11), setting the leading address of the total cumulative number of paid out coins in the DE register (Sg12), and performing the above-mentioned 3-byte data division process. , calculate the total cumulative continuous accessory payout ratio, which is the ratio of the total cumulative consecutive accessory payout number to the total cumulative payout number (Sg13). Then, the calculated total cumulative continuous accessory payout ratio is stored in the RAM 41c (Sg14).

Next, in the same way as the accessory ratio update process, it is determined whether or not the game is the updated number of games by referring to the determination game number counter (Sg15 to Sg18).

Then, if the game is the number of updated games, the value of the continuous accessory payout counter of the accumulated buffer corresponding to the specified updated game among the accumulated buffers 1 to 3 is read out, and the 6000 times calculation buffer of the RAM 41c is read out. The continuous accessory payout counter of the 6000 games is stored and the continuous accessory payout counter from which it is read is updated to the initial value of 0 (Sg19 to Sg21).

Next, set the start address (continuous accessory payout (6000 cumulative total) address) of the cumulative number of consecutive accessory payouts for 6,000 games in the 6,000-time calculation buffer to the HL register (Sg22), and calculate the cumulative payout for 6,000 games in the 6,000-time calculation buffer. By setting the start address of the number of coins (winning payout (6000 cumulative) address) in the DE register (Sg23) and performing the 3-byte data division process described above, the cumulative number of continuous accessory payouts in 6000 games against the cumulative number of payouts in 6000 games can be calculated. A continuous accessory payout ratio (6000G), which is a ratio, is calculated (Sg24). Then, the calculated continuous accessory payout ratio (6000G) is stored in the RAM 41c (Sg25). Thereafter, the process returns to each state counting process.

[About instruction-inclusive accessory ratio update process]
Next, the control contents of the instruction-included accessory ratio update process performed by the main control unit 41 in each state count process will be explained based on FIG. 26.

In the instructed accessory ratio update process, first, it is determined whether the gaming state is in RB (Sh1). If it is determined in Sh1 that RB is in progress, the process advances to Sh13. If it is determined in Sh1 that it is not in RB, the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c is acquired (Sh2), and it is determined whether the acquired navigation number is 0 (Sh3). When the navigation number is 0, that is, when navigation notification is not performed, the process advances to Sh13.

In Sh3, if the navigation number is not 0, that is, if the navigation number is 1 or more and navigation notification is performed, the winning search process (Sa16) in the main process is added to the instruction-included accessories payout counter of cumulative buffers 1 to 3. The number of coins to be paid out in the current game set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is added (Sh4 to Sh8).

In the process (Sh4 to Sh8) of adding the number of coins paid out in the current game to the instruction-inclusive accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3, the start address of the instruction-inclusive accessory payout counter of cumulative buffer 1 Addition address (start)) is set in the HL register (Sh4), and the number of coins to be paid out in the current game, which was set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the winning search process (Sa16) in the main process, is set in the B register as an addition value. (Sh5). Thereafter, by performing 3-byte data 1-byte addition processing three times, the number of coins to be paid out in the current game is added to the instruction-included accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 (Sh6 to Sh8).

After the processing (Sh4 to Sh8) of adding the number of coins paid out in the current game to the instructed accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins paid out has reached the upper limit. Determine (Sh9). In Sh9, if the aforementioned total cumulative count stop flag is set in the RAM 41c, it is determined that the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached the upper limit.

If it is determined in Sh9 that the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to Sh13. If it is determined in Sh9 that the total cumulative number of games or the total cumulative number of coins paid out has not reached the upper limit, the number of coins paid out in the current game is set as an addition value in the DE register (Sh10), and the total cumulative number of coins is stored in the RAM 41c. Set the start address of the area where the number of paid out bonus coins is stored in the HL register (Sh11), perform the 3-byte data addition and storage process described above (Sh12), and set the total number of paid out bonus items including instructions in the current game. Add the number of paid coins.

Next, set the start address of the total cumulative number of paid-out coins for the designated accessories in the HL register (Sh13), set the start address of the total cumulative number of paid-out coins in the DE register (Sh14), and perform the 3-byte data division process described above. Accordingly, the total cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio, which is the ratio of the total cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory payout number to the total cumulative payout number, is calculated (Sh15). Then, the calculated total cumulative instructed accessories payout ratio is stored in the RAM 41c (Sh16).

Next, in the same way as the accessory ratio update process, it is determined whether or not the game is the updated number of games by referring to the determination game number counter (Sh17 to Sh20).

Then, if the game is the number of updated games, the value of the instruction-included accessory payout counter of the accumulated buffer corresponding to the specified updated game among the accumulated buffers 1 to 3 is read out, and the 6000 times calculation value is stored in the RAM 41c. It is stored in the 6000 game cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory payout number in the buffer, and the instruction-inclusive accessory payout counter from which it is read is updated to the initial value of 0 (Sh21 to Sh23).

Next, set the start address of the 6000 game cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory payout number (instruction-inclusive accessory payout (6000 cumulative) address) in the 6000-time calculation buffer to the HL register (Sh24), and By setting the start address of the cumulative payout number (winning payout (6000 cumulative) address) in the DE register (Sh25) and performing the above-mentioned 3-byte data division process, the 6000 game cumulative instruction included accessory for the 6000 game cumulative payout number The instruction-included accessory payout ratio (6000G), which is the ratio of the number of payouts, is calculated (Sh26). Then, the calculated instruction-included accessory payout ratio (6000G) is stored in the RAM 41c (Sh27). Thereafter, the process returns to each state counting process.

In this way, in the instruction-included accessory ratio update process, the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c is acquired, and if the navigation number is 1 or more, it is determined that the game is a game in which navigation notification is performed. , Update the instruction-inclusive accessory payout counter for cumulative buffers 1 to 3, and the total cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory payout number, and update the instruction-inclusive accessory payout counter for cumulative buffers 1 to 3 and the total cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory payout. Based on the number of sheets, the total cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio and instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio (6000G) are calculated.

Further, in this embodiment, 1 to 13 are set as the navigation number, but even if a value of 14 or more is set, it is determined that the game is a game in which navigation notification is performed, and the cumulative buffer number is 1 to 13. In addition to updating the instruction-inclusive accessory payout counter of No. 3 and the total cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory payout number, based on the updated instruction-inclusive accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 and the total cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory payout number, The total cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio and instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio (6000G) are calculated.

[About the gaming machine information display]
Next, the display mode of the gaming machine information display 50 will be explained based on FIG. 27.

In a state where the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a game machine information display 50 consisting of a 7-segment display is provided at the lower part of the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. is located. The game machine information display device 50 is such that the display contents can be viewed from outside the board case when the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case, and the game machine information is aggregated by the main control unit 41. Information such as the above-mentioned accessory payout ratio in the slot machine 1 displayed on the display 50 can be recognized by a clerk or the like.

As shown in FIG. 27, the main control unit 41 controls the continuous accessory payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the instructed accessory payout ratio, the continuous accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of coins, and the accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games. Control is performed to display the ratio and the instructed accessory payout ratio on the gaming machine information display 50. The accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of coins are the accessory payout ratio (6000G) calculated in the accessory payout ratio update process described above, and the total cumulative accessory payout ratio, respectively. , the continuous accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games, and the continuous accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are the continuous accessory payout ratio (6000G) calculated in the continuous accessory payout ratio update process described above, and the total cumulative consecutive This is the accessory payout ratio, and the instruction-included accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the instruction-included accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of coins are the instruction-included accessory payout ratio calculated in the instruction-included accessory payout ratio update process described above. These are the product payout ratio (6000G) and the total cumulative instructed accessory product payout ratio.

Note that the information displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 may include the ratio of advantageous sections over the past 6000 games, the ratio of advantageous sections to the total cumulative number of games, and the like. The ratio of advantageous sections over the past 6000 games is the ratio of the number of games controlled to advantageous sections among the past 6000 games. The advantageous section ratio to the total cumulative number of games is the ratio of the number of games controlled to the advantageous section out of the total cumulative number of games, which is the cumulative number of games since the data of the RAM 41c was initialized at the time of factory shipment or for some reason. .

In addition, in this embodiment, only a special game state in which the RB is always activated is installed as a bonus, but the RB may be activated independently, and all types of small prizes are allowed. , a configuration may be adopted in which a CT in which retrieval is limited for some reels and a CB in which the CT operates continuously, and when a CT is installed, the number of medals paid out during the CT is as follows: It is reflected in the accessory payout ratio and the number of medals paid out including instructions, and if a CB is installed, the number of medals paid out during the CB will be reflected in the continuous accessory payout ratio.

The main control unit 41 controls the continuous accessory payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the instructed accessory payout ratio, and the continuous accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games in the period from when the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped. The payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the instructed accessory payout ratio are switched every predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment) in the display order shown in FIG. 27 and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

At this time, on the gaming machine information display 50, an abbreviation indicating the currently displayed display content is displayed in the top two digits (for example, if the consecutive accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games in display order 1 is displayed, , "1C") is displayed. The abbreviation that indicates the display content currently displayed is that the display content of the lowest digit of the two displayed digits is a character other than a number (in this example, the alphabetic characters "C" and "F"). On the gaming machine information display 50, when an abbreviation, a ratio, or a ratio is displayed, the numerical part of the abbreviation is not adjacent to the ratio or ratio. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displayed content of the proportion or ratio from being misunderstood due to the abbreviated numerical part and the proportion or ratio being adjacent to each other.

In addition, the gaming machine information display 50 displays the current ratio and ratio (hereinafter referred to as data to be displayed) corresponding to the abbreviations mentioned above in the last two digits. It is displayed as a percentage. The data to be displayed in the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 can be 0 to 99, and in this embodiment, both of the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 are used to display the data. It is designed to be displayed. For example, if the data to be displayed is one digit, "0" is displayed in the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, while the value of the data to be displayed in the lower digit is displayed. (For example, when displaying 5%, "05" is displayed in the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50). Furthermore, when the data to be displayed is two digits, the data to be displayed is displayed in the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 (for example, when displaying 15%, the gaming machine information display 50 ``15'' is displayed in the last two digits of ``15''). In this way, regardless of whether the data to be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 is one digit or two digits, the data to be displayed can be displayed using both of the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50. By displaying the information, it is possible to prevent the display contents of the ratio and ratio from being misunderstood. In addition, by displaying the data to be displayed using both the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, regardless of whether it is one digit or two digits, the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 are always displayed. Any data will be displayed in the digits, and for example, if data is not displayed on one of the lower two digit displays, it is possible to recognize that there is an abnormality in the display.

In addition, the abbreviation indicating the display content currently being displayed is changed so that the display content of the highest digit of the two displayed digits is a character other than a number (for example, "C1") on the gaming machine information display. In addition to displaying the abbreviation in the last two digits of the game machine information display 50, the data that should be currently displayed in the first two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 (for example, "60C1" if it is the consecutive role payout ratio for the past 6000 games) Even with the configuration in which the abbreviated numerical part and the ratio are placed next to each other, it is possible to prevent the displayed content of the ratio or ratio from being misunderstood.

In addition, regardless of whether the abbreviation and the data to be currently displayed are displayed in the lower two digits or the upper two digits on the gaming machine information display 50, the two digits that display the abbreviation and the data that should be currently displayed are displayed. Even with a configuration in which the two digits are displayed in different colors, it is possible to prevent the displayed content of the percentage or ratio from being misunderstood due to the abbreviated numerical part and the percentage or ratio being adjacent to each other.

Furthermore, when the main control unit 41 of this embodiment switches and displays the display contents every predetermined period in the display order shown in FIG. Even if these values can be updated to new values due to progress, updating to the new values is limited and the display is cycled using the original values. Specifically, if the game is progressing and these values can be updated to new values within one period until these displays complete one cycle, the new values are calculated and stored in the RAM 41c. However, by setting the original value without setting the new value in the output buffer for displaying the display contents on the gaming machine information display 50, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 can be changed to the output buffer. You can make one cycle using the original value that was set, set a new value in the output buffer after one cycle of display is completed, and then display the new value. If these values can be updated to new values within one period until the display of Alternatively, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 may be made to cycle through one cycle, and when one cycle of display is completed, calculation is performed to obtain a new value, and then the new value is used to display on the gaming machine information display 50. good. By doing so, it is possible to prevent values calculated at different times from being mixed together during the period until the display contents on the gaming machine information display 50 complete one cycle.

In addition, the main control unit 41 controls the display mode ( For example, if it is normally lit all the time, the continuous accessory payout ratio is displayed with blinking lighting, etc.). In addition, when the accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of coins exceeds a specified ratio (for example, 70%), the main control unit 41 displays a different display mode than usual (for example, If it is normally lit all the time, it will be blinking, etc.) to display the payout ratio of accessories. In addition, the main control unit 41 displays a different display than normal if the instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio over the past 6000 games or the instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts exceeds a specified ratio (for example, 80%). The instruction-included accessory payout ratio is displayed in a manner (for example, if it is normally lit all the time, it is lit blinking).

In this way, when the continuous accessory payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio exceed the specified ratio, they are displayed in a different display format than usual, and the gambling property is controlled to be high. It is possible to warn that there is a possibility that the

In addition, in the case where the main control unit 41 displays the continuous accessory payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and instruction-included accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games on the gaming machine information display 50, the main control unit 41 controls the main control unit 41 when the number of past games is 6000 games. If the total has not reached 6000 games, for example, by controlling the display mode to be different from normal, such as by blinking the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, it is possible to check that the total has not reached 6000 games. This makes it possible to recognize that there may be bias in the displayed proportions and ratios.

In addition, when the main control unit 41 causes the gaming machine information display 50 to display the continuous accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out, the main control unit 41 controls the continuous accessory payout ratio to approximately converge to the design value of the slot machine when the number of past games has been played. When the specified number of games to be played (for example, 175,000 games) has not been reached, the game machine information display 50 may be controlled to have a different display mode than usual, such as by blinking the upper two digits. , it is now possible to recognize that the continuous role payout ratio has not reached the specified number of games where it converges to the slot machine's design value, and there is a possibility that there is a bias in the displayed ratio. It is now recognizable.

In addition, when displaying the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out on the gaming machine information display 50, the main control unit 41 also specifies that the number of past games is such that the accessory payout ratio converges to the design value of the slot machine. When the number of games (for example, 175,000 games) has not been reached, the game machine information display 50 may be controlled in a different display mode, such as by blinking the upper two digits. It is now possible to recognize that the payout ratio has not reached the specified number of games that converges to the slot machine's design value, and it is now possible to recognize that the displayed ratio and ratio may be biased. It has become.

In addition, in the case where the main control unit 41 causes the game machine information display 50 to display the instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the main control unit 41 determines that the number of past games is approximately equal to the instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio to the design value of the slot machine. When the number of games has not reached the specified number of games (for example, 175,000 games), the game machine information display 50 is controlled to have a different display mode from normal, such as by blinking the upper two digits. This makes it possible to recognize that the specified number of games has not been reached in which the payout ratio of accessories including instruction generally converges to the design value of the slot machine, and the displayed ratio is biased. Possibilities can now be recognized.

The main control unit 41 displays "00" in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 when the number of games has not reached 6000, and displays "00" in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 when the number of games has reached 6000. In other words, when the number of games has not reached 6000, the display mode of the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is changed to the display mode after 6000 games. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the display modes are different. With such a configuration, when the number of games has not reached 6000, the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 (for example, "1C" ) It can be recognized that the total of the consecutive accessory payout ratios, etc. specified by the above has not reached 6000 games, and it can be recognized that there is a possibility that the displayed ratios and ratios are biased. In addition, when the number of games has not reached 6,000, "00" is displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, so that when the number of games has not reached 6,000, the gaming machine information is always displayed. Data is displayed on the lower two digits of the display 50, and for example, if data is not displayed on one of the lower two digit displays, it is possible to recognize an abnormality in the display.

The main control unit 41 also controls the continuous accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the accessory payout ratio, the instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio, the continuous accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts, the accessory payout ratio, and the instruction-inclusive payout ratio. Determine whether the data used to calculate the item payout ratio is normal or not, and if it is determined to be abnormal (total cumulative number of accessory items paid out, total cumulative number of consecutive accessory items paid out, total cumulative instruction included) If the number of coins paid out for accessory items is large, or if the stored value is in a certain data format (such as 01 repetition), the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data are initialized, and the gaming machine The information display 50 displays a message indicating that an abnormality has been detected (for example, "FFFF") to notify the user that the calculation of these data is not being performed normally. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, when initializing the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data, for example, the consecutive accessory payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the instructed accessory payout ratio over the past 6000 games. If at least one of them is determined to be abnormal, data related to all of them may be initialized, or only some of the data may be initialized. If at least one of the continuous accessory payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and instruction-included accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is determined to be abnormal, the data regarding all of these are initialized. Alternatively, only some data may be initialized. In addition, when an abnormality is determined in part of the data for the past 6,000 games, all the data for the past 6,000 games and the total number of games can be initialized, or conversely, some of the data for the total number of games can be initialized. When an abnormality is determined, all data for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games may be initialized.

In addition, we determined whether the data used to calculate the continuous accessory payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and instructed accessory payout ratio for the past 6,000 games and the total cumulative number of payouts were normal or not, and it was determined that the data was abnormal. In such a case, a notification will be given to that effect, and then a predetermined operation will be performed (for example, switches such as the start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and setting key switch 37 will be operated in a predetermined procedure). In this way, the data may be initialized.

Furthermore, in order to notify that an abnormality has been determined, as described above, the gaming machine information display 50 may display a message indicating that an abnormality has been detected (for example, "FFFF") to notify the user that an abnormality has been detected. When an abnormality is determined, a command that can identify the fact is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 side displays the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to notify that an abnormality has been determined. You can do it like this.

The main control unit 41 also controls the period from the start of data aggregation until reaching 6000 games, that is, the continuous accessory payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, instructed accessory payout ratio, total During a period when there is insufficient data to calculate the continuous accessory payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio, etc. to the cumulative number of payouts, the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 indicates that the data is not being aggregated. It is now displayed in a different manner from the display manner after 6000 games since the start, so that it can be recognized that there is insufficient data for calculating the display contents.

In addition, in this example, the consecutive role payout ratio, the role item payout ratio, the instruction-inclusive role item payout ratio, and the continuous role payout number for the past 6000 games during the period from when the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped. The item payout ratio, the accessory item payout ratio, and the instruction-included accessory item payout ratio are switched and displayed every predetermined period, but they are displayed only when the open state of the front door 1b is detected. , make it appear only when the operation of a predetermined operation switch (for example, reset/setting switch 38) is detected, make it appear when the game is not in progress, or make it appear when changing settings or checking settings. It may be displayed on the screen, or it may be displayed only for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Further, instead of automatically switching at every predetermined period, the displayed content may be switched every time a predetermined operation is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming machine information display unit 50 indicates that an abnormality has been determined in the data used to calculate the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 or that there is insufficient data for calculating the display content. Although the configuration is such that notification is made using the display 50, it is also possible to send a command that can specify this to the sub-control unit 91 and make it possible to confirm it on the display or presentation device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. good.

In addition, in this example, the continuous accessory payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the instruction-included accessory payout ratio, the continuous accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of coins, the accessory payout ratio, and the instruction-included accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games. The payout ratio is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, but in addition to these displays, it is also important to note that the RAM 41c has been initialized by changing the settings, and that the wiring installed in the slot machine 1 (backup power supply wiring, etc.) ) When a disconnection is detected, the gaming machine information display 50 may display content that makes it possible to recognize this fact.

In particular, if the settings are changed during a bonus, advantageous period, or carryover of the bonus and the bonus or advantageous period is forcibly ended, or if the bonus that is being carried over is cleared, the game will continue to be regulated while the bonus is being carried over. or an operation to intentionally end an advantageous section, i.e., a deliberate transition from a gaming state that is relatively advantageous to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, and gaming machine information display. When detecting the possibility that the device 50 is not properly connected due to a disconnection or the like, this fact is notified in a specifiable manner. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that the correct information is not displayed as the accessory payout ratio, the continuous accessory payout ratio, the instruction-included accessory payout ratio, etc., that has been fraudulently manipulated.

In addition, in order to avoid overflow of the total cumulative number of games, the total cumulative number of coins paid out, etc., in a configuration that initializes the total cumulative data, etc., it is necessary to It is preferable to notify in a different manner than when there is a possibility of unauthorized manipulation so that correct information is not displayed as the payout ratio, instruction-included accessory payout ratio, etc. By doing this, overflow can be avoided. The fact that the total number of games played, the total number of coins paid out, etc. have been initialized through the process of doing so should be recognized separately from initialization caused by unauthorized operations to prevent correct information from being displayed as the payout ratio of accessory items, etc. I can do it.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if there is a possibility that the information has been fraudulently manipulated so that the correct information is not displayed as the accessory payout ratio, continuous accessory payout ratio, instructed accessory payout ratio, etc., this will be detected. The main control unit 41 records the history of the detection, and then performs a predetermined operation (for example, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the setting key switch 37, etc.) without notifying you at the time of the detection. (operating devices according to predetermined procedures, connecting predetermined external devices such as inspection terminals to the game control board 40, etc.), these histories can be stored in the main control section 41 side. This can be confirmed using a display (for example, the gaming machine information display 50, etc.), a display provided on the sub-control unit 91 side (for example, the liquid crystal display 51, etc.), a display external to the slot machine 1, etc. Also good.

In addition, if settings have been changed, a disconnection has been detected, or a connection failure has occurred in the gaming machine information display 50, correct information such as accessory payout ratio, continuous accessory payout ratio, instructed accessory payout ratio, etc. may not be displayed, and as mentioned above, there is a possibility that the information has been fraudulently manipulated so that correct information such as the accessory payout ratio, continuous accessory payout ratio, instructed accessory payout ratio, etc. is not displayed. It may also be possible to confirm this on a display or presentation device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. In addition, settings may be changed during a bonus, an advantageous period, or a carryover of bonuses, and the bonus or advantageous period is forcibly terminated, or the bonus that is being carried over is cleared, resulting in the payout ratio of bonuses, continuous bonuses, etc. The sub-control unit 91 records the history of detecting that there is a possibility of unauthorized operation so that correct information is not displayed as the payout ratio, instruction-included accessory payout ratio, etc. It may also be possible to check the history of.

Note that each ratio display may be displayed not only on the gaming machine information display 50 but also on the credit display 11 and the gaming auxiliary display 12, and the credit display 11 and the gaming auxiliary display 12 are This is a display that displays information according to the progress of the game, and because the ratio display cannot be displayed all the time, it is possible that a prescribed operation was performed by a clerk at a game store when no game was being played. With the ratio display displayed on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, the front door 1b is closed, medals are inserted into the slot machine 1, an error occurs, and the setting key switch is pressed. 37, operation of the settlement switch 10, or stoppage of power supply to the slot machine 1, the ratio display is switched to the original display content that was displayed before the ratio display was displayed and the ratio display is ended. It is preferable to let

[About the game auxiliary display]
Next, the configuration and display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 will be explained based on FIGS. 28 and 29.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the game auxiliary display 12 includes a first segment A, a second segment B, a third segment C, a fourth segment D, a fifth segment E, a sixth segment F, and a seventh segment. It consists of two indicators 12L and 12R that can turn on and off the G and 8th segment DP, respectively, and the main control unit 41 sets display data for each of the indicators 12L and 12R. This is a display that can display various information by turning on or off the 8 segments A to DP.

As shown in FIG. 28(b), the display data is composed of 8-bit data, in which the value of the 7th bit is the value of the first segment A, the value of the 6th bit is the value of the second segment B, The value of the 5th bit is the 3rd segment C, the value of the 4th bit is the 4th segment D, the value of the 3rd bit is the 5th segment E, the value of the 2nd bit is the 6th segment F, and the value of the 1st bit is the The value of the 0th bit of the seventh segment G corresponds to the eighth segment DP. A segment is controlled to be in a non-lit state when the value of the corresponding bit is 0, and controlled to be in a lit state when the value of the corresponding bit is 1.

As shown in FIG. 28(c), when displaying a display value on each display 12L, 12R of the game auxiliary display 12, the main control unit 41 first sets the display value to display data for each display 12L, 12R. The display data is set in the output buffer of the corresponding display device 12L, 12R, and the on/off signal based on the display data is sent from the output port to each display device 12L, 12R by port output processing in the subsequent timer interrupt processing. The displayed value is displayed on each display 12L, 12R of the gaming auxiliary display 12 by outputting the output to the display 12L, 12R, and turning on or off the first to eighth segments A to DP of each display 12L, 12R. let For example, when displaying "1" as the display value on the display 12L, convert the display value "1" to display data "01100000" and set "01100000" in the output buffer of the display 12L. Then, by outputting on/off signals corresponding to the first to eighth segments A to DP of the display device 12L from the output port to the display device 12L through port output processing in the timer interrupt processing, “1” is set in the display data. The 2nd and 3rd segments B and C of the display 12L corresponding to the 6th and 5th bits set to "0" are turned on, and the 7th bit and 4th to 0th bits set to "0" in the display data are turned on. The first segment A and the fourth to eighth segments D to DP of the corresponding display 12L are turned off, and "1" is displayed on the display 12L.

In this way, the main control unit 41 controls the plurality of segments of each display 12L, 12R to be in a lighting state or a non-lighting state, so that predetermined numbers ("0" to "9") and symbols are displayed as display values. Various information can be displayed by displaying one or two digits (for example, "-", ".", etc.) or alphabetic characters (for example, "E", etc.). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, the number of medals to be paid out (0 to 15), the navigation notification (1 to 13) indicating the operation mode, and the error code (E1 to E1) that can identify the type of error that has occurred. E8), it is possible to display a setting code (--) that can identify the setting change state.

[About the display status of the game auxiliary display]
Next, the display status of the game auxiliary display 12 will be explained based on FIGS. 30 to 36.

As shown in FIG. 30, when medals are inserted into the medal insertion section 4 or the number of bets is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6, the main control section 41 controls the output buffers of the displays 12L and 12R of the RAM 41c. It is initialized and the game auxiliary display 12 is put into a non-display state.

As shown in FIG. 30(a), when the start switch 7 is operated and the navigation notification is not performed, the main control unit 41 continues the non-display state until all the reels stop. , and the third stop operation is turned OFF, and if a minor prize is won and a medal is awarded, the number of coins to be paid out due to the winning of the minor prize is acquired from the RAM 41c, and the acquired number of coins to be paid out is displayed. The number of coins to be paid out (1 to 15) is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by converting it into display data for each machine 12L and 12R and setting it in the output buffer of the display 12L and 12R.

Thereafter, the main control unit 41 continues to display the number of coins to be paid out even after the end of the game until the number of bets for the next game is set, and when the number of bets for the next game is set, the display as described above By initializing the output buffers 12L and 12R and putting the game auxiliary display 12 into a non-display state, the display of the number of coins paid out in the previous game is ended. Incidentally, when all the reels are stopped, no small winning combination is won, and no medals are awarded, the non-display state of the game auxiliary display 12 continues.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30(b), when the start switch 7 is operated and the navigation notification is performed, the main control unit 41 stores the navigation number setting area in the RAM 41c when the start switch 7 is operated. A navigation number indicating the operation mode according to the navigation target winning combination won in the internal lottery is set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c, and after the reels start rotating, the reels rotate at a constant speed and the stop operation is enabled. By acquiring the navigation number from the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c at the timing, converting the acquired navigation number into display data for each display 12L and 12R, and setting it in the output buffer of the display 12L and 12R, the game auxiliary display The navigation number (1 to 13) indicating the operation mode is displayed on the device 12. In addition, the main control unit 41 causes the reels to rotate at a constant speed and the stop operation is enabled, display data corresponding to the navigation number is set in the output buffers of the displays 12L and 12R, and the operation mode is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12. Even after the indicated navigation number is displayed, every time the constant speed rotation of the reel is detected, the navigation number is acquired from the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c, and the acquired navigation number is added to the display data for each display 12L and 12R. The data is converted and repeatedly set in the output buffers of the display devices 12L and 12R. At this time, even if the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the operation mode corresponding to the navigation display, the display data for each display 12L and 12R is not initialized, and the stop operation is performed in the operation mode corresponding to the navigation display. Regardless of whether or not the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 until a stop operation (change from OFF to ON) of the third stop reel is detected.

After that, at the timing when the stop operation (change from OFF to ON) of the third stop reel is detected, the output buffers of the display devices 12L and 12R are initialized, and the gaming auxiliary display device 12 is put into a non-display state. End navigation display. On the other hand, the navigation number stored in the navigation number storage area of the RAM 41c is maintained without being initialized. When the operation is turned off, the gaming machine information calculation process described above is performed before the medal payout process is performed. At this time, the main control unit 41 acquires the navigation number set in the navigation number storage area of the RAM 41c, and if the navigation number is 1 or more, The cumulative number of instruction-inclusive accessory payouts is updated, and the total cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio and instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio (6000G) are calculated.

Furthermore, if all the reels stop and the stop operation of the third stop reel is turned OFF, and a small prize is won and a medal is awarded, after the above-mentioned gaming machine information calculation process is performed, The number of coins to be paid out that is awarded by winning a small prize is acquired from the RAM 41c, the acquired number of coins to be paid out is converted to display data for each display 12L and 12R, and the data is set in the output buffer of each display 12L and 12R, thereby providing game assistance. The number of coins to be paid out (1 to 15) is displayed on the display 12.

Thereafter, the main control unit 41 initializes the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c and sets it to 0 through initialization processing performed at the end of one game, but does not initialize the output buffers of the display devices 12L and 12R, and Based on the display data set in the output buffer, the number of coins to be paid out is continued to be displayed even after the end of the game until the number of bets for the next game is set. Then, when the number of bets for the next game is set, the output buffers of the displays 12L and 12R are initialized as described above, and the game auxiliary display 12 is set to a non-display state, thereby controlling the number of coins paid out in the previous game. to end the display. Incidentally, when all the reels are stopped, no small winning combination is won, and no medals are awarded, the non-display state of the game auxiliary display 12 continues.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the main control unit 41 detects the occurrence of an abnormality, it sets an error flag corresponding to the error type of the detected abnormality in the error flag setting area of the RAM 41c, and prevents the game from proceeding. The error code ( E1 to E8) are displayed. After that, when a reset operation is performed using the reset switch 23 or the reset/setting switch 38, the error state is canceled by clearing the error flag and the game can be continued, and the display 12L, 12R The display of the error code is ended by initializing the output buffer of and putting the game auxiliary display 12 into a non-display state.

As shown in FIG. 32, the main control unit 41 continues to display the payout number (1 to 15) on the game auxiliary display 12 after winning a small winning combination, and after the power supply is stopped. When the ON state of the setting key switch 37 is detected when the power supply is resumed, a gaming state flag indicating that the setting is being changed is set in a gaming state flag setting area different from the above-mentioned error flag setting area in the RAM 41c, and the setting is performed. At the same time as transitioning to the change state, a setting code that can identify the setting change state is converted into display data for each display 12L, 12R, and set in the output buffer of the display 12L, 12R, thereby changing the game auxiliary display. Display the setting code (--) on the device 12. Thereafter, when the setting value is confirmed and the main control unit 41 detects the OFF state of the setting key switch 37, it initializes the gaming state flag indicating that the setting is being changed, which is set in the gaming state flag setting area of the RAM 41c, and normalizes the setting value. Terminate the setting change state by changing the gaming state flag to indicate the gaming state (non-internal), transition to the normal gaming state (non-internal), and initialize the output buffers of the displays 12L and 12R. Then, the game auxiliary display 12 is put into a non-display state.

If the main control unit 41 does not detect the ON state of the setting key switch 37 when the power supply is restarted after the power supply has been stopped, and returns to the control state before the power supply was stopped, Based on the display data set in the output buffer of the display 12L, it is determined whether an error code or setting code was displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 before the power supply was stopped, and the power supply is stopped. If it is determined that the error code or setting code is not displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 before starting, the gaming auxiliary display 12 is set to a non-display state by initializing the output buffers of the displays 12L and 12R. On the other hand, if it is determined that an error code or setting code was displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 before the power supply stopped, by maintaining the output buffers of the displays 12L and 12R, The error code or setting code displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 33, the main control unit 41 causes the game auxiliary display 12 to continue displaying the number of payout coins (1 to 15) after the end of the game, that is, information indicating the result of the game. is displayed, the ON state of the setting key switch 37 is not detected when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped, and the game returns to the state after the end of the game before the power supply was stopped. When returning, the output buffers of the display devices 12L and 12R are initialized to put the game auxiliary display device 12 into a non-display state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34, the main control unit 41 supplies power while the navigation notification is being executed and the navigation number (1 to 13) indicating the operation mode is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. If the ON state of the setting key switch 37 is not detected when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped, and the navigation notification is being executed before the power supply is stopped, the display 12L , 12R, the game auxiliary display 12 is put into a non-display state. In this case, after the rotation of the reels resumes, the main control unit 41 converts the navigation number indicating the operation mode into display data and displays it again on the display 12L at the timing when the reels rotate at a constant speed and the stop operation is enabled. , 12R, the navigation number (1 to 13) indicating the operation mode is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the main control unit 41 is in an error state and the power supply is stopped while the error code (E1 to E8) is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. If the ON state of the setting key switch 37 is not detected when the power supply is resumed, and the error state before the power supply is stopped is restored, the output buffers of the display devices 12L and 12R are maintained. The error code displayed before supply is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36, the main control unit 41 is in the setting change state and the setting code (--) is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and after the power supply is stopped, the main control unit 41 If the ON state of the setting key switch 37 is not detected when power supply is resumed, and the setting change state before the power supply is stopped is to be restored, by maintaining the output buffers of the display devices 12L and 12R, The setting code displayed before power supply is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

In this way, the main control unit 41 does not detect the ON state of the setting key switch 37 when the power supply is restarted after the power supply has been stopped, and returns to the control state before the power supply was stopped. In addition, if the auxiliary game display 12 continues to display the number of coins to be paid out, that is, the result of the game when the power supply is stopped, the auxiliary game display 12 is disabled when the power supply is resumed. Display state. As a result, if the power supply stops while the number of paid out coins continues to be displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12, and then the power supply starts and the setting change state is entered and the set value is set. Even if the power supply starts and does not shift to the setting change state and returns to the control state before the power supply stopped, the game auxiliary display 12 will be in the non-display state in both cases. This makes it impossible to guess whether or not the setting value has been changed. At this time, the number of coins to be paid out before the power supply is stopped is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and even if the number of coins to be paid out is hidden after the power supply is resumed, the number of coins to be paid out is still the same as before the power supply was stopped. This will not affect the game after the power supply is restored.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 does not detect the ON state of the setting key switch 37 when the power supply is restarted after the power supply has been stopped, and returns to the control state before the power supply was stopped, , if the game is in an error state or settings change state where the game cannot proceed when the power supply is stopped, and an error code indicating the error state or a setting code indicating the settings change state is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12. By displaying the error code and setting code that were displayed before the power supply was stopped on the game auxiliary display 12 when the power supply is resumed, the game progress can be adjusted when the power supply is resumed. It is now possible to identify situations where it is not possible.

[About initialization determination of gaming auxiliary display]
As described above, the main control unit 41 does not detect the ON state of the setting key switch 37 when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped, and returns to the control state before the power supply was stopped. In this case, it is determined whether an error code or a setting code was displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 before the power supply was stopped, based on the display data set in the output buffer of the display 12L, Based on the determination result, the output buffers of the displays 12L and 12R are initialized and the gaming auxiliary display 12 is set to a non-display state, or the output buffers of the displays 12L and 12R are maintained and the gaming auxiliary display 12 is Decide whether to maintain the display state.

The payout number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a value of 1 to 15, and the seventh segment G of the display 12L corresponding to the value in the tens place of the game auxiliary display 12 indicates that the displayed value is Any value from 1 to 15 results in a non-lighting state. Further, the navigation number indicating the operation mode displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 has a value of 1 to 13, and even in this case, the number of the display 12L corresponding to the value in the tens place of the game auxiliary display 12 is 1 to 13. The 7-segment G is in a non-lighted state regardless of the displayed value from 1 to 13. On the other hand, the error codes displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 are E1 to E8, and the seventh segment G of the display 12L corresponding to the value in the tens place of the gaming auxiliary display 12 indicates that the displayed value is The light is turned on regardless of the value of E1 to E8. In addition, the setting code displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is --, and in this case as well, the seventh segment G of the display 12L corresponding to the value in the tens place of the game auxiliary display 12 is in the lighting state. Become. Therefore, depending on whether the seventh segment G of the display 12L corresponding to the value in the tens place of the gaming auxiliary display 12 is lit or not, an error code is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12. Or, the setting code is displayed, or the error code or setting code is not displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 (the number of coins to be paid out is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the operation mode is It becomes possible to identify whether the navigation number is displayed (displayed or hidden).

Then, the main control unit 41 does not detect the ON state of the setting key switch 37 when the power supply is restarted after the power supply has been stopped, and returns to the control state before the power supply was stopped. , before the power supply is stopped by determining whether the seventh segment G of the display 12L corresponding to the value in the tens place of the gaming auxiliary display 12 is in a non-lit state or a lit state. It is determined whether an error code or a setting code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(a), the main control unit 41 displays the display data set in the output buffer of the display 12L corresponding to the tens place value among the game auxiliary display 12. (Sm1), performs an AND operation with the acquired display data of the display 12L and 02 (H) (Sm2), determines whether the operation result is 0 or not (Sm3), and determines whether the operation result is 0. If it is determined that this is the case, the output buffers of the displays 12L and 12R are initialized (Sm4), and the game auxiliary display 12 is put into a non-display state, while if it is determined that the calculation result is not 0 in Sm3, , maintains the output buffers of the displays 12L and 12R, and returns the gaming auxiliary display 12 to the display state before the power supply was stopped.

In this way, by ANDing the display data of the display device 12L acquired in Sm1 and 02(H) (Sm2), 02(H) has a value of 1 in the first bit corresponding to the seventh segment G. Since the value of the bit corresponding to the other segments is 00000010 (binary number), if the display data of the display device 12L acquired in Sm1 is 00000000 (binary number), that is, the seventh segment G If the value of the first bit indicating the lighting state/non-lighting state of is 0 indicating the non-lighting state, the calculation result of Sm2 is 00000000 (binary number), and the seventh segment G of the display 12L is non-lighting. A state in which the lighting state is identified and no error code or setting code is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 as described above (a state in which the number of coins to be paid out is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12, indicating the operation mode) In this case, the output buffers of the display units 12L and 12R are initialized to the display state before the power supply was stopped. Regardless, the game auxiliary display 12 is in a non-display state.

On the other hand, if the display data of the display 12L acquired in Sm1 is 00000010 (binary number), that is, the value of the first bit indicating the lighting state/non-lighting state of the seventh segment G is 1 indicating the lighting state. In this case, since the calculation result of Sm2 is 00000010 (binary number) and not 00000000 (binary number), it is specified that the seventh segment G of the display 12L is lit, and the game is started as described above. Since it is identified that the error code or setting code is displayed on the auxiliary display 12, in this case, the output buffers of the displays 12L and 12R are maintained, and the gaming auxiliary display 12 is powered on. The display returns to the state before it stopped, that is, the state in which the error code or setting code is displayed.

In addition, as a method for determining whether an error code or setting code was displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 before the power supply was stopped, it is possible to determine whether the error code is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 or not. , a method of determining whether the setting code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the setting change state can be adopted. When adopting this method, in this embodiment, an error flag indicating whether an error state exists and a gaming state flag indicating whether a setting change state is stored are stored in different storage areas. , an error flag, and a gaming status flag, and each needs to be determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(b), the main control unit 41 acquires a gaming state flag (Sn1), and determines from the acquired gaming state flag whether or not it is in a setting change state (Sn2). ), if it is determined that the settings are not changed, an error flag is acquired (Sn3), and from the acquired error flag it is determined whether or not there is an error condition (Sn4), and if it is determined that there is no error condition, the , the output buffers of the display devices 12L and 12R are initialized (Sn5), and the game auxiliary display device 12 is put into a non-display state, and if it is determined in Sn2 that the setting is changed, it is determined that the error state is in Sn4. In this case, the output buffers of the displays 12L and 12R are maintained, and the gaming auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state before the power supply was stopped.

In this way, the method of determining whether it is an error state or a setting change state requires five steps Sn1 to Sn5 and two branches, whereas the method shown in FIG. ), the method of determining whether the seventh segment G of the display 12L is lit requires only four steps, Sm1 to Sm4, and only one branch, which indicates an error state. This method requires less program capacity than a method that separately determines whether the program is in the current state or in the setting change state.

[About control at the end of advantageous section]
Next, the control at the end of the advantageous section will be explained based on FIG. 38.

As shown in FIG. 38, if the main control unit 41 determines that the advantageous section end flag is set in the advantageous section end process in the main processing, the main control section 41 stores the advantageous section in the RAM 41c regardless of the advantageous section state. Initialize the target area at the end of a section and the target area at the end of each game (AT related).

As a result, the advantageous section flag stored in the target area at the end of the advantageous section, the signal buffer during the advantageous zone, data indicating the advantageous zone state, the navigation number stored in the target area (AT related) at the end of every game, etc. , all information related to the advantageous section is initialized, and the gaming section shifts to the normal section.

In addition, in games other than the end of the advantageous section, the target area (AT related) at the end of each game is initialized in the initialization at the end of one game, which is performed after the advantageous section end processing, and the navigation number setting is While the navigation number set in the area is initialized, in the game at the end of the advantageous section, the target area (AT related) is initialized at the end of every game by the advantageous section end processing, and the navigation number setting area The navigation number set in will be initialized, but as mentioned above, the navigation number display on the gaming auxiliary display 12 will change when the stop operation of the third stop reel changes from OFF to ON. In addition, the gaming machine information calculation process that uses the navigation number to update the number of paid out bonuses with instructions and calculate the payout ratio of bonuses with instructions is performed before the advantageous section end process. These processes will not be affected.

Then, after the advantageous section end processing, the main control section 41 controls the section display LED 19 to turn off by determining that the advantageous section signal buffer in the RAM 41c is OFF in the game section notification end processing.

In this way, at the end of an advantageous section, the advantageous section flag stored in the advantageous section end target area, the advantageous section signal buffer, the data indicating the advantageous section state, and the advantageous section end target area (AT related) are stored. After all information related to the advantageous section, such as the navigation number in Despite this, a situation in which the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous section does not occur.

In particular, the navigation number setting area in which the navigation number is stored is initialized before the section display LED 19 turns off, so even though the notification that it is an advantageous section has ended, the navigation notification is not displayed. You can prevent it from happening.

In addition, the RAM 41c has two areas in which information related to the advantageous section is stored: a target area at the end of the advantageous section which is not initialized for each game, and a target area at the end of each game (AT) which is initialized for each game. (related), and when the advantageous period ends, the target area (AT related) is also initialized at the end of every game without waiting for the end of one game, so even though the advantageous period has ended, the target area (AT related) is initialized. This can prevent related information from remaining behind.

Moreover, the main control unit 41 can control a plurality of advantageous section states in an advantageous section, but regardless of the advantageous section state that is controlled at the end of the advantageous section, the target area at the end of the advantageous section and at the end of every game. All areas in the target area (AT related) are initialized, and no matter which advantageous section state is controlled at the end of the advantageous section, all information related to the advantageous section is initialized. can be converted into

[About the configuration of the main control section]
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is a microcomputer including a CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, and a RAM 41c, and operates based on a program. The programs include a system program that performs basic operations of the main control unit 41 and a user program created by a user (developer). The user program is stored in the ROM 41b, and after startup, the main control unit 41 starts processing based on the user program when the basic operation at startup is completed.

The main control unit 41 also includes an A register, a BC register, a DE register, and an HL register as registers in which values used in calculations are stored. It is possible to perform a maximum of 2-byte operation using the value stored in the address area.

The main control unit 41 also includes an F register in which a flag corresponding to the calculation result is stored. The flags stored in the F register are a zero flag that is set to 1 (ON) when the operation result is 0, a zero flag that is set to 0 (OFF) if it is other than 0, and a zero flag that is set when the operation result overflows. It includes a carry flag that is set to 1 (ON) and set to 0 (OFF) when there is no overflow.

The main control unit 41 also includes an I register in which a high-order address of an address (interrupt vector) to jump to when an interrupt occurs is stored, and when an interrupt occurs, the high-order address stored in the I register and the type of interrupt are stored. The interrupt vector table is caused to jump to an address consisting of a lower address stored in the interrupt vector table.

The main control unit 41 also includes a Q register in which an upper address is stored when specifying an address in a special instruction such as an LDQ instruction, which will be described later. You can specify an address consisting of a specified upper address and a specified lower address.

Further, the main control section 41 includes a built-in device register in which setting values of devices constituting the main control section 41 are stored, and it is possible to set these devices according to the set values in the built-in device register. There is.

Further, the main control unit 41 initializes the A register, BC register, DE register, HL register, F register, and I register by the system program at startup, and then starts processing based on the user program. Therefore, the user program starts with 00 (H) or 0000 (H) stored in the A register, BC register, DE register, HL register, F register, and I register.

The main control unit 41 also includes devices connected to the main control unit 41 via a data bus (segment indicators consisting of a plurality of LEDs, electrical components such as LEDs, solenoids, motors, drive circuits for these electrical components, etc.). It is equipped with an output port that outputs signals (driving signals for electrical components, driving command signals, commands, etc.) to the microcomputer, etc. The output ports include output ports 0 to 7, each of which can output an 8-bit parallel signal, and an output port 8, which can output a 3-bit parallel signal. Output ports 0 to 7 output an 8-bit or 16-bit parallel signal based on the data set in the A register or HL register from the specified output port by specifying the output port and executing the OUT command described later. be done. In addition, by specifying the output port 8 register among the built-in device registers and transferring 1 byte of data using the LD instruction described later, a 3-bit parallel signal based on the transferred data is sent to the output port 8. is output from.

[About 3-byte data division processing]
Next, the main control unit 41 executes 3 when calculating the 100% ratio using the divisor and dividend of up to 3 bytes in the accessory ratio update process, the continuous accessory ratio update process, and the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio update process. Byte data division processing will be explained.

The main control unit 41 stores the start address of the area of the RAM 41c where the dividend is stored in the HL register, stores the start address of the area of the RAM 41c where the divisor is stored in the DE register, and then executes 3-byte data division processing. By doing so, the value of dividend/divisor×100 is stored in the A register using the dividend and divisor specified from each address. The dividend and divisor are values of up to 3 bytes, and are stored in a continuous 3-byte area of the RAM 41c, and the value of the 1st byte is stored in the first address area of the continuous 3-byte area, and The value of the second byte is stored in the area of +1, and the value of the third byte is stored in the area of the start address +2. Therefore, specify the start address of the area where the dividend or divisor is stored, specify the 2-byte data to specify the 1st and 2nd byte values, specify the start address + 2 address, and specify the 1-byte data. It is possible to specify the value of the third byte by specifying the data.

In addition, the main control unit 41 prohibits interruptions during the execution of gaming machine information calculation processing in which each state count process, accessory ratio update process, continuous accessory ratio update process, and instruction-included accessory ratio update process are executed. This setting is such that interrupts are prohibited even during execution of 3-byte data division processing and processing for updating the divisor and dividend used in 3-byte data division processing.

39 and 40 are flowcharts showing the control details of the 3-byte data division process executed by the main control unit 41.

In the 3-byte data division process, first, the value of the DE register in which the first address of the divisor is stored is saved to the stack (Si1), the value of the DE register is cleared (Si2), and the value of the BC register is cleared ( Si3).

Next, store 100 in the A register (Si4), and set the value of the DE register to the 1st and 2nd bytes of the dividend obtained from the area of the RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (the first address of the dividend). Add the values (Si5).

Next, it is determined whether the addition result does not overflow (carry flag OFF) or not (Si6), and if the addition result overflows (carry flag ON), that is, if the addition result of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the dividend carries over. Then, proceed to the step of Si7, add 1 to the value of the C register, and if the addition result does not overflow (carry flag OFF), that is, if the addition result of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the dividend does not carry, add 1 to the value of the C register. Jump to the step. In step Si6, a jump instruction is executed to jump to a specified step when the carry flag is OFF, and when the addition result is no overflow (carry flag OFF), the process jumps to step Si8.

Next, in the step of Si8, the value of the A register is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether the subtraction result is not 0 (zero flag OFF) (Si9). If the subtraction result is 0 (zero flag ON), the value of Si10 is If the subtraction result is not 0 (zero flag is OFF), the process jumps to step Si5. In step Si9, a jump instruction is executed to jump to a specified step when the zero flag is OFF, and when the subtraction result is not 0 (zero flag is OFF), the process jumps to step Si5.

In Si4, 100 is stored in the A register, and in Si5 to Si7, the value of the A register is subtracted by 1 every time the first to second bytes of the dividend are added to the value of the DE register. The value of the second byte will be multiplied by 100. Furthermore, since the value of the C register is incremented by 1 each time there is a carry, the amount of the carry is reflected in the C register.

After multiplying the value of the first and second bytes of the dividend by 100 using Si4 to Si9, the process of adding 1 to the address stored in the HL register (the first address of the dividend) is performed twice (Si10, Si11), and the HL register is The address stored in is the start address of the dividend + 2 (address of the third byte of the dividend).

Next, 100 is stored in the A register (Si12), and the value of the third byte of the dividend obtained from the area of RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (first address of the dividend + 2) is set as the value of the C register. are added (Si13).

Next, it is determined whether the addition result does not overflow (carry flag OFF) or not (Si14), and if the addition result overflows (carry flag ON), that is, if the addition result of the third byte of the dividend is a carry, Proceeding to step Si15, add 1 to the value of the B register, and if the addition result does not overflow (carry flag OFF), that is, if the addition result of the third byte does not carry, jump to step Si16. In step Si14, a jump instruction is executed to jump to a specified step when the carry flag is OFF, and when the addition result is no overflow (carry flag OFF), the process jumps to step Si16.

Next, in the step of Si16, the value of the A register is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether the subtraction result is not 0 (zero flag OFF) (Si17). If the subtraction result is 0 (zero flag ON), the value of Si18 is If the subtraction result is not 0 (zero flag OFF), the process jumps to step Si13. In step Si17, a jump instruction is executed to jump to a specified step when the zero flag is OFF, and when the subtraction result is not 0 (zero flag is OFF), the process jumps to step Si13.

In Si12, 100 is stored in the A register, and in Si13 to Si15, the value of the A register is subtracted by 1 every time the third byte of the dividend is added to the value of the C register, so in Si13 to Si17, the value of the third byte of the dividend is The value will be multiplied by 100. Furthermore, since the value of the B register is incremented by 1 each time there is a carry, the amount of the carry is reflected in the B register. As a result, the dividend is multiplied by 100 in Si4 to Si17, the 1st and 2nd byte values of the 100 times the dividend are stored in the DE register, and the 3rd and 4th bytes of the 100 times the dividend are stored in the BC register. It will be stored.

After the dividend is multiplied by 100 in steps Si4 to Si17, the first address of the divisor saved in the stack is returned to the HL register (Si18). Next, the value of the A register is cleared by exclusive ORing the values of the A register (Si19), and the process of adding 1 to the address stored in the HL register (the first address of the divisor) is performed twice ( Si20, Si21), the address stored in the HL register is the starting address of the divisor + 2 (address of the third byte of the divisor).

Next, from the value of the C register, that is, the value of the 3rd byte of 100 times the dividend, the 3rd byte of the divisor obtained from the area of RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (starting address of the divisor + 2) The value of is subtracted (Si22).

Next, it is determined whether the subtraction result does not overflow (carry flag OFF) or not (Si23), and if the subtraction result overflows (carry flag ON), that is, the subtraction result of the third byte of the value 100 times the dividend is a digit. If so, proceed to step Si24, determine whether the value of the B register is 0 or not, and if the subtraction result is no overflow (carry flag OFF), that is, the subtraction result of the 3rd byte of the value 100 times the dividend is If the digit has not decreased, jump to step Si26. In step Si23, a jump instruction is executed to jump to a specified step when the carry flag is OFF, and when the subtraction result is no overflow (carry flag OFF), the process jumps to step Si26.

In Si24, if the value of the B register is not 0, that is, by lowering the value of the 4th byte of the 100 times the dividend stored in the B register, the value of the 3rd byte of the 100 times the dividend is changed to 3 of the divisor. If the value of the byte can be subtracted, proceed to step Si25, subtract 1 from the value of the B register, and in Si24, if the value of the B register is 0, that is, the value 100 times the dividend stored in the B register. If the value of the fourth byte cannot be subtracted and the value of the third byte of the divisor cannot be subtracted from the value of the third byte of 100 times the dividend, the process jumps to step Si35. At the step Si24, a jump instruction is executed to jump to the specified step when the value of the specified register is 0, thereby causing the jump to Si35 when the value of the B register is 0.

Next, the address stored in the HL register (starting address of the divisor + 2) is subtracted by 1 twice (Si26, Si27), and the address stored in the HL register is set as the starting address of the divisor.

Next, from the value of the DE register, that is, the value of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the 100 times value of the dividend, the 1st to 2nd bytes of the divisor obtained from the area of the RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (the first address of the divisor) are calculated. The value of the second byte is subtracted (Si28).

Next, it is determined whether the subtraction result has no overflow (carry flag OFF) or not (Si29), and if the subtraction result has overflowed (carry flag ON), that is, the subtraction result of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the value 100 times the dividend is If the digit is down, proceed to step Si30, determine whether the value of the BC register is 0 or not, and if the subtraction result is no overflow (carry flag OFF), that is, the 1st to 2nd bytes of the 100 times value of the dividend. If the subtraction result does not result in a digit, the process jumps to step Si32. In step Si29, a jump instruction is executed to jump to a specified step when the carry flag is OFF, and when the subtraction result is no overflow (carry flag OFF), the process jumps to step Si32.

In Si30, if the value of the BC register is not 0, in other words, by lowering the value of the 3rd to 4th bytes of the 100 times the dividend stored in the BC register, the value of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the 100 times the dividend is set. If the value of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the divisor can be subtracted from the value, proceed to step Si31, subtract 1 from the value of the BC register, and in Si30, if the value of the BC register is 0, that is, the value stored in the BC register. If the value of the 3rd to 4th bytes of the 100 times the dividend cannot be subtracted, and the value of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the divisor cannot be subtracted from the value of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the 100 times the dividend. , jump to step Si35. In the step of Si30, a jump instruction is executed to jump to the specified step when the value of the specified register is 0, and when the value of the BC register is 0, it is caused to jump to Si35.

After adding 1 to the value of the A register in Si32, it is determined whether the operation result is 0 (zero flag ON) or not (Si33). If the operation result is not 0 (zero flag OFF), the process advances to step Si34, and Si20 Jump to step. On the other hand, if the operation result in Si33 is 0 (zero flag ON), that is, if the value of the A register overflows due to the addition of Si32 and becomes 00 (H) from FF (H), the step of Si35 is Jump. At the step Si33, a jump instruction is executed to jump to a specified step when the zero flag is ON, and when the value of the A register becomes 0 due to addition of Si32, a jump is made to Si35.

The A register is cleared to 0 in Si19, and the result of subtracting the divisor in Si20 to Si34 is less than 0, and the process of repeatedly subtracting the divisor from the 100 times value of the dividend is performed until the result of subtracting the divisor becomes less than 0. The A register value is incremented by 1 each time the divisor is subtracted, so the A register contains the number of times the divisor was subtracted from 100 times the dividend until the result of subtracting the divisor is less than 0. The rate will be stored.

Also, if the value of the A register overflows and becomes 0 without the result of subtracting the divisor falling below 0, and the zero flag is set, that is, if the number of times the divisor is subtracted from the value 100 times the dividend reaches 256. , the process of subtracting the divisor from the 100 times value of the dividend ends in Si20 to Si34.

After completing the process of subtracting the divisor from the 100 times value of the dividend in Si20 to Si34, the value of the A register is compared with 100 (Si35). At this time, if the value of the A register is less than 100, the carry flag is ON and the zero flag is OFF, if the value of the A register is 100, the carry flag is OFF and the zero flag is ON, and if the value of the A register is over 100, the carry flag is ON. The flag becomes OFF, and the zero flag becomes OFF. If the value of the A register is 100 or more (carry flag OFF) in the comparison of Si35, 99 is stored in the A register (Si37), and the return instruction returns to the calling process. On the other hand, if the value of the A register is less than 100 in the Si35 comparison, the process jumps to the return instruction and returns to the calling process. As a result, if the value stored in the A register is 100 or more, it will be corrected to 99.

In this way, in the 3-byte division process, the dividend is first multiplied by 100, and then the divisor is repeatedly subtracted from the 100 times value of the dividend until the result of subtracting the divisor becomes less than 0. The number of times the divisor is subtracted from the 100 times value of the dividend is calculated as the 100th ratio of the dividend to the divisor.

Also, under normal circumstances, the dividend will never be larger than the divisor, and the number of times the divisor is subtracted from 100 times the dividend will exceed 100 until the result of subtracting the divisor is less than 0. The divisor is not subtracted from the value, but if the divisor is 0 or the divisor becomes an extremely small value as a result of data destruction, the divisor may be subtracted from the value 100 times the dividend. Even though the number of subtractions exceeds 100, the result of subtracting the divisor may not be less than 0. In such a case, the number of times the divisor is subtracted from 100 times the dividend is If a specific value (256) exceeding 100 is reached, it is determined that it is abnormal and the process of subtracting the divisor from the 100 times value of the dividend is terminated. This prevents the program from not completing.

Also, instead of counting the number of times the divisor has been subtracted from the 100 times value of the dividend to determine whether a specific value exceeding 100 has been reached, the number of times the divisor has been subtracted from the 100 times the dividend is stored. Taking advantage of the fact that the value of the A register overflows when subtracted 256 times and the zero flag turns ON when the value of the A register overflows as a result of an operation, when the A register overflows as a result of subtraction, It is determined that a specific value (256) exceeding 100 has been reached simply by determining whether or not the zero flag that is set to ON is turned ON. For this reason, each time the divisor is subtracted from the 100 times value of the dividend, a number with a specific value as the initial value is subtracted, and when the number becomes 0, it is determined that the number of subtractions has reached a specific value, The program capacity can be reduced compared to a method in which the number of subtractions is compared with a specific value, and if the comparison results match, it is determined that the number of subtractions has reached a specific value. In addition, by using the fact that the carry flag turns ON when the value of the A register overflows as a result of an operation, it is possible to check whether the carry flag, which turns ON when the A register overflows as a result of subtraction, has turned ON. By making this determination, it may be determined that a specific value (256) exceeding 100 has been reached.

In addition, after subtracting the divisor from 100 times the dividend, if the zero flag is ON, a jump instruction that jumps to the specified program can be used to specify a specific value ( 256), it is determined that there is an abnormality and the process of subtracting the divisor from the value 100 times the dividend is terminated, and the first jump instruction is used to determine whether the zero flag is ON or not and to detect the abnormality. It becomes possible to move to the program associated with the program.

Also, before executing the 3-byte data division process, the start address of the area of RAM 41c where the dividend is stored is stored in the HL register, the start address of the area of RAM 41c where the divisor is stored is stored in the DE register, and the 3-byte data is stored in the DE register. In byte data division processing, the dividend is specified from the address stored in the HL register, and the divisor is specified from the address stored in the DE register, but in 3-byte division processing, the dividend is multiplied by 100. The storage address of the divisor stored in the DE register before is saved to the stack, and the DE register in which the storage address of the divisor is stored is used for the process of multiplying the dividend by 100, and after the process of multiplying the dividend by 100, the stack is saved. By restoring the divisor address that was saved in The value 100 times the dividend can be calculated using the register in which the address is stored.

The main control unit 41 is capable of a maximum of 2-byte calculations, but since the dividend and divisor can be 3-byte values, the main control unit 41 also performs processing for multiplying the dividend by 100 and subtracting the divisor from the 100-fold value of the dividend. , the calculations for the 1st and 2nd bytes and the calculations for the 3rd byte are performed separately, and even if the divisor or the 100 times value of the dividend exceeds the 2 bytes that can be calculated, the calculation of the dividend relative to the divisor is Percentages can be calculated.

Further, the percentage of the dividend to the divisor will be displayed on the two-digit display of the gaming machine information display 50, but if the number of times the divisor is subtracted from the 100 times value of the dividend is 100 or more, , 99, and if the percentage of the dividend to the divisor calculated from the number of times the divisor is subtracted from the 100 times value of the dividend is 100 or more, it will be displayed on a two-digit display. Even if the value is 99, which is the maximum value that can be displayed, it is displayed as 99, so it can be recognized that the percentage of the dividend to the divisor is a large value of 99% or more.

In addition, interrupts are prohibited during 3-byte data division processing and processing to update the divisor and dividend used in 3-byte data division processing, and the period during which the divisor and dividend are updated and the divisor By executing interrupt processing during the period in which the percentage of the dividend is calculated, it is possible to prevent the divisor, the dividend, and the numerical values used in calculating the percentage of the dividend with respect to the divisor from being destroyed and becoming unintended numerical values.

[About a modified example of 3-byte data division processing]
Next, a modification of the 3-byte data division process will be described.

In the 3-byte data division process of this embodiment, the dividend is first multiplied by 100, and then the divisor is repeatedly subtracted from the 100 times value of the dividend until the result of subtracting the divisor is less than 0. The number of times the divisor is subtracted from the 100 times value of the dividend until it becomes less than 0 is calculated as the 100th ratio of the dividend to the divisor.In contrast, in the modified example of 3-byte data division processing, the dividend is first multiplied by 200, and then the divisor is The divisor is repeatedly subtracted from the 200 times the dividend until the result of subtracting it is less than 0, and the number of times the divisor is subtracted from the 200 times the dividend is halved until the result of subtracting the divisor is less than 0. The multiplied value is calculated as a 100% ratio of the dividend to the divisor.

FIGS. 41 and 42 are flowcharts showing control details of a modified example of 3-byte data division processing. Note that only the differences from the 3-byte data division processing shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 will be explained here.

In a modified example of 3-byte division processing, 200 is stored in the A register in Si4, and 1 is subtracted from the value in the A register each time the first to second bytes of the dividend are added to the value in the DE register in Si5 to Si7. Therefore, in Si4 to Si9, the values of the first and second bytes of the dividend are multiplied by 200. Also, in Si12, 200 is stored in the A register, and in Si13 to Si15, the value of the A register is subtracted by 1 every time the third byte of the dividend is added to the value of the C register, so in Si13 to Si17, 3 of the dividend is The value of the byte will be multiplied by 200. As a result, the dividend is multiplied by 200 in Si4 to Si17, the 1st and 2nd byte values of the 200 times the dividend are stored in the DE register, and the 3rd and 4th bytes of the 200 times the dividend are stored in the BC register. It will be stored.

In addition, in a modified example of 3-byte division processing, the A register is cleared to 0 in Si19, and the result of subtracting the divisor in Si20 to Si34 is less than 0, and the divisor is subtracted from the 200 times value of the dividend until it becomes impossible to subtract with the divisor next time. is repeatedly subtracted, and each time the divisor is subtracted, the value of the A register is incremented by 1. Therefore, the divisor is subtracted from the 200 times value of the dividend until the result of subtracting the divisor is less than 0. The number of times it has been performed is stored. Also, after the process of subtracting the divisor from the 200 times value of the dividend in Si20 to Si34 is completed, the process jumps to the step of Si34.5, and in Si34.5, the value of the A register is shifted to the right by 1 bit. By doing so, by multiplying the number of times the divisor is subtracted from the 200 times value of the dividend by 1/2 until the value of the A register, that is, the result of subtracting the divisor, is less than 0, the value of the dividend divided by the divisor is stored in the A register. The rate will be stored.

Also, if the value of the A register overflows and becomes 0 without the result of subtracting the divisor falling below 0, and the zero flag is set, that is, if the number of times the divisor is subtracted from 200 times the dividend reaches 256. , the process of subtracting the divisor from the 200 times value of the dividend ends in Si20 to Si34.

In this modified example of 3-byte division processing, first the dividend is multiplied by 200, and then the divisor is repeatedly subtracted from the 200 times value of the dividend until the result of subtracting the divisor is less than 0, and the result of subtracting the divisor is The value obtained by multiplying the number of times the divisor is subtracted from the 200 times value of the dividend by 1/2 until becomes less than 0 is calculated as the 100th ratio of the dividend to the divisor. This makes it possible to calculate a more accurate ratio than calculating the number of times the divisor is subtracted from 100 times the dividend until the result of subtracting the divisor becomes less than 0 as a 100% ratio of the dividend to the divisor.

Also, under normal circumstances, the dividend will never be larger than the divisor, and the number of times the divisor is subtracted from 200 times the dividend will exceed 200 until the result of subtracting the divisor is less than 0. The divisor is not subtracted from the value, but if the divisor is 0 or the divisor becomes an extremely small value as a result of data destruction, the divisor may be subtracted from a value 200 times the dividend. Even though the number of subtractions exceeds 200, the result of subtracting the divisor may not be less than 0. In such a case, the number of times the divisor is subtracted from 200 times the dividend is When a specific value (256) exceeding 200 is reached, it is determined that it is abnormal and the process of subtracting the divisor from the 200 times value of the dividend is terminated. This prevents the program from not completing.

Also, instead of counting the number of times the divisor has been subtracted from the 200 times value of the dividend to determine whether a specific value exceeding 200 has been reached, the number of times the divisor has been subtracted from the 200 times value of the dividend is stored. Taking advantage of the fact that the value of the A register overflows when subtracted 256 times and the zero flag turns ON when the value of the A register overflows as a result of an operation, when the A register overflows as a result of subtraction, It is determined that a specific value (256) exceeding 200 has been reached by simply determining whether the zero flag that is set to ON has been turned ON. For this reason, each time the divisor is subtracted from the 200 times value of the dividend, a numerical value with a specific value as the initial value is subtracted, and when the numerical value becomes 0, it is determined that the number of subtractions has reached a specific value, The program capacity can be reduced compared to a method in which the number of subtractions is compared with a specific value, and if the comparison results match, it is determined that the number of subtractions has reached a specific value. In addition, by using the fact that the carry flag turns ON when the value of the A register overflows as a result of an operation, it is possible to check whether the carry flag, which turns ON when the A register overflows as a result of subtraction, is turned ON. By making this determination, it may be determined that a specific value (256) exceeding 200 has been reached.

In addition, after subtracting the divisor from 200 times the dividend, if the zero flag is ON, a jump instruction that jumps to the specified program can be used to specify a specific value ( 256), it is determined that there is an abnormality and the process of subtracting the divisor from the 200 times value of the dividend is terminated.The first jump instruction determines whether the zero flag is ON or not, and the abnormality is determined. It becomes possible to move to the program associated with the program.

Also, before executing the 3-byte data division process, the start address of the area of RAM 41c where the dividend is stored is stored in the HL register, the start address of the area of RAM 41c where the divisor is stored is stored in the DE register, and the 3-byte data is stored in the DE register. In byte data division processing, the dividend is specified from the address stored in the HL register, and the divisor is specified from the address stored in the DE register, but in 3-byte division processing, the dividend is multiplied by 200. The storage address of the divisor stored in the DE register before is saved to the stack, and the DE register in which the storage address of the divisor is stored is used to multiply the dividend by 200, and after the process of multiplying the dividend by 200, the stack is saved. By restoring the divisor address that was saved in The value 200 times the dividend can be calculated using the register in which the address is stored.

The main control unit 41 is capable of a maximum of 2-byte arithmetic operations, but since the dividend and divisor can be 3-byte values, the main control unit 41 also performs processing for multiplying the dividend by 200 and subtracting the divisor from the 200-fold value of the dividend. , the calculations for the 1st and 2nd bytes and the calculations for the 3rd byte are performed separately, and even if the divisor or the 200 times value of the dividend exceeds the 2 bytes that can be calculated, the calculation of the dividend relative to the divisor is Percentages can be calculated.

In addition, the percentage of the dividend to the divisor will be displayed on the two-digit display of the gaming machine information display 50, and it will be a value obtained by multiplying the number of times the divisor is subtracted from 200 times the dividend by 1/2. is 100 or more, it is corrected to 99, and if the value of the percentage of the dividend to the divisor calculated from the number of times the divisor is subtracted from the 200 times value of the dividend is 100 or more, Even when displayed on a two-digit display, the maximum value that can be displayed is 99, so it can be recognized that the percentage of the dividend to the divisor is a large value of 99% or more.

[About 3-byte data addition/storage processing]
Next, the main control unit 41 performs each state count process, accessory ratio update process, continuous accessory ratio update process, and instruction-included accessory ratio update process to determine the accessory payout ratio, the continuous accessory payout ratio, and the instruction-included accessory ratio. This can be executed when adding the 3-byte data used to calculate the payout ratio, and is especially useful when there is a possibility that the data after addition will overflow, such as the number of games played (total cumulative number) or the total cumulative number of coins paid out. The 3-byte data addition/storage process will be explained.

The main control unit 41 stores the start address of the area of the RAM 41c in which the data to be added is stored in the HL register, stores the added value in the DE register, and then executes the 3-byte data addition/storage process. The addition value stored in the DE register is added to the addition target data specified from the address stored in the register, and if the addition result overflows, the addition target data is changed to the value before adding the addition value. When the data is returned and the carry flag is turned ON, it is specified that an overflow will occur due to addition of the data to be added. The data to be added is a value of up to 3 bytes, and is stored in a continuous 3-byte area of the RAM 41c, and the value of the 1st byte is stored in the first address area of the continuous 3-byte area, and The value of the second byte is stored in the area of +1, and the value of the third byte is stored in the area of start address +2. Therefore, specify the start address of the area where the addition target address is stored, specify the 2-byte data to specify the 1st and 2nd byte values, specify the start address + 2 address, and specify the 1-byte data. It is possible to specify the value of the third byte by specifying the data.

In addition, the main control unit 41 prohibits interruptions during the execution of gaming machine information calculation processing in which each state count process, accessory ratio update process, continuous accessory ratio update process, and instruction-included accessory ratio update process are executed. This is set so that interrupts are prohibited even during execution of 3-byte data addition/storage processing.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the control details of the 3-byte data addition/storage process executed by the main control unit 41.

In the 3-byte data addition/storage process, first, the values of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data are obtained from the area of the RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (the first address of the addition target data). , is stored in the BC register (Sj1).

Next, the addition value stored in the DE register is added to the value of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data stored in the BC register (Sj2), and the value of the BC register is added to the address stored in the HL register. (Sj3 ).

Next, it is determined whether the addition result of the first to second bytes of the addition target data in Sj2 has overflowed (carry flag ON) (Sj4), and if the addition result does not overflow (carry flag OFF), that is, the addition target data If the addition result of the first and second bytes of data does not carry over, a return instruction returns to the calling process. In step Sj4, a return instruction is executed to return to the calling process when the carry flag is OFF, thereby returning to the calling process when the addition result is no overflow (carry flag is OFF).

Also, if the addition result overflows in Sj4 (carry flag ON), that is, if the addition result of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the addition target data carries over, proceed to step Sj5, invert the carry flag and clear it. Then, the carry flag is turned OFF.

Next, the process of adding 1 to the address stored in the HL register (the starting address of the data to be added) is performed twice (Sj6, Sj7), and the address stored in the HL register is added to the starting address of the data to be added + 2. (address of the third byte of the data to be added).

Next, 1 is added to the value of the area of the RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (address of the 3rd byte of the data to be added), that is, the value of the 3rd byte of the data to be added (Sj8). ~Reflect the carry due to the addition of the second byte.

Next, it is determined whether the addition result of the third byte of the addition target data in Sj8 has no overflow (zero flag OFF) (Sj9), and if the addition result has no overflow (zero flag OFF), that is, the 3rd byte of the addition target data If the result of the second addition does not carry over, the return instruction returns to the calling process. In step Sj9, a return instruction is executed to return to the calling process when the zero flag is OFF, thereby returning to the calling process when the addition result is no overflow (zero flag is OFF).

In addition, if the addition result overflows in Sj9 (zero flag ON), that is, if the addition result of the third byte of the addition target data carries over, and no further update is possible, proceed to step Sj10, The value of the area of the RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (address of the 3rd byte of the data to be added), that is, the value of the 3rd byte of the data to be added, is subtracted by 1 (Sj10), and the result is 1 to 2 bytes. This is the value before the carry due to the addition of the second is reflected.

Next, the process of subtracting 1 from the address stored in the HL register (starting address of the data to be added + 2) is performed twice (Sj11, Sj12), and the address stored in the HL register is set as the starting address of the data to be added. (address of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the data to be added).

Next, the added value stored in the DE register is subtracted from the value of the first and second bytes of the addition target data stored in the BC register (Sj13). In the BC register, the value obtained by adding the addition value of the DE register to the 1st to 2nd byte values of the addition target data in Sj2 is held without being cleared, so the value stored in the BC register is stored in the DE register. By subtracting the addition value stored in , the value of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data before addition is obtained. Further, since the subtraction result of Sj13 will definitely overflow, the carry flag will be turned ON.

Next, by storing the value of the BC register in the area of the RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (the first address of the data to be added), 1 to 2 bytes of the data to be added are stored in the RAM 41c. The eye value is returned to the data before the addition value was added (Sj14).

Next, a return instruction is executed to return to the calling process.

In this way, in the 3-byte data addition/storage process, the addition value stored in the DE register is added to the addition target data specified from the address stored in the HL register, and if the addition result overflows, The data to be added is returned to the value before adding the additional value, and the accessory payout ratio, continuous accessory payout ratio, and instructed accessory payout ratio are calculated using unintended data. can be prevented. In particular, it is possible to prevent an inaccurate ratio from being calculated due to the dividend being larger than the divisor when calculating the ratio as a result of overflow of 3 bytes of data.

In addition, if the addition result overflows, the carry flag will turn ON at the end of the 3-byte data addition/storage process, indicating that there is a high possibility that an overflow will occur when the addition target data is subsequently added. is specified, and thereafter, by restricting the addition of the corresponding data, unnecessary processing can be avoided.

Furthermore, although the main control unit 41 is capable of arithmetic operations using a maximum of 2 bytes, the data to be added is a value that can be 3 bytes. After the addition of the 2nd byte, if the addition result of the 1st and 2nd bytes overflows, the 3rd byte of the data to be added is added, and the data to be added is 2 bytes that can be operated on. Even if it exceeds , the addition target data can be added.

In addition, if the addition result overflows after adding the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data, the carry flag turns ON, making it possible to identify the overflow, and then clearing the carry flag. After turning OFF, the third byte of the addition target data is added. After clearing a specific flag that turns ON when the addition result of the first to second bytes of addition target data overflows, the addition is performed. Since the third byte of the target data is added, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the addition result of the third byte of the target data has overflowed using the specific flag.

In addition, after the addition of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the data to be added, the value of the BC register used for the addition of the 1st and 2nd bytes is not cleared and is held, and the value of the 3rd byte of the data to be added is If addition is performed and the addition result of the 3rd byte overflows, the value of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data is returned to the value before addition using the value of the BC register, and the addition target data is Since there is no need to read the numerical value when returning the data to the value before addition, the program can be simplified.

In addition, interrupts are prohibited while the 3-byte data addition/storage process is being executed, and if the interrupt process is executed during the period when the addition target data is being updated, the addition target data will be destroyed. It is possible to prevent the ratio from being calculated using unintended numerical values.

[About 3-byte data 1-byte addition process]
Next, it can be executed when the main control unit 41 adds 3 bytes of data in the accessory ratio update process, the continuous accessory ratio update process, and the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio update process. ), 3-byte data 1 byte to be executed when there is no possibility that the data after addition will overflow, such as accessory payout (6000 cumulative), continuous accessory payout (6000 cumulative), instruction-inclusive accessory payout (6000 cumulative), etc. Addition processing will be explained.

The main control unit 41 stores the start address of the area of the RAM 41c in which the data to be added is stored in the HL register, stores the added value in the B register, and then executes 3-byte data 1-byte addition processing. The addition value stored in the B register is added to the addition target data specified from the address stored in the register. The data to be added is a maximum of 3 bytes, and is stored in a continuous 3-byte area of the RAM 41c.The value of the 1st byte is stored in the first address area of the continuous 3-byte area, and the first address is The value of the second byte is stored in the area of +1, and the value of the third byte is stored in the area of the start address +2. Therefore, specify the start address of the area where the addition target address is stored, specify the 2-byte data to specify the 1st and 2nd byte values, specify the start address + 2 address, and specify the 1-byte data. It is possible to specify the value of the third byte by specifying the data.

In addition, the main control unit 41 prohibits interruptions during the execution of gaming machine information calculation processing in which each state count process, accessory ratio update process, continuous accessory ratio update process, and instruction-included accessory ratio update process are executed. This is set so that interrupts are prohibited even during execution of 3-byte data 1-byte addition processing.

FIG. 44(a) is a flowchart showing the control details of the 3-byte data 1-byte addition process executed by the main control unit 41.

In the 1-byte addition process of 3-byte data, first, 1 is stored in the C register (Sk1), which is used for carrying, and data is added from the area of the RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (the first address of the data to be added). The values of the first and second bytes of the acquired addition target data are acquired and stored in the DE register (Sk2).

Next, the added value stored in the B register is stored in the A register (Sk3), and the added value stored in the A register is added to the 1st and 2nd byte values of the addition target data stored in the DE register. (Sk4), by storing the value of the DE register in the area of the RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (the first address of the data to be added), the data 1 to 1 of the data to be added stored in the RAM 41c are The value of the second byte is updated to data to which the addition value has been added (Sk5).

Next, it is determined whether the addition result of the first to second bytes of the addition target data in Sk4 has overflowed (carry flag ON) (Sk6), and if the addition result has overflowed (carry flag ON), that is, the addition target data If the addition result of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the data is a carry, jump to step Sk8, and if the addition result has no overflow (carry flag OFF), that is, the addition result of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the addition target data. If it does not carry over, the process proceeds to step Sk7, stores 0 in the C register, and then proceeds to step Sk8. In step Sk6, a jump instruction is executed to jump to a specified step when the carry flag is ON, and when the addition result overflows (carry flag is ON), the process jumps to step Sk8.

At Sk8, the carry flag is cleared and turned OFF. Next, the process of adding 1 to the address stored in the HL register (the starting address of the data to be added) is performed twice (Sk9, Sk10), and the address stored in the HL register is set to the starting address of the data to be added + 2. (address of the third byte of the data to be added).

Next, obtain the value of the area of RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (address of the 3rd byte of the data to be added), that is, the value of the 3rd byte of the data to be added, and add it to the value of the C register. (Sk11), and stores the value of the C register after the addition in the area of the RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (address of the third byte of the data to be added). The value of the third byte of the addition target data is updated to the value of the C register (Sk12). At this time, if the addition result overflows in Sk6 (carry flag ON), that is, if the addition result of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the addition target data carries over, 1 is stored in the C register, so the addition The carry caused by the addition of the 1st and 2nd bytes is reflected in the value of the 3rd byte of the target data. On the other hand, if the addition result does not overflow in Sk6 (carry flag is OFF), that is, if the addition result of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data does not carry, 0 is stored in the C register, so the addition The value of the third byte of the target data does not change.

Next, the value of the HL register is incremented by 1 (Sk13), and this is set as the start address of the next data to be added, and a return instruction is used to return to the calling process.

In this manner, in the 3-byte data 1-byte addition process, the addition value stored in the B register is added to the addition target data specified from the address stored in the HL register.

Also, regardless of whether the value of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the data to be added is carried over or not, if the value of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the data to be added does not carry up after setting the C register to 1, changes the value of the C register from 1 to 0 by setting 0 to the C register, and then changes the value of the C register from 1 to 0 regardless of whether the value of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the data to be added carries up or not. By performing the process of adding the value of to the value of the 3rd byte of the data to be added, if the value of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the data to be added carries up, the value of the 3rd byte of the data to be added is 1 is added and the carry is reflected, but if the value of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data does not carry, the value of the 3rd byte of the addition target data does not change, and the addition Even if the value of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the target data carries up, or if the value of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the addition target data does not carry up, set the C register to 1. By performing a common process of adding the value added to the value of the third byte of the data to be added, if the value of the first to second bytes of the data to be added carries up, the value added to the third byte of the data to be added is 1 can be added to the value of , and if the value of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data does not carry over, the value of the 3rd byte of the addition target data can be prevented from being updated.

Therefore, when performing 1-byte addition of 3-byte data, if the 1st and 2nd byte values of the addition target data do not carry over, as shown in FIG. 44(b), Sk1, Sk2, Sk3 , Sk4, Sk5, Sk6, Sk7, Sk8, Sk9, Sk10, Sk11, Sk12, and Sk13 are executed, and when the value of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data is carried over, as shown in FIG. 44(c) As shown in the figure, the steps Sk1, Sk2, Sk3, Sk4, Sk5, Sk6, Sk8, Sk9, Sk10, Sk11, Sk12, and Sk13 are executed, and the value of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the data to be added is a digit. All steps constituting the 3-byte data 1-byte addition process are executed without waiting for the data to rise.

In addition, interrupts are prohibited while the 3-byte data 1-byte addition process is being executed, and if the interrupt process is executed during the period when the addition target data is updated, the addition target data will be destroyed. This can prevent unintended numbers from occurring.

In addition, if the addition result overflows after adding the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data, the carry flag turns ON, making it possible to identify the overflow, and then clearing the carry flag. After turning OFF, the third byte of the addition target data is added. After clearing a specific flag that turns ON when the addition result of the first to second bytes of addition target data overflows, the addition is performed. Since the third byte of the target data is added, each time the operation result overflows, it can be determined accurately using the carry flag.

[About conventional 3-byte data addition processing]
FIG. 45(a) is a flowchart showing control details of conventional 3-byte data addition processing. In the conventional 3-byte data addition process, it is assumed that the start address of the area of the RAM 41c in which the data to be added is stored is stored in the HL register, and the added value is stored in the DE register.

In conventional 3-byte data addition processing, first, the values of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data are obtained from the area of the RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (the first address of the addition target data). , is stored in the BC register (Sk001).

Next, the addition value stored in the DE register is added to the value of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data stored in the BC register (Sk002), and the value of the BC register is added to the address stored in the HL register. (Sk003 ).

Next, it is determined whether the addition result of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data in Sk002 has overflowed (carry flag ON) (Sk004), and if the addition result does not overflow (carry flag OFF), that is, the addition target If the addition result of the 1st and 2nd bytes of data does not carry over, jump to step Sk010 and add 1 to the address stored in the HL register (the first address of the data to be added) three times. (Sk010, Sk011, Sk012) are the start addresses of the next data to be added, and the return command returns to the calling process.

If the addition result overflows in Sk002 (carry flag ON), that is, if the addition result of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the addition target data carries over, proceed to step Sk005, clear the carry flag, and set the carry flag to Turn it OFF.

Next, the process of adding 1 to the address stored in the HL register (the starting address of the data to be added) is performed twice (Sk006, Sk007), and the address stored in the HL register is set to the starting address of the data to be added + 2. (address of the third byte of the data to be added).

Next, 1 is added to the value of the area of the RAM 41c specified by the address stored in the HL register (address of the 3rd byte of the data to be added), that is, the value of the 3rd byte of the data to be added (Sk008). ~Reflect the carry due to the addition of the second byte.

Next, the process advances to Sk009, jumps to Sk012, adds 1 to the value of the HL register, sets it as the start address of the next data to be added, and uses a return instruction to return to the calling process.

In this way, in conventional 3-byte data addition processing, if the addition result of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data carries over, the value of the 3rd byte is added, while the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data are added. If the addition result of the ~2nd byte does not carry over, the process of adding the value of the 3rd byte is not performed.

Therefore, when performing the conventional 3-byte data addition process, if the 1st and 2nd byte values of the addition target data do not carry over, as shown in FIG. 45(b), Sk001, Sk002, Sk003 , Sk004, Sk010, Sk011, and Sk012 are executed, and when the values of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data carry over, as shown in FIG. 45(c), the steps Sk001, Sk002, Sk003, and Sk004 , Sk005, Sk006, Sk007, Sk008, Sk009, and Sk012 are executed until the value of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data carries over, that is, the addition target data whose update started from 0 Steps Sk005, Sk006, Sk007, Sk008, and Sk009 are not executed until the value changes from 00FFFF (H) to 010000 (H).

[About program confirmation]
In gaming machines such as slot machines and pachinko gaming machines, if an unused program is included, there is a possibility that fraudulent activities such as causing unauthorized operations to be performed using the program may be carried out, so the ROM 41b is It is required that all programs stored in the ROM 41b be executed, and it is necessary to perform a test to confirm that all programs stored in the ROM 41b are executed. The programs stored in the ROM 41b can be identified by the address of the area where the program is stored, and in a test to confirm that all programs are being executed, the program is executed and the program is stored. By checking for each address of the area whether or not the program stored in the storage area (address area) of each address has been executed, it is possible to confirm that all programs stored in the ROM 41b are being executed. It has become.

When conducting a test to confirm that all programs are being executed, if the addition result of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data carries over as in the conventional 3-byte data addition process, While performing the process of adding the value of the 3rd byte, if the addition result of the 1st and 2nd bytes of the addition target data does not carry over and the process of adding the value of the 3rd byte is not performed, the addition target data The program is stored in a part of the address area until the value of the 1st and 2nd bytes of is carried up, that is, until the addition target data whose update started from 0 changes from 00FFFF (H) to 010000 (H). (Programs Sk005 to Sk009) are not executed, so confirm that all programs that make up the 3-byte data addition process are executed until the addition target data changes from 00FFFF (H) to 010000 (H). This means that it will take a lot of time to complete the test.

On the other hand, in the 3-byte data 1-byte addition process of this embodiment, even if the 1st to 2nd byte values of the addition target data carry up, the 1st to 2nd byte values of the addition target data also carry up. Even if this is not the case, by setting 1 in the C register and running a common program (Sk8 to Sk12 program) that adds the value set in the C register to the value of the third byte of the data to be added, If the value of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the data to be added carries up, 1 is added to the value of the 3rd byte of the data to be added, but the value of the 1st to 2nd bytes of the data to be added does not carry up. In this case, the value of the third byte of the addition target data can be prevented from being updated, so without waiting for the addition target data whose update started from 0 changes from 00FFFF (H) to 010000 (H), By executing a program that adds the value set in the C register to the value of the third byte of the addition target data, a program for 3-byte data addition processing including the address area where the programs Sk8 to Sk12 are stored is stored. It can be confirmed that all programs in the specified address area have been executed, and the time required to complete the test can be significantly reduced.

[About instructions that can be executed by the user program]
The instructions that the main control unit 41 of this embodiment can execute in the user program are an OUT instruction to output a signal from output ports 0 to 7, a clear instruction to clear a specified register and store 0, and a specified address in the RAM 41c. area, an LD instruction to transfer data to a specified register, and a jump instruction to jump to a specified address.

As shown in FIG. 46, the OUT command includes a 1-byte OUT command (OUT (mn), A) that outputs a 1-byte parallel signal from one output port selected from output ports 0 to 7, and . . . , a 2-byte OUT instruction (OUT (mn), HL) for outputting a 2-byte parallel signal from two output ports selected from among the two output ports.

In the 1-byte OUT instruction (OUT (mn), A), by specifying the address of one of output ports 0 to 7 in mn, the 1-byte OUT command set in the A register is sent from the specified output port. It is possible to output an 8-bit parallel signal based on data (data in which OFF/ON (0: OFF, 1: ON) of the bit corresponding to each signal is set).

In the 2-byte OUT instruction (OUT (mn), HL), by specifying the address of the first output port of two consecutive output ports among output ports 0 to 7 in mn, the specified two output ports From this, it is possible to output a 16-bit parallel signal based on the 2-byte data set in the HL register (data in which OFF/ON (0: OFF, 1: ON) of the bit corresponding to each signal is set). can.

The clear instruction is the CLR instruction (CLR HL) that clears by storing 00 (H) or 0000 (H) in the specified register, and the exclusive OR operation (XOR) of the A registers to clear 00 (H). This includes an XOR instruction (XOR A) that clears the A register by doing so.

The LD instruction specifies an address or register and transfers data to the specified address area or specified register, and by specifying the lower address, the upper address set in the Q register and the specified lower address (k ), and the LDQ instruction that transfers data to the specified address area set in a specific register, transfers the data in the specified register to the address area set in the specific register, and moves the address set in the specific register by 2 bytes. and an LDIN instruction to update the address to the next address.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the LD instruction includes a first LD instruction (LDQ (k),n, LD I, n, etc.) and a second LD instruction (LDQ (k), A, LD I, A, etc.) that transfers 1 byte of data set in the A register to a specified address area or specified register. Since the second LD instruction does not include data to be transferred in the program, the program capacity of the second LD instruction is smaller than that of the first LD instruction.

The jump instructions include a JR instruction that causes a jump to a specified address, and a DJNZ instruction that subtracts a value stored in the B register and causes a jump to a specified address when the subtraction result becomes 0.

[About initializing the output port]
The main control unit 41 starts the user program and performs processing to initialize the output port in the main processing for advancing the game performed after the startup processing described later and in the power interruption processing performed when a power interruption is detected. .

FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a process in which the main control unit 41 initializes a plurality of output ports when turning off the display devices such as the display devices 12L and 12R forming the game auxiliary display device 12, etc., in the main process, for example. It is.

In this case, the main control unit 41 first clears the A register to 00 (H) using an XOR instruction (XOR A) (Sp11).

Next, output port 5 is initialized based on the data set in the A register by a 1-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT05), A) (OUTPORT05: address of output port 5), and the signal output from output port 5 is are all set to OFF (00(H)) (Sp12).

Next, output port 4 is initialized based on the data set in the A register by a 1-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT04), A) (OUTPORT04: address of output port 4), and the signal output from output port 4 is are all set to OFF (00(H)) (Sp13).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart of a process in which the main control unit 41 initializes a plurality of output ports in the power outage process.

In this case, the main control unit 41 first clears the A register to 00 (H) using an The output port 3 is initialized based on the data set in the A register by the address of the port 3, and all signals output from the output port 3 are turned OFF (00 (H)) (Sp22).

Next, clear the HL register with the CLR instruction (CLR HL) and set the value of the HL register to 0000 (H) (Sp23), and then write the 2-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT00), HL) (OUTPORT00: address of output port 0). ), the output ports 0 and 1 are initialized based on the data set in the HL register, and all signals output from the output ports 0 and 1 are turned OFF (0000 (H)) (Sp24).

Next, output port 2 is initialized based on the data set in the A register by the 1-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT02), A) (OUTPORT02: address of output port 2), and the signal output from output port 2 is are all set to OFF (00(H)) (Sp25).

Next, output port 4 is initialized based on the data set in the A register by a 1-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT04), A) (OUTPORT04: address of output port 4), and the signal output from output port 4 is are all set to OFF (00(H)) (Sp26).

Next, output ports 5 and 6 are initialized based on the data set in the HL register by the 2-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT05), HL) (OUTPORT05: address of output port 5), and output ports 5 and 6 are All output signals are turned OFF (0000 (H)) (Sp27).

Next, output port 7 is initialized based on the data set in the A register by a 1-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT07), A) (OUTPORT07: address of output port 7), and the signal output from output port 7 is are all set to OFF (00(H)) (Sp28).

In this way, when the main control unit 41 initializes the output port in the main process for proceeding with the game that is performed after the startup process or in the power outage process that is performed when a power outage is detected, the A After clearing the register to 00 (H), by specifying the output port and issuing a 1-byte OUT command, the specified output port can be initialized based on the data set in the A register.

In addition, when initializing multiple output ports during main processing or power-off processing, clear the A register to 00 (H) using an XOR instruction, then specify the output port and issue a 1-byte OUT instruction. This allows you to initialize the specified output port based on the data set in the A register, and then specify another output port without having to perform any processing that changes the value of the A register, including the XOR instruction that clears the A register. By executing a 1-byte OUT command to initialize another specified output port based on the data set in the A register, it is possible to initialize multiple output ports during main processing or power-off processing. The number of instructions can be reduced.

In addition, when initializing two consecutive output ports in main processing or power-off processing, clear the HL register with the CLR instruction to 0000 (H), then specify the first output port and use 2 bytes. By executing the OUT command, two consecutive output ports including the specified output port can be initialized based on the data set in the HL register.

In addition, when initializing multiple sets of two consecutive output ports in main processing or power-off processing, clear the HL register to 0000 (H) using the CLR command, and then specify the first output port. Initialize two consecutive output ports including the specified output port based on the data set in the HL register by executing a 2-byte OUT command, and then initialize the value of the HL register including the CLR command to clear the HL register. By specifying another output port and executing a 2-byte OUT command without performing any processing to change the By initializing, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions when initializing a plurality of sets of two consecutive output ports in main processing or power-off processing.

[About startup process]
After startup, the main control section 41 initializes the A register, BC register, DE register, HL register, F register, and I register in the basic operation at startup, and then starts processing based on the user program. In the user program executed by the main control unit 41, startup processing is first performed. Embodiments 1 to 4 of the startup process will be described below.

[About the startup process of Embodiment 1]
As shown in FIG. 49, in the startup process of the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 first sets interrupt prohibition (Sq1). Next, use the XOR instruction (XOR A) to clear the A register and set the value of the A register to 00 (H) (Sq2), and use the CLR instruction (CLR HL) to clear the HL register and set the value of the HL register to 0000 (Sq2). H) (Sq3).

Next, output port 0 is initialized based on the data set in the A register by a 1-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT00), A) (OUTPORT00: address of output port 0), and the signal output from output port 0 is are all OFF (00 (H)) (Sq4).

Next, output ports 3 and 4 are initialized based on the data set in the HL register by the 2-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT03), HL) (OUTPORT03: address of output port 3), and output ports 3 and 4 are All output signals are turned OFF (0000 (H)) (Sq5).

Next, output ports 1 and 2 are initialized based on the data set in the HL register by the 2-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT01), HL) (OUTPORT01: address of output port 1), and output ports 1 and 2 are All output signals are turned OFF (0000 (H)) (Sq6).

Next, output ports 5 and 6 are initialized based on the data set in the HL register by the 2-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT05), HL) (OUTPORT05: address of output port 5), and output ports 5 and 6 are All output signals are turned OFF (0000 (H)) (Sq7).

Next, output port 7 is initialized based on the data set in the A register by a 1-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT07), A) (OUTPORT07: address of output port 7), and the signal output from output port 7 is are all OFF (00(H)) (Sq8).

Next, the data set in the A register by the LD instruction (LD I, A) is transferred to the I register, thereby initializing the I register and setting it to 00 (H) (Sq9). At this time, a second LD instruction is used to transfer 1 byte of data set in the A register to the specified address or specified register. The I register is a register that stores the upper address of the address to jump to when an interrupt occurs, and is initialized to 00 (H) only during startup processing, and then maintains that value until the power is cut off. That will happen.

Next, the LD instruction (LD HL, (D_SET_TBL)) sets the start address (D_SET_TBL) of the built-in device register setting table as a pointer in the HL register (Sq10). The built-in device register setting table is a table in which setting data and lower addresses of storage locations are set for each type of built-in device register.

Next, the upper address (HIGH_SET) of the built-in device register is set in the D register by the LD instruction (LD D, (HIGH_SET)) (Sq11), and the set number of built-in device registers is set by the LD instruction (LD B, (E_SET)). (E_SET) is set in the B register (Sq12).

Next, the LDIN instruction (LDIN AE, (HL)) transfers the setting data of the built-in device register stored at the address indicated by the pointer of the built-in device register table set in the HL register to the A register, and transfers the lower address. At the same time as transferring it to the E register, 2 is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the address indicated by the pointer of the built-in device register table is moved to the next address (Sq13). As a result, the setting data is set in the A register, and the storage address is set in the DE register.

Next, the setting data set in the A register by the LD instruction (LD (DE), A) is stored in the storage address indicated by the DE register (Sq14).

Next, the DJNZ instruction subtracts 1 from the number of settings in the B register, determines whether the number of settings in the B register is 0 (Sq15), and if the number of settings in the B register is not 0, jumps to Sq13, and By repeating the processes of Sq13 to Sq15 until the number of register settings reaches 0, the setting data of the built-in device registers are respectively set. Further, if the number of times set in the B register is 0 in Sq15, the process proceeds to other processes of the startup process.

In this way, in the startup process of the first embodiment, the output ports that output signals to electrical components such as segment indicators, LEDs, solenoids, and motors connected to the main control unit 41 are initialized. This prevents electrical components from operating in unstable conditions during startup.

Furthermore, when initializing the output port in the startup process of the first embodiment, 00 (H) is stored in the A register before the main control unit 41 is started and the user program is started, so If so, even if a 1-byte OUT instruction is executed without executing an XOR instruction etc. that sets the data stored in the A register to 00 (H), the output port should be initialized, and the A register will be initialized. There is no need to perform an XOR instruction that sets the data stored in the A register to 00 (H), but even in this case, after clearing the A register with the By executing a byte OUT command, the designated output port is initialized based on the data set in the A register. Therefore, even if data other than 00 (H) is stored in the A register due to a momentary power failure, etc., the output port will be initialized when the user program starts. Can be guaranteed.

In addition, when initializing multiple output ports in the startup process of the first embodiment, after clearing the A register to 00 (H) with an XOR instruction, specify the output port and issue a 1-byte OUT instruction. By doing this, you can initialize the specified output port based on the data set in the A register, and then use another output port without performing any processing that changes the value of the A register, including an XOR instruction that clears the A register. By executing a 1-byte OUT command and initializing another specified output port based on the data set in the A register, it is possible to initialize multiple output ports at the start of a user program. The number of instructions can be reduced.

Furthermore, when initializing two consecutive output ports in the startup process of the first embodiment, 0000 (H) is stored in the HL register before the main control unit 41 is started and the user program is started. Therefore, originally, even if a 2-byte OUT instruction is executed without executing a CLR instruction etc. that sets the data stored in the HL register to 0000 (H), two consecutive output ports will be initialized. Therefore, there is no need to perform a CLR instruction to set the data stored in the HL register to 0000 (H), but even in this case, the HL register is cleared by the CLR instruction and set to 0000 (H). Thereafter, by specifying the first output port and issuing a 2-byte OUT command, two consecutive output ports including the specified output port are initialized based on the data set in the HL register. Therefore, even if data other than 0000 (H) remains stored in the HL register due to a momentary power failure, etc., the output port will be initialized when the user program starts. Can be guaranteed.

In addition, in the startup process of the first embodiment, when initializing multiple sets of two consecutive output ports, clear the HL register to 0000 (H) using the CLR instruction, and then specify the first output port. Initialize two consecutive output ports including the specified output port based on the data set in the HL register by executing a 2-byte OUT command, and then initialize the HL register including the CLR command to clear the HL register. Two consecutive output ports including another output port specified based on the data set in the HL register by specifying another output port and executing a 2-byte OUT command without performing any processing to change the value. By initializing , it is possible to reduce the number of instructions when initializing a plurality of sets of two consecutive output ports at the start of a user program.

Note that in the startup process of the first embodiment, all output ports 0 to 7 are initialized, but some of the output ports 0 to 7 are initialized in the startup process. It may also be used as a configuration.

In addition, in the startup process of the first embodiment, the I register is initialized and set to 00 (H), but at this time, any 1-byte data (n ) and the second LD instruction that transfers 1 byte of data set in the A register to the specified address area or specified register, the second LD instruction with a smaller program capacity is used to transfer the I register. It is designed to be initialized, reducing the program capacity.

In addition, in the startup process of the first embodiment, when the I register is initialized to 00 (H) by the second LD instruction to transfer 1 byte of data set in the A register, the main control unit 41 is activated. Since 00 (H) is stored in the A register before the user program is started, normally, an XOR instruction etc. that sets the data stored in the A register to 00 (H) should not be executed. Even if you specify the I register and execute the second LD instruction without using the I register, the I register should be initialized, and there is no need to perform an However, even in this case, after clearing the A register to 00 (H) with the XOR instruction, specify the I register and execute the second LD instruction to clear the I register based on the data set in the A register. It is set to be initialized. Therefore, even if data other than 00 (H) is stored in the A register due to a momentary power failure, etc., the I register will be initialized when the user program starts. Can be guaranteed.

In addition, in the startup process of the first embodiment, 00 (H) is stored in the I register before the main control unit 41 is started and the user program is started, but Since the I register is also initialized during processing, it is possible to ensure that the I register is initialized.

In addition, in the startup process of the first embodiment, the I register is initialized only in the first startup process that is performed when the user program starts, and thereafter maintains its value until the power is cut off. However, by initializing the I register using the second LD instruction, which has a smaller program capacity than the first LD instruction, the program capacity associated with initializing the I register can be reduced. Initialization processing of the I register, which is performed only during processing, can be suitably performed. Also, after clearing the A register to 00 (H) with the XOR instruction, the I register is initialized based on the data set in the A register by specifying the I register and executing the second LD instruction. Since it is ensured that the I register is initialized, it is possible to prevent the I register from remaining uninitialized until the power is cut off.

In the startup process of the first embodiment, after clearing the A register to 00 (H) using the XOR instruction, the I register is specified and the second LD instruction is executed, based on the data set in the A register. The configuration is to initialize the I register, but the value of the A register is set to 00 (H) by storing the data of 00 (H) defined as the initial value of the I register in the ROM41b in the A register by the LD instruction. After that, the I register may be initialized based on the data set in the A register by specifying the I register and executing a second LD command. The initial values can be managed by data stored in the ROM 41b.

In addition, in the startup process of the first embodiment, the I register is initialized to 00 (H) in the startup process, but in addition to the I register, data stored at a specific address or data stored in a specific register is A configuration may also be used in which the data is initialized to 00 (H). Even in such a configuration, the program capacity can be reduced by initializing the data using the second LD instruction, which has a small program capacity, and the A register When initializing the data and setting it to 00 (H) using the second LD instruction that transfers 1 byte of data set to , set the A register to 00 (H) using an By specifying a specific register and executing the second LD command, a specific address or data stored in a specific register can be initialized based on the data set in the A register. Even if data other than 00(H) remains stored, it is possible to ensure that these data are initialized upon starting the user program.

[About the startup process of Embodiment 2]
As shown in FIG. 50, in the startup process of the second embodiment, the main control unit 41 first sets interrupt prohibition (Sq1). Next, the data set in the A register (00 (H) stored before the user program was started) by the 1-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT00), A) (OUTPORT00: address of output port 0) is Based on this, output port 0 is initialized and all signals output from output port 0 are turned OFF (00 (H)) (Sq4).

Next, the data set in the HL register (0000 (H) stored before the user program was started) by the 2-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT03), HL) (OUTPORT03: address of output port 3) is Based on this, the output ports 3 and 4 are initialized, and all the signals output from the output ports 3 and 4 are turned OFF (0000 (H)) (Sq5).

Next, the data set in the HL register (0000 (H) stored before the user program was started) by the 2-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT01), HL) (OUTPORT01: address of output port 1) is Based on this, output ports 1 and 2 are initialized, and all signals output from output ports 1 and 2 are turned OFF (0000 (H)) (Sq6).

Next, the data set in the HL register (0000 (H) stored before the user program was started) by the 2-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT05), HL) (OUTPORT05: address of output port 5) is Based on this, the output ports 5 and 6 are initialized, and all the signals output from the output ports 5 and 6 are turned OFF (0000 (H)) (Sq7).

Next, the data set in the A register (00 (H) stored before the user program was started) by the 1-byte OUT instruction (OUT (OUTPORT07), A) (OUTPORT07: address of output port 7) is Based on this, the output port 7 is initialized and all signals output from the output port 7 are turned OFF (00 (H)) (Sq8).

Next, the I register is initialized by transferring the data set in the A register (00 (H) stored before the user program was started) to the I register by the LD instruction (LD I, A), Set 00(H) (Sq9). At this time, a second LD instruction is used to transfer 1 byte of data set in the A register to the specified address or specified register. The I register is a register that stores the upper address of the address to jump to when an interrupt occurs, and is initialized to 00 (H) only during startup processing, and then maintains that value until the power is cut off. That will happen.

The subsequent processing is the same as the startup processing of the first embodiment, and will therefore be omitted.

In this way, when the output port is initialized in the startup process of the second embodiment, 00 (H) is stored in the A register before the main control unit 41 is started and the user program is started. , after starting the user program and before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in the A register, output without executing an XOR instruction etc. that sets the data stored in the A register to 00 (H). By specifying a port and issuing a 1-byte OUT command, the specified output port is initialized based on the data set in the A register. Therefore, the number of instructions when initializing the output port upon starting the user program can be reduced.

In addition, when initializing multiple output ports in the startup process of the second embodiment, by specifying the output port and issuing a 1-byte OUT command, the specified output port can be initialized based on the data set in the A register. It was initialized and then set in the A register by specifying another output port and executing a 1-byte OUT instruction without performing any processing that changes the value of the A register, including an XOR instruction to clear the A register. By initializing another specified output port based on data, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions when initializing multiple output ports at the start of a user program.

Furthermore, when initializing two consecutive output ports in the startup process of the second embodiment, 0000 (H) is stored in the HL register before the main control unit 41 is started and the user program is started. Therefore, after the user program starts, before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in the HL register, the first By specifying an output port and issuing a 2-byte OUT command, two consecutive output ports including the specified output port are initialized based on the data set in the HL register. Therefore, the number of instructions when initializing the output port upon starting the user program can be reduced.

In addition, when initializing multiple sets of two consecutive output ports in the startup process of the second embodiment, by specifying the first output port and executing a 2-byte OUT command, the data set in the HL register can be updated. Initialize two consecutive output ports including the specified output port based on the specified output port, and then specify another output port without performing any processing that changes the value of the HL register, including a CLR instruction that clears the HL register. By executing a 2-byte OUT command to initialize two consecutive output ports including another output port specified based on the data set in the HL register, multiple sets of consecutive output ports can be created at the start of the user program. The number of instructions required to initialize the two output ports can be reduced.

Note that in the startup process of the second embodiment, all output ports 0 to 7 are initialized, but some of the output ports 0 to 7 are initialized in the startup process. It may also be used as a configuration.

In addition, in the startup process of the second embodiment, the I register is initialized and set to 00 (H), but at this time, any 1-byte data (n ) and the second LD instruction that transfers 1 byte of data set in the A register to the specified address area or specified register, the second LD instruction with a smaller program capacity is used to transfer the I register. It is designed to be initialized, reducing the program capacity.

In addition, in the startup process of the second embodiment, when the I register is initialized to 00 (H) by the second LD instruction that transfers 1 byte of data set in the A register, the main control unit 41 is activated. Since 00 (H) is stored in the A register before the user program is started, the A Initialize the I register based on the data set in the A register by specifying the I register and executing the second LD command without executing an XOR instruction etc. that sets the data stored in the register to 00 (H). It's starting to become more and more. Therefore, the number of instructions required to initialize the I register upon starting a user program can be reduced.

In addition, in the startup process of the second embodiment, 00 (H) is stored in the I register before the main control unit 41 is started and the user program is started, but Since the I register is also initialized during processing, it is possible to ensure that the I register is initialized.

In addition, in the startup process of the second embodiment, the I register is initialized only in the first startup process that is performed when the user program starts, and thereafter maintains its value until the power is cut off. However, by initializing the I register using the second LD instruction, which has a smaller program capacity than the first LD instruction, the program capacity associated with initializing the I register can be reduced. Initialization processing of the I register, which is performed only during processing, can be suitably performed. Also, after starting the user program and before executing an instruction to change the data stored in the A register, do not execute an XOR instruction etc. that sets the data stored in the A register to 00 (H). By specifying the I register and executing the second LD instruction, the I register is initialized based on the data set in the A register, which reduces the number of instructions required to initialize the I register and further reduces program capacity. Since the number of I registers can be reduced, initialization processing of the I register, which is performed only during startup processing, can be suitably performed.

Note that in the startup process of the second embodiment, the I register is initialized to 00 (H) in the startup process, but in addition to the I register, data stored at a specific address or data stored in a specific register is A configuration may also be used in which the data is initialized to 00 (H). Even in such a configuration, the program capacity can be reduced by initializing the data using the second LD instruction, which has a small program capacity, and the A register When initializing the data and setting it to 00 (H) using the second LD instruction that transfers 1 byte of data set in Before execution, instead of executing an XOR instruction etc. that sets the data stored in the A register to 00 (H), specify a specific address or a specific register and execute the second LD instruction. By initializing data stored in a specific address or a specific register based on the set data, the number of instructions when initializing these data upon starting a user program can be reduced.

[About the startup process of Embodiment 3]
As shown in FIG. 51, in the startup process of the third embodiment, the main control unit 41 first sets interrupt prohibition (Sr1). Next, the initial value of the stack pointer (STKINI) is transferred to the SP register by the LD instruction (LD SP, STKINI), thereby setting the initial value in the stack pointer (Sr2).

Next, by using the LD instruction (LD A, OUTINI), the value of the A register is changed to 00 ( H) (Sr3).

Next, the upper address (FE(H)) of the built-in device register is transferred to the Q register by the LD instruction (LD Q, 0FEH), and the upper address of the built-in device register is set in the Q register (Sr4).

Next, the LDQ instruction (LDQ (POP8), A) specifies the lower address (POP8) of the output port 8 register among the built-in device registers, and the data set in the A register (initial value of the output port 8 register is stored in ROM41b). The output port 8 register is initialized by transferring the value (00(H) defined as the value (OUTINI)) to the address area consisting of the upper address set in the Q register and the specified lower address, and 00(H) is transferred. Set (Sr5). At this time, a second LD instruction is used to transfer 1 byte of data set in the A register to the specified address or specified register. The output port 8 register is a register that stores the ON/OFF status of the connection confirmation signal output to other boards (for example, the production control board 90, etc.), and is initialized in the startup process to confirm the connection. 00(H) indicating ON of the signal is set, and 00(H) indicating ON or 01(H) indicating OFF is set depending on the status of subsequent processing.

Next, the LD instruction (LD A, INT) stores the data of 00 (H) defined as the upper address (INT) of the interrupt vector in the ROM 41b in the A register, changing the value of the A register to 00 (H). ) (Sr6).

Next, the data set in the A register by the LD instruction (LD I, A) (00 (H) defined in the ROM 41b as the upper address (INT) of the interrupt vector) is transferred to the I register. is initialized and set to 00 (H) (Sr7). At this time, a second LD instruction is used to transfer 1 byte of data set in the A register to the specified address or specified register. The I register is a register that stores the upper address of the address to jump to when an interrupt occurs, and is initialized to 00 (H) only during startup processing, and then maintains that value until the power is cut off. That will happen.

Next, the LD instruction (LD HL, (D_SET_TBL)) sets the start address (D_SET_TBL) of the built-in device register setting table as a pointer in the HL register (Sr8). The built-in device register setting table is a table in which setting data and lower addresses of storage locations are set for each type of built-in device register.

Next, the setting count (E_SET) of the built-in device register is set in the B register by the LD instruction (LD B, (E_SET)) (Sr9).

Next, the LDIN instruction (LDIN AE, (HL)) transfers the setting data of the built-in device register stored at the address indicated by the pointer of the built-in device register table set in the HL register to the A register, and transfers the lower address. At the same time as transferring it to the E register, 2 is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the address indicated by the pointer of the built-in device register table is moved to the next address (Sr10). As a result, the setting data is set in the A register, and the lower address of the storage destination address is set in the E register.

Next, the setting data set in the A register by the LDQ instruction (LDQ (E), A) is stored in the storage destination address consisting of the upper address stored in the Q register and the lower address specified in the E register (Sr11 ).

Next, the DJNZ instruction subtracts 1 from the number of settings in the B register, determines whether the number of settings in the B register is 0 (Sr12), and if the number of settings in the B register is not 0, jumps to Sr10, and By repeating the processes Sr10 to Sr12 until the number of register settings reaches 0, the setting data of the built-in device registers are respectively set. Further, if the number of times set in the B register is 0 in Sr12, the process proceeds to other processes of the startup process.

In this way, in the startup process of Embodiment 3, the output port 8 register and I register are initialized and set to 00 (H), but at this time, any arbitrary Among the first LD instruction that transfers 1 byte of data (n) and the 2nd LD instruction that transfers 1 byte of data set in the A register to the specified address area or specified register, the 2nd LD instruction has a smaller program capacity. is used to initialize the output port register and I register, reducing the program capacity.

In addition, in the startup process of the third embodiment, when the output port 8 register and I register are initialized to 00 (H) by the second LD instruction that transfers 1 byte of data set in the A register, the main Since 00 (H) is stored in the A register before the control unit 41 is activated and the user program is started, an LD instruction or the like that sets the A register to 00 (H) should not normally be executed. Even if the second LD command is executed by specifying the address of the output port 8 register or the I register without using the command, the output port 8 register and the I register should be initialized, and the A register should be set to 00 (H). Although it is not necessary to perform an LD command, etc., even in this case, after setting the A register to 00 (H) with the LD command, specifying the address of the output port 8 register and the I register and executing the second LD command. The output port 8 register and I register are initialized based on the data set in the register. Therefore, even if data other than 00 (H) is stored in the A register due to a momentary power failure, etc., the output port 8 register and I register will be initialized when the user program starts. It is possible to guarantee that the

In addition, in the startup process of the third embodiment, 00 (H) is stored in the I register before the main control unit 41 is started and the user program is started, but Since the I register is also initialized during processing, it is possible to ensure that the I register is initialized.

In addition, in the startup process of the third embodiment, the I register is initialized only in the first startup process that is performed when the user program starts, and thereafter maintains its value until the power is cut off. However, by initializing the I register using the second LD instruction, which has a smaller program capacity than the first LD instruction, the program capacity associated with initializing the I register can be reduced. Initialization processing of the I register, which is performed only during processing, can be suitably performed. Furthermore, after setting the A register to 00 (H) with the LD command, the I register is initialized based on the data set in the A register by specifying the I register and executing the second LD command. Since it is ensured that the I register is initialized, it is possible to prevent the I register from remaining uninitialized until the power is cut off.

In the startup process of the third embodiment, the LD instruction causes data of 00 (H) defined as the initial value (OUTINI) of the output port 8 register to be stored in the ROM 41b or as the upper address (INT) of the interrupt vector. After setting the value of the A register to 00 (H) by storing the defined 00 (H) data in the A register, by specifying the address of the output port 8 register or the I register and executing the second LD command. The output port 8 register and I register are initialized based on the data set in the A register, and the initial values set in the output port 8 register and I register are managed by the data defined in the ROM 41b. This makes it possible to easily change the initial values of the output port 8 register and I register as necessary.

In addition, in the startup process of the third embodiment, when initializing the output port 8 register, the LD instruction stores data 00 (H) defined as the initial value (OUTINI) of the output port 8 register in the ROM 41b. After setting the value of the A register to 00 (H) by storing it in the register, specify the address of the output port 8 register and execute the second LD command to set the value of the output port 8 register based on the data set in the A register. When initializing the I register, store the data 00 (H) defined as the upper address (INT) of the interrupt vector in the ROM41b in the A register using the LD instruction. After setting the value to 00 (H), by specifying the I register and executing the second LD command, the I register is initialized based on the data set in the A register, and the output port 8 register is The initial value to be set and the initial value to be set to the I register can be managed by separate data defined in the ROM 41b, and the initial value of the output port 8 register and the initial value of the I register can be managed as necessary. You can change each value separately.

Note that in the startup process of the third embodiment, the output port 8 register and the I register are initialized to 00 (H) in the startup process; It is also possible to have a configuration in which Further, data stored at a specific address or data stored in a specific register other than the output port 8 register or the I register may be initialized to 00 (H), and even in such a structure, By initializing data using the second LD instruction, which has a small program capacity, the program capacity can be reduced, and by initializing the data using the second LD instruction, which transfers 1 byte of data set in the A register, 00 (H ), set the A register to 00 (H) using an LD command, etc., and then execute the second LD command specifying a specific address or a specific register to set the data set in the A register. By initializing the data stored in a specific address or a specific register based on the data stored in the A register, it is possible to prevent data other than 00 (H) from being stored in the A register due to a momentary power outage. However, it is possible to ensure that these data are initialized when the user program starts.

In addition, in the startup process of the third embodiment, after setting the A register to 00 (H) with the LD command, the address of the output port 8 register and the I register are specified and the second LD command is executed to set the A register. The configuration is such that the output port 8 register and I register are initialized based on the data stored in the output port 8 register and the I register after setting the data stored in the A register to 00 (H) using the A configuration may also be used in which the output port 8 register and I register are initialized based on the data set in the A register by specifying the second LD command, and by adopting such a configuration, the program capacity can be reduced. can.

In addition, in the startup process of the third embodiment, output ports 0 to 7 are not initialized, but in the startup process of the third embodiment, before the process of Sr2 or after the process of Sr7, Processing of Sq2 to Sq8 in the startup processing of , that is, after executing the instruction to set the A register to 00 (H), specifying the output port and executing a 1-byte OUT command, and setting the HL register to 0000 (H). After executing the command, a configuration may be adopted in which two output ports are specified and a 2-byte OUT command is executed, and output ports 0 to 7 are initialized. In addition, when initializing output ports 0 to 7 after the processing of Sr7 in the startup process of the third embodiment, since 00 (H) is already stored in the A register, the startup process of the first embodiment The processing of Sq3 to Sq8 in the process, that is, the processing of specifying the output port and executing a 1-byte OUT instruction without executing the instruction that sets the A register to 00 (H), and the instruction that sets the HL register to 0000 (H) After executing , the configuration may be such that output ports 0 to 7 are initialized by specifying two output ports and executing a 2-byte OUT command.

In addition, in the startup process of the third embodiment, before the process of Sr2, the output port is specified without executing the process of Sq4 to Sq8 in the startup process of the second embodiment, that is, the instruction to set the A register to 00 (H). without executing the instruction to set the HL register to 0000 (H), specifying two output ports and executing a 2-byte OUT instruction, and output ports 0 to 7. It may also be configured to initialize.

Further, when initializing the output ports in the startup process of the third embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which some of the output ports 0 to 7 are initialized.

[About startup processing of embodiment 4]
As shown in FIG. 52, in the startup process of the fourth embodiment, the main control unit 41 first sets interrupt prohibition (Sr1). Next, the initial value of the stack pointer (STKINI) is transferred to the SP register by the LD instruction (LD SP, STKINI), thereby setting the initial value in the stack pointer (Sr2).

Next, the upper address (FE(H)) of the built-in device register is transferred to the Q register by the LD instruction (LD Q, 0FEH), and the upper address of the built-in device register is set in the Q register (Sr4).

Next, the LDQ instruction (LDQ (POP8), A) specifies the lower address (POP8) of the output port 8 register among the built-in device registers, and the data set in the A register (before the user program starts) is specified. Initialize the output port 8 register by transferring the stored 00(H)) to the address area consisting of the upper address set in the Q register and the specified lower address, and set 00(H) (Sr5) . At this time, a second LD instruction is used to transfer 1 byte of data set in the A register to the specified address or specified register. The output port 8 register is a register that stores the ON/OFF status of the connection confirmation signal output to other boards (for example, the production control board 90, etc.), and is initialized in the startup process to confirm the connection. 00(H) indicating ON of the signal is set, and 00(H) indicating ON or 01(H) indicating OFF is set depending on the status of subsequent processing.

Next, the I register is initialized by transferring the data set in the A register (00 (H) stored before the user program was started) to the I register by the LD instruction (LD I, A), Set 00 (H) (Sr7). At this time, a second LD instruction is used to transfer 1 byte of data set in the A register to the specified address or specified register. The I register is a register that stores the upper address of the address to jump to when an interrupt occurs, and is initialized to 00 (H) only during startup processing, and then maintains that value until the power is cut off. That will happen.

The subsequent processing is the same as the processing of Sr8 to Sr12 in the startup processing of the third embodiment, and will therefore be omitted.

In this way, in the startup process of the fourth embodiment, the output port 8 register and I register are initialized and set to 00 (H), but at this time, any arbitrary Among the first LD instruction that transfers 1 byte of data (n) and the 2nd LD instruction that transfers 1 byte of data set in the A register to the specified address area or specified register, the 2nd LD instruction has a smaller program capacity. is used to initialize the output port register and I register, reducing the program capacity.

In addition, in the startup process of the fourth embodiment, when the output port 8 register and I register are initialized to 00 (H) by the second LD instruction that transfers 1 byte of data set in the A register, the main Since 00 (H) is stored in the A register before the control unit 41 is activated and the user program is started, an instruction to change the data stored in the A register is executed after the user program is started. The data set in the A register by specifying the address of the output port 8 register and the I register and executing the second LD command without executing the LD command etc. that sets the A register to 00 (H) before The output port 8 register and I register are initialized based on this. Therefore, the number of instructions required to initialize the output port registers and I registers upon starting the user program can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the startup process of the fourth embodiment, 00 (H) is stored in the I register before the main control unit 41 is started and the user program is started, but Since the I register is also initialized during processing, it is possible to ensure that the I register is initialized.

In addition, in the startup process of the fourth embodiment, the I register is initialized only in the first startup process that is performed when the user program starts, and thereafter maintains its value until the power is cut off. However, by initializing the I register using the second LD instruction, which has a smaller program capacity than the first LD instruction, the program capacity associated with initializing the I register can be reduced. Initialization processing of the I register, which is performed only during processing, can be suitably performed. Also, after starting the user program and before executing an instruction to change the data stored in the A register, specify the I register without executing an LD instruction etc. that sets the A register to 00 (H). The I register is initialized based on the data set in the A register by executing the second LD command, which reduces the number of instructions required to initialize the I register and further reduces the program capacity. Initialization processing of the I register, which is performed only during processing, can be suitably performed.

Note that in the startup process of the fourth embodiment, the output port 8 register and the I register are initialized to 00 (H) in the startup process; It is also possible to have a configuration in which Further, data stored at a specific address or data stored in a specific register other than the output port 8 register or the I register may be initialized to 00 (H), and even in such a structure, By initializing data using the second LD instruction, which has a small program capacity, the program capacity can be reduced, and by initializing the data using the second LD instruction, which transfers 1 byte of data set in the A register, 00 (H ), after starting the user program and before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in the A register, do not execute an LD instruction etc. that sets the A register to 00 (H). , by specifying a specific address or a specific register and executing the second LD command, the user program initializes the data stored in the specific address or specific register based on the data set in the A register. The number of instructions required to initialize these data upon the start of the process can be reduced.

In addition, in the startup process of the fourth embodiment, output ports 0 to 7 are not initialized, but after the process of Sr7 in the startup process of the fourth embodiment, Sq2 to Sq8 in the startup process of the first embodiment After executing the instruction to set the A register to 00 (H), specify the output port and execute a 1-byte OUT instruction, and execute the instruction to set the HL register to 0000 (H), A configuration may also be adopted in which output ports 0 to 7 are initialized by specifying one output port and executing a 2-byte OUT command.

Furthermore, in the startup process of Embodiment 4, before the process of Sr2 or after the process of Sr7, the process of Sq4 to Sq8 in the startup process of Embodiment 2, that is, the instruction to set the A register to 00 (H) is not executed. In addition, the process of specifying an output port and executing a 1-byte OUT instruction, and the process of specifying two output ports and executing a 2-byte OUT instruction without executing the instruction to set the HL register to 0000 (H) are performed. , the configuration may be such that output ports 0 to 7 are initialized. In such a configuration, the 1-byte OUT instruction is executed by specifying the output port without executing the instruction to set the A register to 00 (H). Stored in the A register between the process and the process of specifying the address of the output port 8 register and the I register and executing the second LD command without executing the LD command etc. that sets the A register to 00 (H). Since no instructions are executed to change the currently stored data, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions needed to initialize output ports 0 to 7 and the output port 8 register and I register upon starting a user program.

Further, when initializing the output ports in the startup process of the fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which some of the output ports 0 to 7 are initialized.

[Effect 1]
In this embodiment, in the 3-byte data division process, the main control unit 41 multiplies the dividend by 100 and then repeatedly subtracts the divisor from the 100 times value of the dividend until the result of subtracting the divisor is less than 0. , by adding 1 to the value of the A register each time the divisor is subtracted, the number of times the divisor is subtracted from the 100 times value of the dividend is counted until the result of subtracting the divisor is less than 0, and the 100 times value of the dividend to the divisor is calculated. Calculate as a fraction. In addition, the number of times the divisor was subtracted from the 100 times value of the dividend is stored in the A register where a specific flag is set when the value exceeds 100. If a specific value exceeding 100 is reached and a specific flag is set, it is determined that there is an abnormality and the process of subtracting the divisor from the 100 times value of the dividend is terminated.

With this configuration, when calculating the percentage of the dividend with respect to the divisor, the value 100 times the dividend is calculated, the divisor is subtracted from the 100 times value of the dividend until it is below the divisor, and the number of subtractions is calculated as a percentage of the divisor. It can be calculated as a percentage of the dividend. In such a configuration, for example, when the divisor is 0, even if the number of subtractions exceeds 100, which can be taken as a percentage, the result of subtracting the divisor from 100 times the dividend may not be less than 0. In this case, the number of subtractions becomes a specific value exceeding 100, a specific flag is set, and the process of subtracting the divisor from 100 times the dividend is determined to be abnormal. Even if the result of subtracting the divisor from the 100 times value is not less than 0, the subtraction of the divisor can be terminated.

In addition, by storing the number of subtractions in the A register where a specific flag is set when the stored numerical value becomes a specific value, the number of subtractions can be determined simply by determining whether or not the specific flag is set. Since it is possible to judge that the value has reached the specified value, each time the divisor is subtracted from the 100 times value of the dividend, a number with the specific value as the initial value is subtracted, and when the number becomes 0, the number of subtractions becomes the specific value. The program capacity can be reduced compared to those that determine that the number of subtractions has reached a specific value, or those that compare the number of subtractions with a specific value and determine that the number of subtractions has reached a specific value if the comparison results match. .

In this embodiment, in the 3-byte data division process, the storage address of the divisor stored in the DE register is saved to the stack before the process of multiplying the dividend by 100 is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to protect the address that specifies the divisor and calculate the value 100 times the dividend using the DE register in which the address that specifies the divisor is stored.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is capable of a maximum of 2-byte calculations, but since the dividend and divisor are values that can be 3 bytes, the main control unit 41 performs the processing of multiplying the dividend by 100 and calculating the divisor from the 100-fold value of the dividend. In the subtraction process, the calculations for the 1st and 2nd bytes and the calculation for the 3rd byte are performed separately. With such a configuration, the percentage of the dividend to the divisor can be calculated even if the divisor or the 100 times value of the dividend exceeds 2 bytes, which is the operable size.

In this embodiment, in the 3-byte data division process, when the number of times the divisor is subtracted from the value 100 times the dividend reaches a specific value exceeding 100 and a specific flag is set, the abnormal process that is performed is 100 times the dividend. After subtracting the divisor from the value, if a specific flag is set, a jump instruction to jump to a specified program is used to terminate the process of subtracting the divisor from the value 100 times the dividend. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether a specific flag is set or not and to move to a specified program in response to an abnormality process using a single jump instruction.

In the modified example of the 3-byte data division process in this embodiment, after the dividend is multiplied by 200, the divisor is repeatedly subtracted from the 200 times value of the dividend until the result of subtracting the divisor becomes less than 0, and the divisor is subtracted. By adding 1 to the value of the A register each time the divisor is subtracted, the number of times the divisor is subtracted from the 200 times value of the dividend is counted until the result of subtracting the divisor is less than 0, and the counted number of times is multiplied by 1/2. Calculate the value as the 100th ratio of the dividend to the divisor. In addition, the number of times the divisor was subtracted from the 200 times value of the dividend is stored in the A register where a specific flag is set when the value exceeds 200. If a specific value exceeding 200 is reached and the specific flag is set, it is determined that there is an abnormality and the process of subtracting the divisor from the 200 times value of the dividend is terminated.

With this configuration, when calculating the percentage of the dividend to the divisor, the 200 times the dividend is calculated, the divisor is subtracted from the 200 times the dividend until it is below the divisor, and the number of subtractions is reduced to 1/1. The doubled value can be calculated as a percentage of the dividend to the divisor. In such a configuration, for example, when the divisor is 0, even if the value obtained by multiplying the number of subtractions by 1/2 exceeds 100, which can be taken as a percentage, the result of subtracting the divisor from the value 200 times the dividend will not be less than 0. However, in this case, the number of subtractions becomes a specific value exceeding 200 and a specific flag is set, which determines that it is abnormal and terminates the process of subtracting the divisor from 200 times the dividend. By doing so, even if the result of subtracting the divisor from 200 times the dividend is not less than 0, the subtraction of the divisor can be completed.

In addition, since the number of subtractions is stored in the A register where a specific flag is set when the stored numerical value reaches a specific value, the number of subtractions can be set to a specific value by simply determining whether or not the specific flag is set. Therefore, each time you subtract the divisor from the 200 times value of the dividend, you can subtract a number with the specific value as the initial value, and when the number becomes 0, the number of subtractions becomes the specific value. The program capacity can be reduced compared to a program that determines whether the number of subtractions has reached a specific value or a program that compares the number of subtractions with a specific value and determines that the number of subtractions has reached a specific value if the comparison results match.

In a modification of the 3-byte data division process in this embodiment, the storage address of the divisor stored in the DE register is saved to the stack before calculating the 200 times value of the dividend. With such a configuration, it is possible to protect the address that specifies the divisor and calculate the value 200 times the dividend using the DE register in which the address that specifies the divisor is stored.

In the modified example of the 3-byte data division process in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is capable of a maximum of 2-byte calculations, but since the dividend and divisor are values that can be 3 bytes, the process of multiplying the dividend by 200 is performed. In the process of subtracting the divisor from the 200 times value of the dividend, the calculations for the first and second bytes and the calculation for the third byte are performed separately. With such a configuration, the percentage of the dividend to the divisor can be calculated even if the divisor or the 200 times value of the dividend exceeds the operable size of 2 bytes.

In the modified example of the 3-byte data division process in this embodiment, when the number of times the divisor is subtracted from the 200 times value of the dividend reaches a specific value exceeding 200 in the 3-byte data division process and a specific flag is set, The abnormal processing that occurs subtracts the divisor from the value 200 times the dividend and adds 1 to the value of the A register, and when a specific flag is set, a jump instruction that jumps to the specified program is executed. This configuration terminates the process of subtracting the divisor from the value. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether a specific flag is set or not and to move to a specified program in response to an abnormality process using a single jump instruction.

In this embodiment, the specific value is 256, which causes the A register included in the main control unit 41 to overflow. With this configuration, when the number of subtractions stored in the A register overflows, the zero flag or carry flag as a specific flag is turned on, making it possible to specify that the number of subtractions has reached a specific value.

In this embodiment, when the percentage of the dividend to the divisor calculated from the number of subtractions stored in the A register of the main control unit 41 is 100 or more, it is corrected to 99. With this configuration, if the percentage of the dividend to the divisor calculated from the number of subtractions stored in the A register is 100 or more, it can be displayed even if it is displayed as a two-digit number. Since the maximum value of 99 is displayed, it can be recognized that the percentage of the dividend to the divisor is a large value of 99% or more.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is capable of executing main processing that performs processing in stages and timer interrupt processing that periodically interrupts the processing that is being executed, and updates the divisor and dividend in the main processing. , in the main processing, performs 3-byte data division processing and calculates the 100th ratio of the dividend to the divisor. Then, during a period in which the divisor and dividend are updated and a period in which the percentage of the dividend with respect to the divisor is calculated, interrupts are set to be prohibited, and execution of timer interrupt processing is prohibited. With this configuration, the timer interrupt process is executed during the period in which the divisor and dividend are updated and in the period in which the percentage of the dividend with respect to the divisor is calculated, so that the divisor, the dividend, and the percentage of the dividend with respect to the divisor are calculated. This can prevent the numerical values used in calculations from being corrupted and resulting in unintended numerical values.

[Effect 2]
In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is capable of executing 3-byte data addition/storage processing to update the addition target data used for calculating the accessory payout ratio, the continuous accessory payout ratio, and the instructed accessory payout ratio. . In the 3-byte data addition/storage process, if an overflow occurs after the addition target data is updated and a specific condition is met that results in an abnormal value due to the update of the addition target data, the addition target data is changed to the value before the update. The configuration is such that the carry flag is turned on as restriction information for restricting future updates of the addition target data. With this configuration, after updating the addition target data, if an overflow occurs and a specific condition is established that results in an abnormal value due to the update of the addition target data, the carry flag is turned ON as restriction information. This restricts the subsequent updating of the addition target data, and in this case, the addition target data is returned to the value before the update, so the predetermined ratio may be calculated with unintended addition target data. can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the addition target data is updated by addition, an overflow occurs, so that a specific condition that becomes an abnormal value due to the update of the addition target data is satisfied, but after the addition target data is updated by subtraction. , when a specific condition that causes an abnormal value to occur due to an update of the target data is satisfied, such as a configuration where an overflow occurs and a specific condition that causes an abnormal value to occur due to an update of the target data, the target data is changed to the value before the update. Any configuration is acceptable as long as it returns the target data and sets restriction information for restricting future updates of the target data. Further, although the configuration uses a carry flag as the restriction information, it is also possible to use another value of the F register, such as a zero flag, or a restriction flag set in the RAM 41c.

In this embodiment, the data to be added is a value that can be a 3-byte value, and the main control unit 41 can perform arithmetic operations on a maximum of 2 bytes at a time. When updating the data, the first to second bytes of the data to be added are added, and then the third byte of the data to be added is added. With such a configuration, the addition target data can be updated even when the addition target data exceeds two bytes that can be calculated at one time.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 turns on the carry flag as a specific flag when the calculation result overflows, and adds the first and second bytes of the addition target data in the 3-byte data addition/storage process. As a result, when an overflow occurs, the carry flag is turned OFF, and then the third byte of the data to be added is added. With this configuration, if an overflow occurs as a result of adding the first and second bytes of the addition target data, the carry flag is turned OFF and then the third byte of the addition target data is added. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the result of addition of the third byte of the data to be added has overflowed, using the carry flag.

In this embodiment, after adding the first to second bytes of the addition target data in the 3-byte data addition/storage process, the main control unit 41 adds the value of the BC register used for the addition of the first to second bytes. If the third byte of the addition target data is added without being cleared and the addition result of the third byte overflows, the first and second bytes of the addition target data are added using the value of the BC register. This configuration returns the value to the value before addition. With this configuration, when returning the addition target data to the value before updating, there is no need to read out new numerical values, so the program can be simplified.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is capable of executing main processing that performs processing in stages and timer interrupt processing that periodically interrupts the processing that is being executed, and is capable of processing 3-byte data addition and storage in the main processing. At the same time, during the period in which the addition target data is updated by the 3-byte data addition/storage process, interrupts are set to be prohibited, and execution of the timer interrupt process is prohibited. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the addition target data from being destroyed and the predetermined ratio being calculated using an unintended value by executing interrupt processing during the period when the addition target data is updated. It can be prevented.

[Effect 3]
In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the result is a specific result, and sets the value in the C register both when it is determined that the result is a specific result and when it is determined that the result is not a specific result. By using the value, it is possible to execute 3-byte data 1-byte addition processing that includes a specific program that can update specific data, and when it is determined that the 3-byte data 1-byte addition processing is a specific result, If a specific program is executed with the value for which the specific data is updated set in the C register, and it is determined that the specific result is not a specific result, the specific program is executed with the value for which the specific data is not updated set in the C register. This is a configuration that executes. With this configuration, the specific data is updated when it is determined that the result is a specific result, and the specific data is not updated when it is determined that the result is not a specific result, but when it is determined that the result is a specific result, the specific data is updated. In either case, if it is determined that the result is not a specific result, a specific program that can update the specific data is executed using the value set in the C register. Execute a specific program with the value to which the data will be updated set in the C register, and if it is determined that the specific result is not, run the specific program with the value to which the specific data will not be updated set in the C register. Therefore, even if it is determined that the specific result is not a specific result, it can be confirmed that the specific program stored at the specific address will be executed without waiting until it is determined that the specific result is a specific result.

In this embodiment, after the value to which specific data is updated is set in the C register, it is determined whether or not it is a specific result, and if it is determined that it is not a specific result, the value of the C register is updated to the specific data. The configuration is to change it to a value that is not used. With this configuration, regardless of whether it is a specific result, a program is executed that sets the value at which the specific data is updated in the C register, so even if it is determined that the specific result is not a specific result, It can be confirmed that a program is executed to set a value for updating the specific data in the C register without waiting until it is determined that it is a specific result.

In this embodiment, after setting the value for which specific data is updated in the C register, it is determined whether or not it is a specific result, and if it is determined that it is not a specific result, the value of the C register is set as the specific data. is configured to change to a value that is not updated, but it is determined whether or not it is a specific result, and if it is determined that it is a specific result, the value at which the specific data is updated is set in the C register, and the specific result is changed to a value that is not updated. A configuration may be adopted in which the C register is set to a value in which the specific data is not updated when it is determined that the result is not the specified result, and even in such a configuration, the specific data is updated when it is determined that the specific result is the specified result. If a specific program is executed with the value set in the C register and it is determined that the specific result is not, the specific data will not be updated.Since the specific program is executed with the value set in the C register, it is not a specific result. Even if it is determined that the specific program is executed at the specific address, it can be confirmed that the specific program stored at the specific address will be executed without waiting until the specific result is determined.

In this embodiment, the specific program is a program that updates the value of the third byte of the data to be added to another numerical value, and the C register is set with the addition value used to update the third byte of the data to be added. This is the configuration that will be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to update the value of the third byte of the addition target data when it is determined that the result is a specific result.

In this embodiment, the specific program is a program that updates the value of the third byte of the addition target data to another value by adding the addition value, and when it is determined that the result is a specific result, the C register is When an addition value is set and it is determined that the result is not a specific result, 0 is set in the C register, and the value set in the C register in the specific program is added to the value of the third byte of the data to be added. . With this configuration, by running a common specific program, whether it is determined to be a specific result or not, if it is determined to be a specific result. The addition value can be added to the value of the third byte of the addition target data, and if it is determined that there is no specific result, the value of the third byte of the addition target data can be prevented from being updated.

In this embodiment, the specific program is a program that updates the value of the third byte of the addition target data to another value by adding the addition value, and when it is determined that it is a specific result, C A configuration in which an addition value is set in the register, and when it is determined that the result is not a specific result, 0 is set in the C register, and the value set in the C register in the specific program is added to the value of the third byte of the data to be added. However, the specific program is a program that updates the target data to another value by subtracting the subtraction value, and if it is determined that the result is a specific result, the subtraction value is set in the C register, and the specific result is If it is determined that it is not, 0 is set in the C register, and the value set in the C register in the specific program may be subtracted from the target data.

In addition, the specific program is a program that sets a specific value indicating a specific control state in the target area, and when it is determined that the result is a specific result, the specific value is set in the C register, and it is determined that the result is not a specific result. In this case, a predetermined value (currently set in the target area) indicating the current control state is set in the C register, and the value set in the C register is set in the target area in specific processing. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific result is that the calculation result of the first and second bytes overflows, but the calculation result is a specific value, the result of the game is a specific result, and the lottery result is It may also be a specific result.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is capable of executing main processing that performs processing in stages and timer interrupt processing that periodically interrupts the processing that is being executed, and in the main processing, it can perform 3-byte data 1-byte addition processing. At the same time, interrupts are set to be prohibited during a period in which a specific program is executed by adding 3 bytes to 1 byte, and execution of timer interrupt processing is prohibited. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific data from being destroyed and becoming an unintended value due to interrupt processing being executed during a period in which a program for updating specific data is executed.

In this embodiment, if an overflow occurs after addition of the first and second bytes of the addition target data, the carry flag is turned ON, and if the occurrence of an overflow is determined by the carry flag, the carry flag is turned ON. After the flag is turned OFF, the third byte of the data to be added is added. With this configuration, after clearing the carry flag that turns ON when an overflow occurs, addition of the third byte of the addition target data as a specific program is executed, so every time an overflow occurs, This can be determined accurately using the carry flag.

[Effect 4]
In this embodiment, when the winning combination for which the navigation notification is to be given is won and the navigation notification is to be performed, the main control unit 41 stores the navigation numbers "1" to "13" in the RAM 41c according to the operation mode to be notified. Set in the navigation number setting area, if a winning combination that is subject to navigation notification is won and navigation notification is not performed, or if a winning combination that is not subject to navigation notification is won, "0" is set in the navigation number setting area of RAM 41c. Set to . Then, in the instruction-included accessory ratio update process, the main control unit 41 acquires the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c, and if the navigation number is 0, it is not a game in which navigation notification is performed. If it is determined that the instruction-inclusive accessory payout counter of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 and the total cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory payout number are not updated and the navigation number is 1 to 13, it is a game in which navigation notification is performed. The configuration is such that the instruction-included accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 and the total number of instruction-included accessory payouts are added and updated.

With this configuration, the number of medals paid out in the game in which the navigation notification was performed is added to the instruction-inclusive accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3, and the total cumulative number of instruction-included accessory payouts, and updated. In this case, it is only necessary to determine whether the numerical value set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c is 0 or 1 to 13, and it is determined whether or not the navigation notification is given in the game. It can be determined whether or not to add and update the medals to the instruction-included accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 and the total number of instruction-included accessory payouts.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is set with 1 to 13 as the navigation number, but even if a value of 14 or more is set, the navigation notification is not performed in the instruction-included accessory ratio update process. It is determined that the game is to be played, and the instruction-inclusive accessory payout counter of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 and the total cumulative number of instruction-inclusive accessory payouts are updated, and the medals are awarded regardless of whether or not the navigation notification has been made. This configuration calculates the ratio of the number of medals paid out in the game in which the navigation notification was given to the number of medals paid out (instruction included accessory payout ratio, instruction included accessory payout ratio (6000G)).

With this configuration, if a value of 14 or more, which exceeds the range of 1 to 13 that is set when navigation notification is performed, is set in the navigation number setting area of RAM 41c, that is, navigation notification is not performed. If it is not possible to determine whether or not the navigation notification has been made, the medals awarded in the game are counted as the total number of instruction-inclusive accessory payout counters for cumulative buffers 1 to 3, and the total number of instruction-inclusive accessory payouts. Therefore, even if it is not known whether the navigation notification was made due to a malicious program or malfunction, the navigation notification will be made for the number of medals awarded regardless of whether the navigation notification was made or not. The ratio of the number of medals paid out in the game (instruction-included accessory payout ratio, instruction-included accessory payout ratio (6000G)) does not decrease, and it is determined whether an appropriate gambling quality is ensured from the ratio. can be specified.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs processing for transmitting an operation signal that can specify a recommended stop operation mode to the test device in the operation signal setting process. In addition, in the operation signal setting process, the main control unit 41 acquires the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c, and if the navigation number is 1 or more and navigation notification is performed, the navigation number If the navigation number is 0 and navigation notification is not performed, only the winning number (general role) or the winning number ( This configuration performs processing for outputting an operation signal that can specify the stop operation mode corresponding to the general winning number (general winning number) and the winning number (special winning number). With this configuration, the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area of RAM 41c is referenced, and if 1 to 13 is set in the navigation number setting area of RAM 41c, the navigation number setting area of RAM 41c is Using the navigation number set in , it is possible to output an operation signal that can specify the operation mode corresponding to the navigation notification.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 can output a lighting/light-off signal based on the display data set in the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12, and can display various information on the gaming auxiliary display 12. When a small winning combination is won and medals are awarded, the number of coins to be paid out (1 to 15) can be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

In addition, when performing navigation notification, the main control unit 41 converts the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c when the start switch 7 is operated into display data, and outputs it on the game auxiliary display 12. By setting it in the buffer, the navigation number is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12, and the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12 is set at the timing when the stop operation (change from OFF to ON) of the third stop reel is detected. It is initialized and the game auxiliary display 12 is put into a non-display state. After that, when displaying the number of payouts, all reels stop and the stop operation of the third stop reel is turned OFF, so that the number of payouts awarded by winning a small winning combination is converted into display data, By setting it in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the number of coins to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

The navigation number display data set in the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12 is initialized before the payout number display data is set in the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12. The navigation number set in the navigation number setting area is maintained without being initialized.

With this configuration, in order to determine whether or not the game is a game in which navigation notification has been performed, the RAM 41c is saved even after the timing when the stop operation (change from OFF to ON) of the third stop reel is detected. The navigation number set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c is maintained, but the display data of the navigation number set based on the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c, the display data of the number of payouts is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display. The navigation display displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized before being set in the output buffer of 12, and the navigation display displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 is erased before the display of the number of payouts starts, so the navigation display and the display of the number of payouts are This can prevent confusion.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of coins to be paid out in conjunction with the winning of a small winning combination is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, which is the same as the navigation number displayed by the navigation notification, but the number of coins to be paid out is The navigation number may be displayed on a different display from the gaming auxiliary display 12 on which the navigation number is displayed, and even in such a configuration, the output of the gaming auxiliary display 12 may be displayed before the number of payout coins is displayed. By initializing the buffer and putting the gaming auxiliary display 12 into a non-display state, the navigation display displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 is erased before the display of the number of payout coins starts, so the navigation display and It is possible to prevent the display of the number of payout coins from being confused.

In this embodiment, the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c is included in a target area at the end of each game, which is initialized at the end of one game in the RAM 41c. With this configuration, the navigation number setting area is initialized along with other areas of the RAM 41c that are initialized for each game by initialization at the end of one game, and the navigation number setting area is initialized. Since the navigation number is also initialized, the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area can be efficiently initialized.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can notify that the advantageous section is an advantageous section by lighting the section display LED 19 during the advantageous section, and at the end of the advantageous section, the navigation system in which the navigation number is stored can be notified. The configuration is such that the number setting area is initialized before the section display LED 19 turns off. With this configuration, the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c is initialized when the advantageous section ends before the section display LED 19 turns off, so that the section display LED 19 turns off. Despite this, it is possible to prevent navigation notification from being performed.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 acquires the navigation number set in the navigation number storage area of the RAM 41c, and if the navigation number is 1 or more, all reels stop and the third stop reel stops. By turning the stop operation from ON to OFF, before the medal payout process is performed, the instruction-included accessory ratio update process changes the instruction-included accessory payout counter of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 and the total cumulative instruction-included accessory payout. This configuration updates the number of sheets. With this configuration, updating of the instruction-included accessories payout counters of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 and the total number of instruction-included accessories paid out will not be delayed depending on the status of the medal payout process.

In this embodiment, even if the navigation number set in the navigation number storage area of the RAM 41c is stopped in an operation mode corresponding to the navigation display, the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the operation mode corresponding to the navigation display. Even if the game is played, it will not be initialized until the end of the game. With such a configuration, regardless of whether the stop switch is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the navigation display, if a medal is awarded, the instruction-inclusive accessory payout counter of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 will be , it is possible to update the total number of paid out accessories including instructions.

In this embodiment, when the advantageous section flag is set in the RAM 41c, the main control unit 41 can perform control to turn on the advantageous section signal buffer in the RAM 41c, and display the section display in the advantageous section. By lighting up the LED 19, it is possible to notify that it is an advantageous section. In addition, the section display LED 19 is turned on when it is determined that the advantageous section signal buffer in the RAM 41c is ON, and when the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section signal buffer is turned OFF in the advantageous section end process. After that, in the game section notification end process, it is determined that the advantageous section signal buffer in the RAM 41c is OFF, so that the light is turned off. With such a configuration, a situation where the section display LED 19 is turned off and the control is made to be an advantageous section does not occur even though the notification indicating that the section is an advantageous section has ended.

In this embodiment, the display of the number of coins to be paid out continues even after the end of the game until the number of bets for the next game is set. With such a configuration, the display of the number of coins to be paid out can be checked even after one game is finished.

In this embodiment, at the end of the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 initializes the area of the RAM 41c in which information related to the advantageous section is stored, and the area of the RAM 41c in which information related to the advantageous section is stored. , a target area at the end of an advantageous period that is not initialized for each game, and a target area at the end of each game (AT related) that is initialized for each game. With such a configuration, when the advantageous section ends, the data related to the advantageous section stored in the target area (AT related) at the end of each game, which is initialized at the end of one game, is initialized at the end of one game. Since the information is also initialized, it is possible to prevent information related to the advantageous section from remaining even though the advantageous section has ended.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 can control the advantageous section to a plurality of advantageous section states, but regardless of the advantageous section state being controlled at the end of the advantageous section, the target area at the end of the advantageous section of the RAM 41c The configuration is such that all areas of the target area (AT related) are initialized at the end of every game. With such a configuration, all information regarding the advantageous section can be initialized regardless of the advantageous section state that is being controlled at the end of the advantageous section.

[Effect 5]
In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not all the reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed through the reel stop process, and determines whether all the reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed. When it is determined that the reels are being rotated, the reception of stop operations is enabled for all reels that are under rotation control, and when a valid stop operation is detected, the reel rotation stop processing is executed and the corresponding reel is stopped. can be done.

In addition, after the display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the main control unit 41 displays the display content based on the display data in the game auxiliary display by timer interrupt processing until the display data is erased. It is possible to control the display on the device 12. Then, each time it is determined that all the reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed through the reel stop process, the navigation number is acquired from the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c, and the acquired navigation number is displayed as the display data. , and is repeatedly set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12.

With this configuration, after the display data is set in the output buffer of the auxiliary gaming display 12, the display content based on the display data is displayed on the auxiliary gaming display 12 until the display data is erased. However, when displaying the navigation number for deriving the navigation target combination on the gaming auxiliary display 12, during the reel rotation control, all the reels under rotation control must be stopped when the stop operation is effective. The stop operation is effective because it is possible to repeatedly execute the process of setting the display data of the navigation number for stopping the navigation target winning combination in the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12 on the condition that the navigation target winning combination is rotated at a constant speed of It is possible to ensure that the navigation number is reliably notified in a certain situation.

In this embodiment, each time it is determined that all the reels under rotation control are being rotated at a constant speed, a navigation number is acquired from the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c, and a display is performed based on the acquired navigation number. The configuration is such that data is repeatedly set in the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12, but the number of times it is determined that all reels under rotation control are being rotated at a constant speed reaches n (n≧2) times. A configuration may be adopted in which the navigation number is acquired from the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c each time the navigation number is set, and display data based on the acquired navigation number is repeatedly set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not all the reels under rotation control are being rotated at a constant speed during reel rotation control through the reel stop process, and The configuration is such that when it is determined that the reels are being rotated at a constant speed, the process of determining whether or not a stop operation has been detected is repeated. With this configuration, during reel rotation control, it is possible to determine whether or not a stop operation has been detected, provided that all reels under rotation control are being rotated at a constant speed that makes the stop operation effective. Since the operation determination process that determines whether the .

In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 detects the ON state of the setting key switch 37 when the power supply is restarted after the power supply has been stopped, the main control unit 41 shifts to the setting change state, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to select and set one of the setting values 1 to 6 with different degrees, and the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized at the start and end of the setting change state. This causes the game auxiliary display 12 to be in a non-display state.

Further, the main control unit 41 does not detect the ON state of the setting key switch 37 when the power supply is restarted after the power supply has been stopped, and when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power supply was stopped. By initializing the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12, when an error code or a display other than the setting code (navigation number or number of paid coins) is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the gaming auxiliary display 12 12 is in a hidden state.

In addition, the main control unit 41 is configured to control the power supply after the power supply is stopped while the navigation notification is being executed and the navigation number (1 to 13) indicating the operation mode is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. If the ON state of the setting key switch 37 is not detected when the power supply is resumed and the state is to be returned to the state in which the navigation notification was being executed before the power supply was stopped, the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12 is initialized. By doing so, the game auxiliary display 12 is put into a non-display state. In this case, the main control unit 41 converts the navigation number indicating the operation mode into display data at the timing when the reel rotates at a constant speed and the stop operation is enabled after the reel rotation is restarted by the reel stop process. By setting it again in the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12, the navigation number (1 to 13) indicating the operation mode can be displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12.

With this configuration, even if the power supply is stopped while the display data for the number of payout coins has been set, and the set value is set when the power supply is started, the set value will not be set. Even if there are no coins to be paid out, the display data for the number of coins to be paid out will be deleted and the gaming auxiliary display 12 will not be displayed, so when the store is closed, the power consumption will be Even if the supply is stopped, it is possible to prevent whether or not the set value has been set based on whether or not the display data of the number of coins to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 when the store opens the next day. . In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the navigation number (1 to 13) indicating the operation mode is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state. is not detected and the navigation notification is being executed before the power supply is stopped, the gaming auxiliary display 12 will not be displayed, but after the reels have resumed rotation, the reels will continue to rotate at a constant speed. On the condition that the stop operation is enabled, the operation display data is set in the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12, so after the power supply is resumed, the reels rotate at a constant speed and the stop operation is enabled. At the same timing, the game auxiliary display 12 can resume displaying the navigation numbers (1 to 13) indicating the operation mode.

[Effect 6]
In this embodiment, when the navigation target combination that is the target of the navigation notification is won and the navigation notification is performed, the main control unit 41 sets a navigation number corresponding to the operation mode to be notified in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. do. In addition, in the operation signal setting process, the main control unit 41 transmits to the test device an operation signal that can specify the recommended stop order and stop execution position in the game. Then, in the operation signal setting process, when the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area in the game is 1 or more, that is, when navigation notification is performed, the navigation number is set as the symbol stop pattern number, and the symbol stop pattern A process of specifying stop order data indicating the stop order corresponding to the number, a process of specifying stop execution symbol number data indicating the stop execution symbols of the first to third stop reels corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number, This is a configuration in which an operation signal is generated that can be performed separately and specify the recommended stopping order and the stopping execution positions of the first to third stopping reels.

With this configuration, the process of specifying the stop order data using the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area, and the process of specifying the stop execution symbol number data using the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area. In order to create an operation signal that can specify the process to specify, the recommended stop order, and the stop execution position of the first to third stop reels, the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area is executed separately. Compared to the method in which both the stop order data and the stop execution symbol number data are specified in one process, it is easier to manage the stop order data and the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the symbol stop pattern number, and only the stop order is specified. Regardless of the configuration in which the stop execution position is notified, the configuration in which only the stop execution position is notified, or the configuration in which both the stop order and the stop execution position are notified, it is easy to use the program that creates the operation signal.

In this embodiment, when the navigation target combination that is the target of the navigation notification is won and the navigation notification is performed, the main control unit 41 sets a navigation number corresponding to the operation mode to be notified in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. do. In addition, in the operation signal setting process, the main control unit 41 transmits to the test device an operation signal that can specify the stop order and timing of the stop operation recommended in the game.

Then, in the operation signal setting process, when the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area in the game is 1 or more, that is, when navigation notification is performed, the navigation number is set as the symbol stop pattern number, and first, the symbol Identify the stop execution symbol number of each reel corresponding to the stop pattern number, and convert the identified stop execution symbol number of each reel into stop execution position data indicating the number of steps from the reel reference position corresponding to the stop execution symbol number. However, it is configured to create an operation signal that can specify the stop execution position data of each of the first to third stop reels.

With such a configuration, an operation signal that can specify the stop execution position data indicating the number of steps from the reel reference position corresponding to the stop execution symbols of the first to third stop reels is output, On the testing device side, even when specifying the stop execution position of models with different numbers of symbols on one reel, it is possible to specify the stop execution position using a common program.

Also, when specifying the stop execution position using the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c, instead of directly specifying the number of steps from the reel reference position as the stop execution position, first set the navigation number. The stop execution symbol number of each reel is specified using the navigation number set in the area, and the stop execution symbol number of each identified reel is used to indicate the number of steps from the reel reference position corresponding to the stop execution symbol number. By converting to position data, the number of steps from the reel reference position is specified as the stop execution position of the first to third stop reels, and at the program creation stage, the stop execution symbols for each symbol can be determined. Since the stop execution position can be determined from the number, the stop execution position can be easily managed.

In this embodiment, in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c, when a navigation target combination that is the target of navigation notification is won and navigation notification is performed, 1 to 13 assigned to each operation mode notified by navigation notification are stored in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c. The configuration is such that one of the consecutive navigation numbers is set. With this configuration, the navigation number assigned to each operation mode notified by navigation notification is a consecutive number from 1 to 13, so operations can be performed using the navigation number set in the navigation number setting area. This facilitates processing when specifying aspects.

In this embodiment, in the navigation number setting area of the RAM 41c, if neither the general role nor the special role has been won, or if any general role other than the navigation target role has been won, any navigation target role has been won. , 0 is set when navigation notification is not performed, and the operation signal setting process is performed when the winning number (general role) and winning number (special role), that is, the internal This is a configuration in which a symbol stop pattern number is set according to the result of the lottery, and an operation signal is created based on the symbol stop pattern number. With such a configuration, when the navigation notification is not performed, it is possible to create an operation signal that can specify the operation mode according to the result of the internal lottery.

In this embodiment, a stop order data table is provided in which stop order data indicating a stop order corresponding to a navigation number (symbol stop pattern number) is stored, and the stop order data table includes navigation numbers (symbol stop pattern numbers): Even if common stop order data corresponds to multiple types of navigation numbers (symbol stop pattern numbers), such as the stop order data corresponding to numbers 1 and 7, each navigation number (symbol stop pattern number) is This is a configuration in which stop order data is stored. With this configuration, the stop order data table includes the corresponding stop order for each navigation number (symbol stop pattern number) even if the stop order corresponding to the navigation number (symbol stop pattern number) is common. Since the order data is stored, the program for specifying the stop order of each reel using the navigation number (symbol stop pattern number) does not become complicated.

In this embodiment, a stop execution symbol number table is provided that can specify the stop execution symbol numbers of the first to third stop reels corresponding to the navigation number (symbol stop pattern number), and the stop execution symbol number table includes the following: Navi number (symbol stop pattern number): Even if common stop execution symbol number data corresponds to multiple types of navigation numbers (symbol stop pattern numbers), such as stop execution symbol number data corresponding to 1 to 6. , the stop execution symbol number data is stored separately for each navigation number (symbol stop pattern number). With this configuration, the stop execution symbol number table has data for each navigation number (symbol stop pattern number) even if the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the navigation number (symbol stop pattern number) is common. Since the corresponding stop execution symbol number data is stored, the program for specifying the stop execution positions of the first to third stop reels using the navigation number (symbol stop pattern number) does not become complicated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stop execution symbol number table includes stop execution symbol number data corresponding to navigation numbers (symbol stop pattern numbers) 1 to 6, including any of the first to third stop reels. The reels also have a configuration in which stop execution symbol number data having a common stop execution symbol number are stored in consecutive address areas. With this configuration, common stop execution symbol number data is stored in consecutive address areas in the stop execution symbol number table, so at the program creation stage, it is stored for each navigation number (symbol stop pattern number). It becomes easy to manage the corresponding stop execution symbol number data.

In this example, if red left middle bell A and red left middle bell B are won among the navigation target combinations, the stop order of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel, and the stop execution position of the left reel are in the red 7 area. It is more advantageous for the player if the player operates in an operation mode in which the stop execution position of the left reel is in the white 7 area, and in the operation mode setting process, the red left middle bell A, If red left middle bell B is won and a navigation notification is performed, stop order data indicating the stop order of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel and a stop execution symbol where the stop execution position of the left reel is the red 7 area. Create an operation signal that can identify the number data, and if any navigation target winning combination is won and navigation notification is not performed, stop order data indicating the stop order of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel and the left reel. This configuration creates an operation signal that can specify the stop execution symbol number data where the stop execution position is in the red 7 area. With this configuration, even if the navigation notification is not performed, if red left middle bell A and red left middle bell B are won, the test equipment side can receive an advantageous operation mode from the operation signal. It becomes possible to specify.

In this embodiment, the operation signal setting process is performed as the stop execution symbol number of the first stop reel, second stop reel, and third stop reel when any of the navigation target combinations is won and the navigation notification is not performed. This is a configuration that creates an operation signal that can specify stop execution symbol number data in which the same symbol number is set. With this configuration, if any navigation target winning combination is won and navigation notification is not performed, the stop execution position specified from the operation signal will be the same for all reels, so the program At the creation stage, it becomes easy to manage the stop execution position when navigation notification is not performed.

In the present embodiment, the operation signal setting process is performed in a predetermined range within a predetermined range for reels that are more advantageous to the player when a stop operation is performed within a predetermined range than when a stop operation is performed outside the predetermined range. This configuration creates an operation signal that can specify the stop execution symbol number data in which the symbol number of a symbol that is one or more symbols away from the boundary with the outside is set as the stop execution position symbol. With such a configuration, an operation signal that can specify the stop execution symbol number data in which the symbol number of a symbol that is one or more symbols away from the boundary with the outside of the predetermined range within the predetermined range is set as the stop execution position symbol is generated. Therefore, even if there is a delay in the detection of the operation signal on the test equipment side or the output of the operation signal that requests the slot machine 1 to stop operation due to the detection of the operation signal, the slot machine will be activated within a predetermined timing. It becomes possible to output an operation signal to 1.

In this embodiment, the operation signal setting process is performed for both reels, even when the special winning combination is not won and the navigation notification is not performed, and when the special winning combination is won and the navigation notification is not performed. This configuration also creates an operation signal that can specify the stop execution symbol number data in which the stop execution symbol number indicating the same symbol number is set. With this configuration, even if the special prize is not won and the navigation notification is not performed, the special prize will be displayed for all reels even if the special prize is won and the navigation notification is not performed. Since an operation signal is created that can specify the same stop execution symbol number data in which a stop execution symbol number indicating a symbol number that is outside the pull-in range is set, it is easy to manage the stop execution position at the program creation stage. .

In this embodiment, a stop execution symbol number table is provided that can specify the stop execution symbol numbers of the first to third stop reels, and the stop execution corresponds to the case where the special combination is not won and the navigation notification is not performed. The symbol number data and the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the case where the special combination is won and the navigation notification is not performed are stored separately. With this configuration, the stop execution symbol number table contains the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the case where the special role is not won and the navigation notification is not performed, and the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the case where the special role is won and the navigation notification is not performed. Since the stop execution symbol number data corresponding to the case where the notification is not performed are stored separately, there are cases where the special role is not won and the navigation notification is not performed, and cases where the special role is won and the navigation notification is not performed. The program can be shared with a model that outputs an operation signal that can specify a different stop execution position depending on whether the notification is not performed or not.

In this example, the special combination includes BB1 and BB2 with different symbol combinations, the stop execution position includes an area where both BB1 and BB2 are outside the pull-in range, and the operation signal setting process shows that BB1 has won, Even if navigation notification is not performed, BB2 has been won, and even if navigation notification is not performed, common stop execution symbols that are included in the area where both BB1 and BB2 are outside the pull-in range for any reel. This configuration creates an operation signal that allows identification of a number. With this configuration, even if BB1 has won and the navigation notification is not performed, even if BB2 has won and the navigation notification is not performed, BB1 will not be displayed on any reel. BB2 also creates an operation signal that can specify the common stop execution symbol number included in the area outside the pull-in range, so even if you have multiple types of special combinations, you can easily determine the stop execution position for creating the operation signal. Management becomes easier.

[Effect 7]
In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is capable of executing a user program, and sends signals (electrical component drive signals, drive command signals, command signals) to devices connected to the main control unit 41 via a data bus. etc.) is equipped with an output port. Further, the instructions executable by the user program include a 1-byte OUT instruction that can output an 8-bit parallel signal based on 1-byte data set in the A register from a specified output port. Furthermore, the A register is initialized by the system program at startup before the user program is started, so that 00 (H) is stored in the A register.

In addition, after the start of the user program, the main control unit 41 initializes the output port in the main process for advancing the game that is performed after the startup process, or in the power outage process that is performed when a power outage is detected. , After clearing the A register to 00 (H) with the XOR instruction, initialize the specified output port based on the data set in the A register by specifying the output port and executing a 1-byte OUT instruction, All signals output from the initialized output port are turned OFF (00 (H)).

On the other hand, in the startup process of Embodiment 2 in this example, when the main control unit 41 initializes the output port in the startup process accompanying the start of the user program, the main control unit 41 stores the output port in the A register after the start of the user program. Before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in the A register, specify the output port and execute a 1-byte OUT instruction without executing an XOR instruction etc. that sets the data stored in the A register to 00 (H). This configuration initializes the specified output port based on the data set in the A register, and turns all the signals output from the initialized output port OFF (00 (H)).

With this configuration, after the user program starts, the output port can be initialized in the main process to proceed with the game after the startup process, or in the power outage process that is performed when a power outage is detected. After clearing the A register to 00 (H) using the XOR instruction, it is necessary to specify the output port and execute a 1-byte OUT instruction, but the output port is initialized during the startup process when the user program starts. In this case, since 00 (H) is stored in the A register before the main control unit 41 is started and the user program is started, the data stored in the A register after the start of the user program is Before executing an instruction that changes the A register, specify the output port and execute a 1-byte OUT instruction without executing an XOR instruction that sets the data stored in the A register to 00 (H). The specified output port is initialized based on the data set in . Therefore, the number of instructions when initializing the output port upon starting the user program can be reduced.

In the start-up process of Embodiment 2 in this example, when initializing a plurality of output ports in the start-up process accompanying the start of the user program, the main control unit 41 stores the output ports in the A register after the start of the user program. Before executing an instruction that changes the data in the A register, specify the output port and execute a 1-byte OUT instruction to initialize the specified output port based on the data set in the A register. Specify another output port and issue a 1-byte OUT command without performing processing to change the value of the A register, including an XOR command to clear it, and output another output specified based on the data set in the A register. This is a configuration that initializes the port. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions when initializing a plurality of output ports upon starting a user program.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes a plurality of output ports in the main process for advancing the game performed after the startup process or in the power outage process performed when a power outage is detected. After clearing the A register to 00 (H) with the XOR instruction, specify the output port and execute a 1-byte OUT instruction to initialize the specified output port based on the data set in the A register, and then , based on the data set in the A register by specifying another output port and executing a 1-byte OUT command without performing any processing that changes the value of the A register, including the XOR instruction that clears the A register. This is a configuration that initializes another output port. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions when initializing a plurality of output ports in main processing or power-off processing.

In this embodiment, the instructions executable by the user program include a 2-byte OUT instruction that can output a 16-bit parallel signal based on 2-byte data set in the HL register from a specified output port. Further, the HL register is initialized by the system program at startup before the user program is started, so that 0000 (H) is stored in the HL register.

In the startup process of Embodiment 2 in this example, the main control unit 41 initializes two successive output ports in the startup process accompanying the start of the user program. Before executing an instruction to change data, specify the first output port and execute a 2-byte OUT instruction without executing a CLR instruction etc. that sets the data stored in the HL register to 0000 (H). A configuration in which two consecutive output ports including the specified output port are initialized based on the data set in the HL register, and all signals output from the initialized output ports are turned OFF (0000 (H)). It is.

With this configuration, when initializing two consecutive output ports in the startup process accompanying the start of the user program, the HL Since 0000 (H) is stored in the register, after the user program starts, before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in the HL register, use the CLR instruction to clear the data stored in the HL register. etc., by specifying the first output port and executing a 2-byte OUT command, two consecutive output ports including the specified output port are initialized based on the data set in the HL register. It has become. Therefore, the number of instructions when initializing the output port upon starting the user program can be reduced.

In the startup process of Embodiment 2 in this example, the main control unit 41 is configured to output signals from an output port to electrical components such as a segment display, an LED, a solenoid, and a motor connected to the main control unit 41. It is. With such a configuration, the output port is initialized in the startup process that accompanies the start of the user program, thereby preventing electrical components from being driven in an unstable situation at the time of startup.

[Effect 8]
In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute a user program, and an executable instruction in the user program transfers arbitrary 1-byte data (n) to an area at a specified address or a specified register. and a second LD instruction to transfer 1 byte of data set in the A register to a specified address area or specified register. Since the second LD instruction does not include the data to be transferred in the program, its program capacity is smaller than that of the first LD instruction which includes the data to be transferred in the program. Furthermore, the A register is initialized by the system program at startup before the user program is started, so that 00 (H) is stored in the A register.

In the startup process of Embodiment 4 in this example, when the main control unit 41 initializes the output port 8 register and I register in the startup process accompanying the start of the user program, after the user program starts, the main control unit 41 Before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in a register, specify the address of the output port 8 register or the I register without executing an LD instruction that sets the A register to 00 (H). The configuration is such that the output port 8 register and I register are initialized and set to 00 (H) based on the data set in the A register by executing the 2LD instruction.

With this configuration, when the output port 8 register and I register are initialized and set to 00 (H) in the startup process associated with the start of the user program, the specified address area or specified register is Among the first LD instruction that transfers arbitrary 1-byte data (n) and the second LD instruction that transfers 1-byte data set in the A register to the specified address area or specified register, the second LD instruction that has a smaller program capacity The output port register and I register are initialized using the 2LD instruction, which reduces the program capacity.

Furthermore, since 00 (H) is stored in the A register before the main control unit 41 is activated and the user program is started, the data stored in the A register is changed after the user program is started. Before executing the instruction, do not execute the LD command etc. that sets 00 (H) in the A register, but specify the address of the output port 8 register and the I register and execute the second LD command to set it in the A register. The output port 8 register and I register are initialized based on the input data. Therefore, the number of instructions required to initialize the output port registers and I registers upon starting the user program can be reduced.

In the startup process of Embodiment 4 in this example, the I register is initialized and set to 00 (H) only in the startup process that is first performed upon starting the user program. With this configuration, the I register is initialized only in the first startup process that is performed when the user program starts, and thereafter maintains its value until the power is cut off, and is not used during other processes. However, when initializing the I register in the first startup process performed when a user program starts, the second LD instruction, which has a smaller program capacity than the first LD instruction, is used to initialize the I register. By initializing the register, you can reduce the program capacity associated with initializing the I register, and also set the A register to 00 after starting the user program and before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in the A register. By specifying the I register and executing the second LD command without executing the LD command etc. that sets (H), the I register is initialized based on the data set in the A register. Since the number of instructions required to initialize the program is reduced, and the program capacity can be further reduced, the process of setting 00 (H) in the I register, which is performed only during startup processing, can be suitably performed.

In the startup process of Embodiment 4 in this example, when the I register is initialized in the startup process that is performed first with the start of the user program, the data stored in the A register is changed after the user program starts. Based on the data set in the A register by specifying the I register and executing the second LD command without executing the LD command etc. that sets 00 (H) in the A register before executing the instruction to This configuration initializes the I register. With this configuration, when initializing the I register in the startup process that is performed first upon starting a user program, the I register is initialized using the second LD instruction, which has a smaller program capacity than the first LD instruction. By initializing it, you can reduce the program capacity associated with initializing the I register, and also write 00 (H ), the I register is initialized based on the data set in the A register by specifying the I register and executing the second LD command. This reduces the number of instructions required for programming, and further reduces the program capacity.

In the startup process of Embodiment 4 in this example, the I register is configured such that 00 (H) is stored in the I register before the main control unit 41 is activated and the user program is started. With such a configuration, 00 (H) is stored in the I register before the main control unit 41 is activated and the user program is started, but the startup process accompanying the start of the user program Since the I register is also initialized in , it is possible to ensure that the I register is initialized.

In the startup process of Embodiment 4 in this example, the output port is initialized by specifying the output port and executing a 1-byte OUT instruction without executing the instruction to set the A register to 00 (H). It is also possible to have a configuration in which

With this configuration, after the user program starts and before executing an instruction to change the data stored in the A register, an instruction to set the data stored in the A register to 00 (H) can be executed. By executing the 1-byte OUT instruction without executing it, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions when initializing the output port upon starting the user program.

In addition, in the configuration in which the output port is initialized in the startup process of Embodiment 4 in this example, when the output port is initialized in the startup process that is performed first with the start of the user program, after the user program starts , before executing an instruction that changes the data stored in the A register, initialize the specified output port based on the data set in the A register by specifying the output port and issuing a 1-byte OUT instruction. At the same time, the data stored in the A register is generated between the process of specifying the output port and issuing a 1-byte OUT command, and the process of specifying the address of the output port 8 register and the I register and issuing the second LD command. It is also possible to have a configuration in which no instruction to change is executed.

With this configuration, the A register is used between the process of specifying the output port and issuing a 1-byte OUT command, and the process of specifying the address of the output port 8 register and the I register and executing the second LD command. Since no instructions are executed to change the data stored in the output port, the number of instructions required to initialize the output port and initialize the output port 8 register and I register upon starting the user program can be reduced.

[Effect 9]
In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is capable of executing a user program, and sends signals (electrical component drive signals, drive command signals, command signals) to devices connected to the main control unit 41 via a data bus. etc.) is equipped with an output port. Further, the instructions executable by the user program include a 1-byte OUT instruction that can output an 8-bit parallel signal based on 1-byte data set in the A register from a specified output port. Furthermore, the A register is initialized by the system program at startup before the user program is started, so that 00 (H) is stored in the A register.

In addition, after the start of the user program, the main control unit 41 initializes the output port in the main process for advancing the game that is performed after the startup process, or in the power outage process that is performed when a power outage is detected. , After clearing the A register to 00 (H) with the XOR instruction, initialize the specified output port based on the data set in the A register by specifying the output port and executing a 1-byte OUT instruction, All signals output from the initialized output port are turned OFF (00 (H)).

In the start-up process of Embodiment 1 in this example, when initializing the output port in the start-up process accompanying the start of the user program, the main control unit 41 uses the After clearing to 00 (H), specify the output port and execute a 1-byte OUT command to initialize the specified output port based on the data set in the A register, and then write the initialized output port. The configuration is such that all the signals output from the terminal are OFF (00(H)).

With this configuration, after the user program starts, the output port can be initialized in the main process to proceed with the game after the startup process, or in the power outage process that is performed when a power outage is detected. After clearing the A register to 00 (H) using the XOR instruction, it is necessary to specify the output port and issue a 1-byte OUT instruction.

On the other hand, when initializing the output port in the startup process accompanying the start of the user program, 00 (H) is stored in the A register before the main control unit 41 is started and the user program is started. Originally, the output port should be initialized even if a 1-byte OUT instruction is executed without executing an XOR instruction etc. that sets the data stored in the A register to 00 (H). It is not necessary to perform an XOR instruction to set the data stored in the A register to 00 (H), but even in this case, after clearing the A register to 00 (H) with an XOR command, specify the output port. By executing a 1-byte OUT command, the specified output port is initialized based on the data set in the A register. Therefore, even if data other than 00 (H) is stored in the A register due to a momentary power failure, etc., the output port will be initialized when the user program starts. Can be guaranteed.

In the start-up process of Embodiment 1 in this example, when initializing a plurality of output ports in the start-up process accompanying the start of the user program, the main control unit 41 uses the A register by an XOR instruction after starting the user program. After clearing to 00 (H), specify the output port and execute a 1-byte OUT command to initialize the specified output port based on the data set in the A register, and then clear the A register. Execute a 1-byte OUT command by specifying another output port without performing any processing that changes the value of the A register, including an XOR instruction, etc. This is a configuration that initializes the . With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions when initializing a plurality of output ports upon starting a user program.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes a plurality of output ports in the main process for advancing the game performed after the startup process or in the power outage process performed when a power outage is detected. After clearing the A register to 00 (H) with the XOR instruction, specify the output port and execute a 1-byte OUT instruction to initialize the specified output port based on the data set in the A register, and then , based on the data set in the A register by specifying another output port and executing a 1-byte OUT command without performing any processing that changes the value of the A register, including the XOR instruction that clears the A register. This is a configuration that initializes another output port. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of instructions when initializing a plurality of output ports in main processing or power-off processing.

In this embodiment, the instructions executable by the user program include a 2-byte OUT instruction that can output a 16-bit parallel signal based on 2-byte data set in the HL register from a specified output port. Further, the HL register is initialized by the system program at startup before the user program is started, so that 0000 (H) is stored in the HL register.

In the start-up process of Embodiment 1 in this embodiment, when initializing two consecutive output ports in the start-up process accompanying the start of the user program, the main control unit 41 controls the CLR after the start of the user program. After clearing the HL register to 0000 (H) with a command, specify the first output port and execute a 2-byte OUT command to read consecutive data including the specified output port based on the data set in the HL register. The configuration is such that two output ports are initialized and all signals output from the initialized output ports are turned OFF (0000 (H)).

With this configuration, when initializing two consecutive output ports in the startup process accompanying the start of the user program, the HL Since 0000 (H) is stored in the register, even if a 2-byte OUT instruction is executed without executing a CLR instruction etc. that sets the data stored in the HL register to 0000 (H), The two consecutive output ports should be initialized, and there is no need to perform a CLR instruction etc. that sets the data stored in the HL register to 0000 (H), but even in this case, the HL register cannot be set by the CLR instruction. After clearing it to 0000 (H), specify the first output port and execute a 2-byte OUT command to read two consecutive output ports including the specified output port based on the data set in the HL register. It is set to be initialized. Therefore, even if data other than 0000 (H) remains stored in the HL register due to a momentary power failure, etc., the output port will be initialized when the user program starts. Can be guaranteed.

In the startup process of Embodiment 1 in this example, the main control unit 41 is configured to output signals from an output port to electrical components such as a segment display, an LED, a solenoid, and a motor connected to the main control unit 41. It is. With such a configuration, the output port is initialized in the startup process that accompanies the start of the user program, thereby preventing electrical components from being driven in an unstable situation at the time of startup.

[Effect 10]
In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute a user program, and an executable instruction in the user program transfers arbitrary 1-byte data (n) to an area at a specified address or a specified register. and a second LD instruction to transfer 1 byte of data set in the A register to a specified address area or specified register. Since the second LD instruction does not include the data to be transferred in the program, its program capacity is smaller than that of the first LD instruction which includes the data to be transferred in the program. Furthermore, the A register is initialized by the system program at startup before the user program is started, so that 00 (H) is stored in the A register.

In the startup process of Embodiment 3 in this example, when the main control unit 41 initializes the output port 8 register and I register in the startup process accompanying the start of the user program, after the user program starts, the main control unit 41 uses the LD After setting the A register to 00 (H) by the instruction, specifying the address of the output port 8 register and the I register and executing the second LD instruction, the output port 8 register and I register are set based on the data set in the A register. This configuration initializes the register and sets it to 00 (H).

With this configuration, when the output port 8 register and I register are initialized and set to 00 (H) in the startup process associated with the start of the user program, the specified address area or specified register is Among the first LD instruction that transfers arbitrary 1-byte data (n) and the second LD instruction that transfers 1-byte data set in the A register to the specified address area or specified register, the second LD instruction that has a smaller program capacity The output port register and I register are initialized using the 2LD instruction, which reduces the program capacity.

In addition, since 00 (H) is stored in the A register before the main control unit 41 is activated and the user program is started, an LD instruction etc. that would normally set 00 (H) in the A register, etc. Even if you specify the address of the output port 8 register or I register and execute the second LD command without executing , the output port 8 register and I register should be initialized, and 00 (H) is written to the Although it is not necessary to perform an LD command etc. to set the As a result, the output port 8 register and I register are initialized based on the data set in the A register. Therefore, even if data other than 00 (H) is stored in the A register due to a momentary power failure, etc., the output port 8 register and I register will be initialized when the user program starts. It is possible to guarantee that the

In the startup process of Embodiment 3 in this example, the I register is initialized and set to 00 (H) only in the startup process that is first performed upon starting the user program. With this configuration, the I register is initialized only in the first startup process that is performed when the user program starts, and thereafter maintains its value until the power is cut off, and is not used during other processes. However, when initializing the I register in the first startup process performed when a user program starts, the second LD instruction, which has a smaller program capacity than the first LD instruction, is used to initialize the I register. By initializing the register, you can reduce the program capacity associated with initializing the I register, and after starting the user program, set the A register to 00 (H) with the LD instruction, and then specify the I register and start the program. By executing the 2LD instruction, the I register is initialized based on the data set in the A register, so if data other than 0 is stored in the A register due to a momentary power failure, etc. Even so, it is possible to ensure that the I register is initialized when the user program starts, so it is preferable to set the I register to 00 (H), which is performed only during startup processing. can.

In the start-up process of Embodiment 3 in this example, when the I register is initialized in the start-up process that is performed first with the start of the user program, 00 (H) is set in the A register by the LD instruction after the start of the user program. After setting, the I register is initialized based on the data set in the A register by specifying the I register and issuing a second LD command. With this configuration, when initializing the I register in the startup process that is performed first upon starting a user program, the I register is initialized using the second LD instruction, which has a smaller program capacity than the first LD instruction. By initializing it, you can reduce the program capacity associated with initializing the I register, and after starting the user program, set the A register to 00 (H) with the LD instruction, and then specify the I register and execute the second LD instruction. By doing this, the I register is initialized based on the data set in the A register, so even if data other than 0 is stored in the A register due to an instantaneous power outage, etc., the I register is initialized. Even if the user program is started, it can be ensured that the I register is initialized at the start of the user program.

In the startup process of Embodiment 3 in this example, the I register is configured such that 00 (H) is stored in the I register before the main control unit 41 is activated and the user program is started. With such a configuration, 00 (H) is stored in the I register before the main control unit 41 is activated and the user program is started, but the startup process accompanying the start of the user program Since the I register is also initialized in , it is possible to ensure that the I register is initialized.

In the startup process of Embodiment 3 in this example, the main control unit 41 sends data of 00 (H) defined as the initial value (OUTINI) of the output port 8 register to the ROM 41b or interrupts the ROM 41b by the LD instruction. By storing the data 00 (H) defined as the upper address (INT) of the vector in the A register, the value of the A register is set to 00 (H), and then the address of the output port 8 register or the I register is specified. By executing the second LD command, the output port 8 register and the I register are initialized based on the data set in the A register. With this configuration, the initial values set in the output port 8 register and the I register can be managed using data defined in the ROM 41b.

In the startup process of Embodiment 3 in this example, when initializing the output port 8 register, the LD instruction stores the data 00 (H) defined as the initial value (OUTINI) of the output port 8 register in the ROM 41b. To set the value of the A register to 00 (H) and initialize the I register by storing the The configuration is such that the value of the A register is set to 00 (H) by storing the data of the A register in the A register. With such a configuration, the initial value set in the output port 8 register and the initial value set in the I register can be managed by individual data defined in the ROM 41b.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

In the above embodiment, an example was explained in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which the number of bets is set using medals and credits as the gaming value. The present invention may be applied to a fully credit-type slot machine in which the number of bets is set using only credits as a gaming value.

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, an example was shown in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is applicable to any gaming machine that plays a predetermined game, such as a pachinko game machine that plays a game by playing a game, or a general game machine other than a slot machine or a pachinko game machine.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 51 Liquid crystal display 41 Main control section 91 Sub control section

Claims (1)

In gaming machines that play games,
Equipped with a microcomputer that can execute user programs,
The instructions executable by the user program include a first transfer instruction to transfer arbitrary data to a specified storage area, and a second transfer instruction to transfer data stored in a specific register to the specified storage area. including,
The second transfer instruction has a smaller program capacity than the first transfer instruction,
In a startup operation before the microcomputer is started and the user program is started, performing pre-start initialization to store 0 in the specific register;
After the user program starts, when a specific storage area is initialized at a specific timing before the 0 stored in the specific register in the pre-start initialization is rewritten by the user program , the pre-start initialization resets the specific storage area to 0. After executing an instruction to set the data of the specific register in which is stored to 0, specifying the specific storage area and executing the second transfer instruction to set the data stored in the specific storage area to 0. A gaming machine.

Images